Il4 Amf9

InteliLite 4
AMF 9
Controller for single gen-set
applications
SW version 1.0.0
1 Document information 5
2 System overview 10
3 Applications overview 18
4 Installation and wiring 20
5 Controller setup 56
6 Communication 160
7 Technical data 181
8 Appendix 182
Copyright © 2021 ComAp a.s.

Written by Jan Liptak
Prague, Czech Republic
ComAp a.s., U Uranie 1612/14a,
170 00 Prague 7, Czech Republic
Tel: +420 246 012 111
E-mail: info@comap-control.com, www.comap-control.com Global Guide
Table of contents
1 Document information 5 2.6.3 Inteli AIN8TC 15
1.1 Clarification of Notation 5 2.6.4 Inteli AIO9/1 16
1.2 About this Global Guide 5 2.6.5 IGS-PTM 16
1.3 Legal notice 5 2.6.6 IGL-RA15 17
1.3.1 General security recommendations and
set of measures 6 3 Applications overview 18
1.3.2 Used open source software 7 3.1 AMF – Automatic Mains Failure Start 18
1.4 General warnings 7 3.2 MRS – Manual Remote Start 19
1.4.1 Remote control and programing 7

4 Installation and wiring 20
1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility 7
4.1 Package content 20
1.4.3 Dangerous voltage 7
4.2 Controller installation 20
1.4.4 Adjust the setpoints 7
4.2.1 Dimensions 20
1.5 Functions and protections 8
4.2.2 Mounting 21
1.6 Certifications and standards 8
4.3 Terminal Diagram 22
1.7 Document history 8
4.4 Recommended wiring 23
1.8 Symbols in this manual 9
4.4.1 General 24
2 System overview 10 4.4.2 Grounding 24
2.1 General description 10 4.4.3 Power supply 24
2.1.1 The key features of InteliLite 4 10 4.4.4 Measurement wiring 25
2.2 True RMS measurement 10 4.4.5 Magnetic pick-up 44
2.3 Configurability and monitoring 10 4.4.6 Binary inputs 45
2.3.1 Supported configuration and monitoring 4.4.7 Binary Outputs 46

tools 10 4.4.8 E-Stop 47
2.3.2 Configuration parts 11 4.4.9 Emergency stop 47
2.4 PC Tools 12 4.4.10 Analog inputs 48
2.4.1 InteliConfig 12 4.4.11 CAN bus and RS485 wiring 50
2.4.2 WebSupervisor 12 4.4.12 USB 53
2.4.3 WinScope 12 4.5 Plug-in module installation 53
2.5 Plug-in Modules 13 4.5.1 Installation 53
2.5.1 CM3-Ethernet 13 4.6 Maintenance 54
2.5.2 CM2-4G-GPS 13 4.6.1 Backup battery replacement 54
2.5.3 CM-RS232-485 13
5 Controller setup 56
2.5.4 EM-BIO8-EFCP 14
5.1 Default configuration 56
2.6 CAN modules 14
5.1.1 Binary inputs 56
2.6.1 Inteli IO8/8 14
5.1.2 Binary outputs 56
2.6.2 Inteli AIN8 15
InteliLite 4 AMF 9 1.0.0 Global Guide 2

5.1.3 Analog inputs 56 5.5.15 Exercise timers 128
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools 5.5.16 Analog switches 135
connection 57 5.5.17 Voltage phase sequence detection 135
5.2.1 USB 57 5.5.18 Load shedding 135
5.2.2 RS232/RS485 58 5.5.19 Sensor curves 137
5.2.3 Ethernet 59 5.5.20 PLC 138
5.3 Operator Guide 62 5.5.21 Geo-fencing 144
5.3.1 Front panel elements 62 5.5.22 Aftertreatment Support 144
5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure 64 5.5.23 Alternate configuration 147
5.3.3 Browsing alarms 77 5.5.24 E-Stop 147
5.3.4 Login 78 5.5.25 ECU Frequency selection 148
5.3.5 Production mode 81 5.5.26 User setpoints 148
5.3.6 Information screen 82 5.6 User management and data access control 150
5.3.7 Language selection 84 5.6.1 Types of interfaces 150
5.3.8 Display contrast adjustment 85 5.6.2 User accounts 151
5.4 Remote Display 86 5.6.3 Managing accounts 153
5.4.1 General description 86 5.6.4 Account break protection 154
5.4.2 IL4-RD Firmware installation 86 5.6.5 Access to controller data 155
5.4.3 Wiring 87 5.6.6 Cybernetic security 155
5.4.4 Interconnection variants 87
5.4.5 Connection process 88 6 Communication 160
5.4.6 Connection troubleshooting 88 6.1 PC 160
5.4.7 Function description 89 6.1.1 Direct communication 160
5.4.8 Firmware compatibility 89 6.1.2 Remote communication 161
5.5 Functions 90 6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 166
5.5.1 Operating Modes 90 6.2.1 SNMP 167
5.5.2 Start-stop sequence 92 6.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP 168
5.5.3 Engine start 94

7 Technical data 181
5.5.4 Stabilization 98
5.5.5 Connecting to load 98 8 Appendix 182
5.5.6 MRS operation 98 8.1 Controller objects 182
5.5.7 AMF operation 98 8.1.1 List of controller objects types 182
5.5.8 Dual Operation 101 8.1.2 Setpoints 182
5.5.9 Engine cool down and stop 104 8.1.3 Values 353
5.5.10 Gen-set operation states 104 8.1.4 Logical binary inputs 400
5.5.11 Additional running engine indications 107 8.1.5 Logical binary outputs 419
5.5.12 History log 107 8.1.6 Logical analog inputs 457
5.5.13 Breaker control 108 8.1.7 PLC 462
5.5.14 Protections 112 8.2 Alarms 475

8.2.1 Alarm levels in the controller 475
8.2.2 Alarms level 1 475
8.3 Modules 530
8.3.1 Plug-in modules 530
8.3.2 CAN modules 541
6 back to Table of contents

1 Document information
1.1 Clarification of Notation 5
1.2 About this Global Guide 5
1.3 Legal notice 5
1.4 General warnings 7
1.5 Functions and protections 8
1.6 Certifications and standards 8
1.7 Document history 8
1.8 Symbols in this manual 9
1.1 Clarification of Notation

Note: This type of paragraph calls the reader’s attention to a notice or related theme.
IMPORTANT: This type of paragraph highlights a procedure, adjustment etc., which can cause a
damage or improper function of the equipment if not performed correctly and may not be clear at
first sight.
Example: This type of paragraph contains information that is used to illustrate how a specific function
works.
1.2 About this Global Guide

This manual contains important instructions for InteliLite 4 controllers family that shall be followed during
installation and maintenance of the controllers.
This manual provides general information how to install and operate InteliLite 4 controllers.
This manual is dedicated for:
Operators of Gen-sets
Gen-set control panel builders
For everybody who is concerned with installation, operation and maintenance of the Gen-set
1.3 Legal notice

This End User's Guide/Manual as part of the Documentation is an inseparable part of ComAp’s Product and
may be used exclusively according to the conditions defined in the “END USER or Distributor LICENSE
AGREEMENT CONDITIONS – COMAP CONTROL SYSTEMS SOFTWARE” (License Agreement) and/or in
the “ComAp a.s. Global terms and conditions for sale of Products and provision of Services” (Terms) and/or in
the “Standardní podmínky projektů komplexního řešení ke smlouvě o dílo, Standard Conditions for Supply of
Complete Solutions” (Conditions) as applicable.
ComAp’s License Agreement is governed by the Czech Civil Code 89/2012 Col., by the Authorship Act
121/2000 Col., by international treaties and by other relevant legal documents regulating protection of the
intellectual properties (TRIPS).
The End User and/or ComAp’s Distributor shall only be permitted to use this End User's Guide/Manual with
ComAp Control System Registered Products. The Documentation is not intended and applicable for any other
purpose.

Official version of the ComAp’s End User's Guide/Manual is the version published in English. ComAp reserves
the right to update this End User's Guide/Manual at any time. ComAp does not assume any responsibility for its
use outside of the scope of the Terms or the Conditions and the License Agreement.
Licensed End User is entitled to make only necessary number of copies of the End User's Guide/Manual. Any
translation of this End User's Guide/Manual without the prior written consent of ComAp is expressly prohibited!
Even if the prior written consent from ComAp is acquired, ComAp does not take any responsibility for the
content, trustworthiness and quality of any such translation. ComAp will deem a translation equal to this End
User's Guide/Manual only if it agrees to verify such translation. The terms and conditions of such verification
must be agreed in the written form and in advance.
For more details relating to the Ownership, Extent of Permitted Reproductions Term of Use of the
Documentation and to the Confidentiality rules please review and comply with the ComAp’s License
Agreement, Terms and Conditions available on www.comap-control.com.
Security Risk Disclaimer
Pay attention to the following recommendations and measures to increase the level of security of ComAp
products and services.
Please note that possible cyber-attacks cannot be fully avoided by the below mentioned recommendations and
set of measures already performed by ComAp, but by following them the cyber-attacks can be considerably
reduced and thereby to reduce the risk of damage. ComAp does not take any responsibility for the actions of
persons responsible for cyber-attacks, nor for any damage caused by the cyber-attack. However, ComAp is
prepared to provide technical support to resolve problems arising from such actions, including but not limited to
restoring settings prior to the cyber-attacks, backing up data, recommending other preventive measures against
any further attacks.
Warning: Some forms of technical support may be provided against payment. There is no legal or factual
entitlement for technical services provided in connection to resolving problems arising from cyber-attack or
other unauthorized accesses to ComAp's Products or Services.
1.3.1 General security recommendations and set of measures

1. Production mode
Disable production mode BEFORE the controller is put into regular operation.
2. User accounts
Change password for the existing default administrator account or replace that account with a
completely new one BEFORE the controller is put into regular operation mode.
Do not leave PC tools (e.g. InteliConfig) unattended while a user, especially administrator, is logged in.
3. AirGate Key
Change the AirGate Key BEFORE the device is connected to the network.
Use a secure AirGate Key – preferably a random string of 8 characters containing lowercase, uppercase
letters and digits.
Use a different AirGate Key for each device.
4. MODBUS/TCP
The MODBUS/TCP protocol (port TCP/502) is an instrumentation protocol designed to exchange data
between locally connected devices like sensors, I/O modules, controllers etc. By it's nature it does not
contain any kind of security – neither encryption nor authentication. Thus it is intended to be used only in
closed private network infrastructures.
Avoid using MODBUS/TCP in unprotected networks (e.g. Internet).

5. SNMP
The SNMP protocol (port UDP/161) version 1 and version 2 are not encrypted. They are intended to be
used only in closed private network infrastructures.
Avoid using SNMP v1 and v2 in unprotected networks (e.g. Internet).
1.3.2 Used open source software

License condition web
Name of software License name
address
Mbed TLS Apache 2.0 license
Aladin MD5 Zlib license
Segger License Agreement v.
EmbOS license
150515
emFile Segger License Agreement license
emUSB Device Segger License Agreement license
emUSB-Host Segger License Agreement license
Tiny Mersenne Twister
BSD 3 license
(tinymt32)
1.4 General warnings

1.4.1 Remote control and programing
Controller can be controlled remotely. In the event that maintenance of a Gen-set has to be done, or a controller
has to be programmed, check the following points to ensure that the engine cannot be started or any other parts
of the system cannot be affected.
Make sure:
Disconnect remote control
Disconnect binary outputs
1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility

Be aware to use a proper combination of SW and HW versions.
1.4.3 Dangerous voltage

In any case do not touch the terminals for voltage and current measurement!
Always connect grounding terminals!
In any case do not disconnect controller CT terminals!
1.4.4 Adjust the setpoints

All parameters are adjusted to their typical values. However the setpoints has to be checked and adjusted to
their real values before the first starting of the Gen-set.
IMPORTANT: Wrong adjustment of setpoints can destroy the Gen-set.

Note: The controller contains a large number of configurable setpoints, because of this it is impossible to
describe all of its functions. Some functions can be changed or have different behavior in different SW versions.
Always check the Global guide and New feature list for SW version which is used in a controller. This manual
only describes the product and is not guaranteed to be set for your application.
IMPORTANT: Be aware that the binary outputs can change state during and after software
reprogramming (before the controller is used again ensure that the proper configuration and
setpoint settings are set in the controller).
The following instructions are for qualified personnel only. To avoid personal injury do not perform any action not
specified in related guides for product.
1.5 Functions and protections

Support of functions and protections as defined by ANSI (American National Standards Institute):
Description ANSI code Description ANSI code

Voltage unbalance/Negative
Master unit 1 47
sequence voltage
Stopping device 5 Incomplete sequence relay 48
Multi-function device 11 Overcurrent 50/50TD
Overspeed 12 Earth fault** 50G
Underspeed 14 Overcurrent IDMT 51
Starting-to-running transition contactor 19 AC circuit breaker 52
Thermal relay 26 Overvoltage 59
Undervoltage 27 Pressure switch 63
Annunciator 30 Liquid level switch 71
Overload (real power) 32P Alarm relay*** 74
Reverse power 32R Reclosing relay 79
Master sequence device 34 Overfrequency 81O
Unit sequence starting* 44 Underfrequency 81U
Current unbalance 46 Auto selective control/transfer 83
*Dual-operation **Extension module EM-BIO8-EFCP required *** extension module IGL-RA15 required
1.6 Certifications and standards

EN 61000-6-2 EN 60068-2-6 (2÷25 Hz / ±1,6 mm; 25÷100 Hz / 4.0 g)
2
EN 61000-6-4 EN 60068-2-27 (a=500 m/s ; T=6 ms)
EN 61010-1 EN 60068-2-30:2005 25/55°C, RH 95%, 48hours
EN 60068-2-1 (-20 °C/16 h) EN 60529 (front panel IP65, back side IP20)
EN 60068-2-2 (70 °C/16 h)
1.7 Document history

Revision number Related sw. version Date Author
1 1.0.0 28.2.2021 Jan Liptak

1.8 Symbols in this manual
Connector - RS 232
3 x Phases Grounding
male male
Active RS 232
current Contact GSM female
sensor
GSM Starter
Contactor
AirGate modem
Switch -
Controller manually
Jumper
Alternating simplified operated
current
Module Transformer
Load
Analog simplified
modem
USB type B
Current
Mains male
measuring
Battery
USB type B
Current
Mains female
Binary measuring
output Voltage
Mobile
Diode measuring
Breaker provider
contact Wifi / WAN
Passive
Ethernet / LAN
current
Breaker male
sensor 6 back to Document
contact
Ethernet information
female Pick - up
Breaker
Fuel
solenoid Relay coil
Breaker
Relay coil of
Fuse slow-
Breaker
operating
Fuse switch
Resistor
Capacitor
Generator Resistor
Coil adjustable
Generator Resistive
Connector - schematic sensor
female RPTC

2 System overview
2.1 General description 10
2.2 True RMS measurement 10
2.3 Configurability and monitoring 10
2.4 PC Tools 12
2.5 Plug-in Modules 13
2.6 CAN modules 14
2.1 General description

InteliLite 4 family controller is a comprehensive set of Gen-set controllers for single Gen-set operating in stand-
by (MRS) or back-up (AMF) applications. A modular construction allows upgrades to different levels of
complexity in order to provide the best solution for various customer applications.
2.1.1 The key features of InteliLite 4

Easy-to-use operation and installation. The factory default configuration covers most applications.
Various customizations are possible thanks to its configurability
Excellent remote communication capabilities
High level of support for EFI engines (most world producers)
High reliability
2.2 True RMS measurement

This controller measures AC values based on True RMS principle. This principle corresponds exactly to the
physical definition of alternating voltage effective values. Under normal circumstances the mains voltage
should have a pure sinusoidal waveform. However some nonlinear elements connected to the mains produce
harmonic waveforms with frequencies of multiplies of the basic mains frequency and this may result in
deformation of the voltage waveforms. The True RMS measurement gives accurate readings of effective values
not only for pure sinusoidal waveforms, but also for deformed waveforms.
2.3 Configurability and monitoring

One of the key features of the controller is the system's high level of adaptability to the needs of each individual
application and wide possibilities for monitoring. This can be achieved by configuring and using the powerful
PC/mobile tools.
2.3.1 Supported configuration and monitoring tools

InteliConfig – complete configuration and single Gen-set monitoring
WebSupervisor – web-based system for monitoring and controlling
WebSupervisor mobile – supporting application for smart-phones
WinScope – special graphical monitoring software
Note: Use the InteliConfig PC software to read, view and modify configuration from the controller or disk and
write the new configuration to the controller or disk.

The firmware of a controller contains a large number of logical binary inputs and outputs needed for all
necessary functions available. However, not all functions are required at the same time on the same Gen-set
and also the controller hardware does not have so many input and output terminals. One of the main tasks of the
configuration is mapping of "logical" firmware inputs and outputs to the "physical" hardware inputs and outputs.
2.3.2 Configuration parts

Mapping of logical binary inputs (functions) or assigning alarms to physical binary input terminals
Mapping of logical binary outputs (functions) to physical binary output terminals
Assigning sensor characteristics (curves) and alarms to analog inputs
Selection of peripheral modules, which are connected to the controller, and doing the same (as mentioned
above) for them
Selection of ECU type, if an ECU is connected
Changing the language of the controller interface
Image 2.1 Principle of binary inputs and outputs configuration
The controller is shipped with a default configuration, which should be suitable for most standard applications.
This default configuration can be changed only by using a PC with the InteliConfig software. See InteliConfig
documentation for details.
Once the configuration is modified, it can be saved to a file for later usage with another controller or for backup
purposes. The file is called archive and has the file extension .ail4. An archive contains a full image of the
controller at the time of saving (if the controller is online for the PC) except the firmware. Besides configuration it
also contains current adjustment of all setpoints, all measured values, a copy of the history log and a copy of the
alarm list.
The archive can be simply used for cloning controllers, i.e. preparing controllers with identical configuration and
settings.

2.4 PC Tools
2.4.1 InteliConfig
Configuration and monitoring tool for InteliConfig controllers. See more in InteliConfig Reference Guide.
This tool provides the following functions:

Direct or internet communication with the
controller
Offline or online controller configuration
Controller firmware upgrade
Reading/writing/adjustment of setpoints
Reading of measured values
Browsing of controller history records
Exporting data into a XLS file
Controller language translation
2.4.2 WebSupervisor
Web-based system for monitoring and controlling of controllers. See more at the WebSupervisor webpage.

Site and fleet monitoring
Reading of measured values
Browsing of controller history records
On-line notification of alarms
Email notification
Also available as a smart-phone application
WebSupervisor available at: www.websupervisor.net

Demo account:
Login: comaptest
Password: ComAp123
2.4.3 WinScope
Special graphical controller monitoring software used mainly for commissioning and Gen-set troubleshooting.
See more in the WinScope Reference guide.

Monitoring and archiving of ComAp controller’s
parameters and values
View of actual / historical trends in controller
On-line change of controllers' parameters for
easy regulator setup

2.5 Plug-in Modules
2.5.1 CM3-Ethernet
Internet/Ethernet module.
0/100 Mbit interface over RJ45 socket

Remote control and monitoring of the controller
via InteliConfig, WebSupervisor
Modbus TCP support
Full SNMP support including traps (v1 & v2c)
Active e-mails sending
AirGate 2.0 technology support for easy
connection – no need of public and static IP
address
2.5.2 CM2-4G-GPS
GSM/4G Internet module and GPS locator
GSM/4G Internet module and GPS locator
Global 4G (LTE) module with 3G/2G backup
Remote control and monitoring of the controller
via InteliConfig, WebSupervisor
Active e-mails and SMS sending support
AirGate 2 technology support for easy
connection – no need of public and static IP
address
Tracking via GNSS (GPS,GLONASS) module
2.5.3 CM-RS232-485
Communication module with two communication ports.
RS232 and RS485 interface
Modbus
Serial connection to InteliConfig

2.5.4 EM-BIO8-EFCP
Hybrid current input and binary input/output extension module.
One additional AC current (CT) measuring for
Earth Fault Current protection (EFCP)
Wide range of measured current – one input for
1A and 1 input for 5A
Up to 8 additional configurable binary inputs or
outputs
Note: This protection is active ONLY when Engine
is running.
2.6 CAN modules

2.6.1 Inteli IO8/8
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, and 2 analog
outputs, or 16 binary inputs, 0 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs via switches inside the controller.
Configuration 8/8
8 Binary inputs (options: pull up or pull down
logic)
8 Binary outputs (options: Low side switch (LSS)
or High side switch (HSS))
2 Analog outputs (options: voltage (0-10 V),
current (0-20 mA) and PWM (5 V, adjustable
frequency 200 Hz-2.4 kHz))
Configuration 16/0
16 Binary inputs (options: pull up or pull down
logic)
0 Binary outputs
2 Analog outputs (options: voltage (0-10 V),
current (0-20 mA) and PWM (5 V, adjustable
frequency 200 Hz-2.4 kHz))

2.6.2 Inteli AIN8
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 analog inputs.
Supported sensors:
Resistor 3-wire input
Common resistor: 0-250 Ω, 0-2400 Ω, 0-
10 kΩ
Temperature sensor: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100,
Ni1000
Current (active or passive sensors)
±20 mA, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
Voltage
±1 V, 0-2.4 V, 0-5 V, 0-10 V
Lambda probes
Thermocouples are not supported (the
measuring loop was designed for lambda
probes, what caused non-support of
thermocouples)
Impulse/RPM sensor:
RPM measuring pulses with frequency 4 Hz-
10 kHz
Impulse
Possibility to measure pulses from
electrometer, flowmeter (measurement of
total consumption, average fuel
consumption)
2.6.3 Inteli AIN8TC

8 Analog Channels Module. The unit offers flexibility to configure 8 thermocouple inputs.
8 analog input channels for measuring
temperature by thermocouples

2.6.4 Inteli AIO9/1
9 Analog Inputs and 1 Analog Output Module
4× differential voltage inputs for measurement in
range of 0 – 65 V or -65 – 0 V
4× shielded, galvanically separated ±75 mV
inputs
Resistance analog input 0-2500 Ω
One analog output
2.6.5 IGS-PTM
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, 4 analog
inputs and 1 analog outputs.
Configurable 8 binary and 4 analog inputs
Configurable 8 binary and 1 analog output
LEDs indicate the state of binary inputs/outputs
Measures values from Pt100 and Ni100 sensors
Analog inputs (resistance range 0-250 Ω, voltage
range 0-100 mV, current range 0-20 mA –
selectable via jumper)
UL certified

2.6.6 IGL-RA15
Remote annunciator.
15 programmable LEDs with configurable colors
red-green-yellow
Lamp test function with status LED
Customizable labels
Local horn output
Maximal distance 200 m from the controller
Up to 4 units can be connected to the controller
UL certified
6 back to System overview

3 Applications overview
3.1 AMF – Automatic Mains Failure Start 18
3.2 MRS – Manual Remote Start 19
3.1 AMF – Automatic Mains Failure Start

The typical scheme of Automatic Mains Failure Start application is shown below. The controller controls two
breakers – a mains breaker and a generator breaker. Feedback from both breakers isn’t necessary. InteliLite 4
controllers can also work without breaker feedbacks.
Image 3.1 AMF application overview

3.2 MRS – Manual Remote Start
The typical scheme of Manual Remote Start application is shown below. The controller controls one breaker – a
generator breaker. Feedback from the breaker isn't necessary. InteliLite 4 controllers can also work without
breaker feedback.
Image 3.2 MRS application overview
6 back to Applications overview

4 Installation and wiring
4.1 Package content 20
4.2 Controller installation 20
4.3 Terminal Diagram 22
4.4 Recommended wiring 23
4.5 Plug-in module installation 53
4.6 Maintenance 54
4.1 Package content

The package contains:
Controller
Mounting holders
Terminal blocks
Note: The package does not contain any communication or extension modules. The required modules should
be ordered separately.
4.2 Controller installation

4.2.1 Dimensions
① Plug-in module
Note: Dimension x depends on plug-in module
Note: Dimensions are in millimeters.

4.2.2 Mounting
The controller should be mounted onto the switchboard door. Requested cutout size is 172 mm × 112 mm. Use
the screw holders delivered with the controller to fix the controller into the door as described on pictures below.
Recommended torque for holders is 0.15 N·m.
Panel door mounting
Note: Enclosure Type rating with mounting instruction – For use on a Flat surface of a type 1 enclosure.

4.3 Terminal Diagram
① GENERATOR ② GENERATOR ③ MAINS VOLTAGE ④ BINARY INPUTS
CURRENT VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT
MEASUREMENT MEASUREMENT
T39 COM T44 N T52 N T60 BIN1
T40 L1 T46 L1 T54 L1 T61 BIN2
T41 L2 T48 L2 T56 L2 T62 BIN3
T42 L3 T50 L3 T58 L3 T63 BIN4
T64 BIN5
T65 BIN6
T66 BIN7
T67 BIN8
Image 4.1 Terminal diagram for InteliLite 4 AMF9
⑤ CAN1 ⑦ ANALOG INPUTS ⑨ BINARY OUTPUTS ⑪ POWER SUPPLY, D+
T36 L T22 A COM T10 BOUT1 T01 BATT -

T37 COM T23 A01 T11 BOUT2 T02 D+
T38 H T24 A02 T12 BOUT3 T03 BATT +
T25 A03 T13 BOUT4
⑥ +5 V T26 T14 BOUT5
T27 +5 V ⑧ RPM T15 BOUT6
T20 RPM GND ⑩ E-STOP
T21 RPM IN T09 E-STOP

4.4 Recommended wiring
Current inputs 39-42 Current measurement wiring (page 26)
Voltage measurement AMF wiring (page 30)

Generator voltage inputs 44, 46, 48, 50
Voltage measurement MRS wiring (page 37)
Mains voltage inputs 52, 54, 56, 58 Voltage measurement AMF wiring (page 30)
Binary inputs 60-67 Binary inputs (page 45)
CAN bus H, COM, L CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 50)
+5 V 27
Analog inputs 22-26 Analog inputs (page 48)
RPM 20,21 Magnetic pick-up (page 44)
Binary outputs 08-15 Binary Outputs (page 46)
E-Stop 09 Emergency stop (page 47)
Power supply "+", D, "-" Power supply (page 24)
2
Note: Wiring terminal markings to included tightening torque: 0.5 N-m (4.5 lb-in)., and wire size: 2 mm (12-
26 AWG).

4.4.1 General
To ensure proper function:
Use grounding terminals.
Wiring for binary inputs and analog inputs must not be run with power cables.
Analog and binary inputs should use shielded cables, especially when the length is more than 3 m.
Tightening torque, allowable wire size and type, for the Field-Wiring Terminals:
For Mains Voltage, Generator Voltage and Current terminals
Specified tightening torque is 0.56 Nm (5.0 In-lbs)
2
use only diameter 0.5 - 2.0 mm (12 - 26 AWG) conductor,
rated for 90 °C minimum.
For other controller field wiring terminals
Specified tightening torque 0.79 nm (7.0 In-lb)
2
Use only diameter 0.5 - 2.0 mm (12 - 26 AWG) conductor,
rated for 75 °C minimum.
Use copper conductors only
4.4.2 Grounding
2
The shortest possible length of wire should be used for controller grounding. Use cable min. 2.5 mm .
The negative "–" battery terminal must be properly grounded.
Switchboard and engine must be grounded at common point. Use as short cable as possible to the grounding
point.
4.4.3 Power supply

2
Use power supply cable min. 1.5 mm
Maximum continuous DC power supply voltage is 36 V. The controller’s power supply terminals are protected
against large pulse power disturbances. When there is a potential risk of the controller being subjected to
conditions outside its capabilities, an outside protection device should be used.

It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between generator current COM terminal and battery "–"
terminal is maximally ±2 V. Therefore it is strongly recommended to interconnect these two terminals together.
Note: The controller should be grounded properly in order to protect against lighting strikes. The maximum
allowable current through the controller's negative terminal is 4 A (this is dependent on binary output load).
For the connections with 12 V DC power supply, the controller includes internal capacitors that allow the
controller to continue in operation during cranking if the batter voltage dip occurs. If the voltage dip goes during
cranking to 0 V and after 50 ms it recovers to 4 V, the controller continues operating. This cycle can repeat
several times. During this voltage dip the controller screen backlight can turn off.
Note: Recommended fusing is 4 A fuse.
Note: In case of the dip to 0 V the high-side binary outputs will be temporarily switched off and after recovering
to 4 V back on.
IMPORTANT: When the controller is powered up only by USB and the USB is disconnected then
the actual statistics can be lost.
Note: Suitable conductor protection shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 240.
Note: Low voltage circuits (35 volts or less) shall be supplied from the engine starting battery or an isolated
secondary circuit.
Note: It is also possible to further support the controller by connecting the external capacitor and separating
diode. The capacitor size depends on required time. It shall be approximately thousands of μF. The capacitor
size should be 5 000 μF to withstand 150 ms voltage dip under following conditions: Voltage before dip is 12 V,
after 150 ms the voltage recovers to min. allowed voltage, i.e. 8 V. Diode should be able to withstand at least
1 kV.
Power supply fusing

Controller should never be connected directly to the starting battery. A 4 A fuse should be connected in-line with
the battery positive terminal to the controller and CAN modules. Fuse value and type depends on a number of
connected devices and wire length. Recommended fuse (not fast) type – T4 A. Not fast due to internal
capacitors charging during power up.
IMPORTANT: 4 A fuse is calculated without BOUT consumption nor extension modules. Real value
of fuse depends on consumption of binary outputs and modules.
4.4.4 Measurement wiring

2 2
Use 1.5 mm cables for voltage connection and 2.5 mm for current transformers connection. Adjust
Connection type (page 192), Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 195), Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 195),

Nominal Current (page 190), Gen VT Ratio (page 197), Mains VT Ratio (page 198) and CT Ratio (page
191) by appropriate setpoints in the Basic Settings group.
IMPORTANT: Risk of personal injury due to electric shock when manipulating voltage terminals
under voltage. Be sure the terminals are not under voltage before touching them.
Do not open the secondary circuit of current transformers when the primary circuit is closed. Open
the primary circuit first.
CT Location
Image 4.2 CT Location
There are three options of CT location.

Load
Gen-set
None
Note: The current measurement protections are active only when the Gen-set is running.
If the CT Location is set to Load the Short Circuit BOC (page 238) protection is enabled only when GCB is
closed.
Current measurement wiring

The number of CT's is automatically selected based on selected value of setpoint Connection type (page 192)
[3Ph4Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph3Wire / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3 / Mono Ph].
Generator currents and power measurement is suppressed if current level is bellow <1 % of CT range.
2
Use cables of 2.5 mm
Use transformers to 5 A
Connect CT according to following drawings:

3 phase application
Image 4.3 3 phase application
IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal and
power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so ground properly both terminals.
Image 4.4 3 phase application
power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so interconnect these two terminals.
Note: This wiring is recommended for Indian market.

SplPhL1L2 application
Image 4.5 SplPhL1L2 application

SplPhL1L3 application
IMPORTANT: The second phase of split phase connection is connected to the terminal, where the
third phase is normally connected.

Mono phase application
Connect CT according to following drawings. Terminals phase 2 and phase 3 are opened.
Image 4.9 Mono phase application
Voltage measurement AMF wiring

There are 4 voltage measurement Connection Type (setpoint Connection type (page 192) [3Ph4Wire / High
Leg D / 3Ph3Wire / SplPhL1L2 and SplPhL1L3 / Mono Ph] options, every type matches to corresponding
generator connection type.
Note: For fusing of voltage measurement input use T1A or T2A fuse.
The generator protections are evaluated from different voltages based on Connection type (page 192) setting:
3Ph 4W – Ph-Ph voltage, Ph-N voltage
3Ph 3W – Ph-Ph voltage

SplPhL1L2 – Ph-N voltage
Mono Ph – Ph-N voltage
ConnectionType: 3 Phase 4 Wires
Image 4.11 3 phase application with neutral
Note: Fuse on "N" wire is not obligatory but recommended.
Image 4.12 Typical 3 Phase 4 Wires generator wiring

ConnectionType: High Leg D
Image 4.13 High Leg Delta application
Image 4.14 Typical High Leg D generator wiring

Image 4.15 3 phase application without neutral

ConnectionType: SplPhL1L2
Image 4.17 Split phase L1L2 application
Image 4.18 Typical Split Phase generator wiring



ConnectionType: Mono Phase
Image 4.24 Typical Mono Phase generator wiring
Voltage measurement MRS wiring

There are 4 voltage measurement Connection Type (setpoint Connection type (page 192) [3Ph4Wire / High
Leg D / 3Ph3Wire / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3 / Mono Ph] options, every type matches to corresponding generator
connection type.
Note: For fusing of voltage measurement input use T1A or T2A fuse.
The generator protections are evaluated from different voltages based on Connection type (page 192) setting:
3Ph 4W – Ph-Ph voltage, Ph-N voltage
3Ph 3W – Ph-Ph voltage
High Leg D

Mono Ph – Ph-N voltage
Image 4.25 3 phase application with neutral

Image 4.27 3 phase application without neutral

ConnectionType: High Leg D
Image 4.29 High Leg Delta application
Image 4.30 Typical High Leg D generator wiring




ConnectionType: Mono Phase
Image 4.38 Typical Mono Phase generator wiring
4.4.5 Magnetic pick-up

A magnetic speed sensor (pickup) is the most common method of engine speed measurement. To use this
method, mount the pickup opposite to the engine flywheel, connect the cable to the controller as shown on the
picture below and adjust the setpoint Gear Teeth (page 199) according to the number of teeth on the flywheel.
For the details about the pick-up input parameters see Technical data on page 181
IMPORTANT: To ensure proper function use a shielded cable.

If engine will not start:
Check ground connection from pick-up to controllers, eventually disconnect ground connection to one of
them.
Note: In some cases the controller will measure RPM value even though the gen-set is not running: RPM is
measured from the generator voltage (Gear Teeth = 0). Controller is measuring some voltage value on input
terminals due to open fusing. If RPM > 0 the controller will be put into a Not ready state and the engine will not
be allowed to start.
4.4.6 Binary inputs

2
Use minimally 1 mm cables for wiring of Binary inputs.
Image 4.39 Wiring binary inputs
Note: The name and function or alarm type for each binary input have to be assigned during the configuration.

4.4.7 Binary Outputs
2
Use min. 1 mm cables for wiring of binary outputs. Use external relays as indicated on the schematic below for
all outputs except those where low-current loads are connected (signalization etc...).
IMPORTANT: Use suppression diodes on all relays and other inductive loads!
Image 4.40 Binary outputs wiring
Note: Every single low current binary output can provide up to 0.5 A of steady current.
IMPORTANT: When operating temperature is higher than 60 °C it is strongly recommended to limit
output current of high current binary outputs to 4 A (each).

4.4.8 E-Stop
E-Stop has dedicated terminal T09. Power supply of binary output 1 and binary output 2 is internally connected
(in controller) to E-Stop terminal. It means higher security and faster disconnection of these outputs. More
information about E-Stop functions see E-Stop on page 147.
Note: This function has the same behavior as binary input EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 407).
Image 4.41 E-Stop wiring
Note: Recommended fusing is 10 A fuse.
Note: Grey dashed line symbolizes internal connection between E-Stop and binary outputs 1 and 2.
Note: For proper functionality of E-Stop, the terminal T09 must be always wired. Terminal can be connected to
battery+ or to terminal T03 (BATT+)
IMPORTANT: Suppression diodes are not indicated, but required.
4.4.9 Emergency stop

LBI EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 407) can be configured on any physical input. There are 2 ways how to make a
wiring:
Connecting a normally closed "mushroom-type" button to the binary input. This is a purely software solution.
A hard-wired solution, where the button also disconnects the power supply from the controller outputs.

Image 4.42 Hard-wired emergency stop
IMPORTANT: Suppression diodes are not indicated, but required.
4.4.10 Analog inputs

On each analog input, there is a possibility to connect voltage, current or resistive sensor.
The analog inputs for resistive automotive type sensors like VDO or DATCON are connected either by one wire
(the second pole is the sensor body) or by two wires.
Image 4.43 Wiring of analog sensor
In the case of grounded sensors, connect the AI COM terminal to the engine body as near to the sensors as
possible.
In the case of isolated sensors, connect the AI COM terminal to the negative power supply terminal of the
controller as well as one pole of each sensor.

Analog inputs are typically used for: Oil Pressure, Coolant Temperature and Fuel Level. All of these parameters
are connected with relevant protections.
Image 4.44 Grounded sensors Image 4.45 Isolated sensors
Note: Schemes show only analog input connection overview, not actual wiring.
Note: The name, sensor characteristic and alarm types for each analog input have to be assigned during
configuration.
Analog as binary or tristate inputs

Analog inputs can be used also as binary or tri-state, i.e. for contact sensors without or with circuit check. The
threshold level is 750 Ω. In the case of tri-state, values lower than 10 Ω and values over 2400 Ω are evaluated as
sensor failure (short or open circuit).
Image 4.46 Analog inputs as tristate Image 4.47 Analog inputs as binary
Note: The name, sensor characteristic and alarm types for each analog input have to be assigned during
configuration.
Note: Tristate and binary sensors are not suitable for Analog Switch functions.

Analog Voltage sensor
Controller is equipped with +5 V terminal which can be used as power supply for some voltage analog sensor.
Image 4.48 Analog Voltage sensor
4.4.11 CAN bus and RS485 wiring

CAN bus wiring
The wiring of the CAN bus should be provided in such a way that the following rules are observed:
The maximum length of the CAN bus depends on the communication speed. For a speed of 250 kbps, which
is used on the CAN1 bus (extension modules, ECU), the maximum length is 200 m.
The bus must be wired in linear form with termination resistors at both ends. No nodes are allowed except on
the controller terminals.
Shielded cable1 has to be used, shielding has to be connected to the terminal T01 (Grounding).
External units can be connected on the CAN bus line in any order, but keeping line arrangement (no tails, no
star) is necessary.
The CAN bus has to be terminated by 120Ω resistors at both ends use a cable with following parameters:
Cable type Shielded twisted pair

Impedance 120 Ω
Propagation velocity ≥ 75 % (delay ≤ 4.4 ns/m)
2
Wire crosscut ≥ 0.25 mm
Attenuation (@1MHz) ≤ 2 dB / 100 m
Note: Communication circuits shall be connected to communication circuits of Listed equipment.
Note: A termination resistor at the CAN (120 Ω) is already implemented on the PCB. For connecting, close the
jumper near the appropriate CAN terminal.
1Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com) - for shorter distances: 3105A Paired - EIA
Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors); for longer distances: 3106A Paired - EIA Industrial RS-485
PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)

Image 4.49 CAN bus topology
For shorter distances (connection within one building)
Image 4.50 CAN bus wiring for shorter distances
Note: Shielding shall be grounded at one end only. Shielding shall not be connected to CAN COM terminal.
For longer distances or in case of surge hazard (connection out of building, in case of storm etc.)
Image 4.51 CAN bus wiring for longer distances
① Recommended PT5-HF-12DC-ST1
1Protections recommended: Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-12DC-ST with PT2x2-

BE (base element) or Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-012/2 R DJ

RS485 wiring
The wiring of the RS485 communication (available with plug-in module CM-RS232-485)should be provided in
such a way that the following rules are observed:
Note: A termination resistor at the CAN (120 Ω) is already implemented on the PCB. For connecting, close the
jumper near the appropriate CAN terminal.
Standard maximum bus length is 1000 m.

Shielded cable1 has to be used, shielding has to be connected to the terminal T01 (Grounding).
External units can be connected on the RS485 line in any order, but keeping line arrangement (no tails, no
star) is necessary.
The line has to be terminated by 120Ω resistors at both ends.
For shorter distances (connection within one building)
Image 4.52 RS485 wiring for shorter distances
For longer distances or in case of surge hazard (connection out of building, in case of storm etc.)
Image 4.53 RS485 wiring for longer distances
① Recommended PT5HF-5DC-ST2
Note: Communication circuits shall be connected to communication circuits of Listed equipment.
1Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com) - for shorter distances: 3105A Paired - EIA
Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors); for longer distances: 3106A Paired - EIA Industrial RS-485
PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)
2Recommended protections: Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-5DC-ST with PT2x2-
BE (base element)(or MT-RS485-TTL) or Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-006/2 R DJ

4.4.12 USB
This is required for computer connection. Use the shielded USB A-B cable.
Image 4.54 USB connection
Controller can by also be powered by USB (only for service purpose like a uploading firmware, change of
configuration etc.).
IMPORTANT: Power supply by USB is only for service purpose. Binary inputs and outputs are in
logical 0. Also plug-in modules are not working.
6 back to Recommended wiring
4.5 Plug-in module installation

4.5.1 Installation
Remove the back cover. To do this, press four holders which are located in corners.
After removing back cover insert the plug-in module. Plug-in module has to be inserted under holders. Start with
holders marked by arrows. There are also arrows on the controller for better navigation. After inserting plug-in
module under holders press it down. This locks the module.

After locking the plug-in module into holders, place back the back cover (small cover for connectors has to be
removed from back cover). Finally insert the small cover for connectors. Small covers are unique for each plug-
in module.
4.6 Maintenance
4.6.1 Backup battery replacement
The internal backup battery lifetime is approx. 6 years. If replacement of backup batter is needed, follow these
instructions:

Connect the controller to a PC and save an archive for backup purposes (not necessary but recommended).
Disconnect all terminals from the controller and remove the controller from the switchboard.
Remove the back cover and all plug-in modules.
Release the rear cover using a flat screwdriver or another suitable tool.
The battery is located in a holder on the circuit board. Remove the old battery with a small sharp screwdriver
and push with a finger the new battery into the holder.
Put the rear cover back. Use slight pressure to lock the snaps into the housing. Pay attention that the cover
is in correct position and not upside down!
Put back the plug-in modules and back cover.
Power the controller on, adjust date and time and check all setpoints.
6 back to Installation and wiring

5 Controller setup
5.1 Default configuration 56
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools connection 57
5.3 Operator Guide 62
5.4 Remote Display 86
5.5 Functions 90
5.6 User management and data access control 150
5.1 Default configuration

5.1.1 Binary inputs
Number Description Configured function
BIN1 Generator circuit breaker feedback GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 408)
BIN2 Mains circuit breaker feedback MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 411)
BIN3 Remote control Lock Not Used
BIN4 Access Lock ACCESS LOCK (PAGE 402)
BIN5 Switch controller to OFF mode REMOTE OFF (PAGE 415)
BIN6 Switch controller to TEST mode REMOTE TEST (PAGE 417)
BIN7 Suppression of alarms SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 417)
BIN8 Free slot Not Used
5.1.2 Binary outputs

Number Description Function
BOUT1 Starter motor control STARTER (PAGE 453)
BOUT2 Fuel solenoid valve FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 432)
BOUT3 Indication of breaker state GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 434)
BOUT4 Indication of breaker state MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 444)
BOUT5 Activation of any devices before start PRESTART (PAGE 449)
BOUT6 Gen-set can be connected to load READY TO LOAD (PAGE 451)
BOUT7 Indication of unconfirmed alarm ALARM (PAGE 425)
BOUT8 Free slot NOT USED (PAGE 448)
5.1.3 Analog inputs

Number Configured sensor Function
AIN1 VDO 10 Bar OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 461)
AIN2 VDO40-120°C COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 460)
AIN3 VDOLevel % FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 460)

5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools
connection
5.2.1 USB 57
5.2.2 RS232/RS485 58
5.2.3 Ethernet 59
6 back to Controller setup

This chapter contains brief introduction into the specifics of firmware and archive upload and connection of
various PC tools to the controller. If you require detailed information on each PC tool please use the included
Help in those PC tools or download their Global Guides.
5.2.1 USB
You may connect to the controller using the USB port. In this case standard USB A to B cable should be used.
Connection using InteliConfig
Image 5.1 First screen of InteliConfig – select connect to controller
Image 5.2 Second screen of InteliConfig – select detected controllers

Connection using WinScope
Image 5.3 WinScope screen – select USB connection
Note: User name and password are not mandatory.
5.2.2 RS232/RS485
It is possible to connect to the controller using RS232 or RS485 direct connection (serial port or USB to
RS232/RS485 converter may be used). The following settings need to be checked in the controller:
COM1 Mode (page 293) = Direct
Controller Address has to be set to the same value as in the PC tool

Image 5.5 Second screen of InteliConfig – select Serial link
Connection using WinScope
Image 5.6 WinScope screen – select serial link
Note: User name and password are not mandatory.
Note: WinScope supports only 19200, 38400, 57600 speeds.
5.2.3 Ethernet
It is possible to connect to the controller using Ethernet port either directly or using ComAp's AirGate service.
Direct connection
When you use direct connection the controller needs to be reachable directly from the PC you use (i.e. one LAN
or WAN without any firewalls and other points that may not allow the connection). The following settings need to
be checked in the controller:
Controller Address (page 205) has to be set to the same value as in the PC tool
IP Address Mode (page 314) can be set to AUTOMATIC when there is DHCP service is available.
Otherwise it needs to be set to FIXED
IP Address (page 315) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested value
Subnet Mask (page 315) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested
Gateway IP (page 316) can be set here when it is used

Image 5.8 Second screen of InteliConfig – select Internet / Ethernet
AirGate connection
You can use ComAp's AirGate service that allows you to connect to any controller via internet no matter what
are the restrictions of the local network (if the controller can connect to the internet AirGate service will work).
The following setpoints have to be adjusted:
Controller Address (page 205) has to be set to the same value as in the PC tool
IP Address Mode (page 314) can be set to AUTOMATIC when there is DHCP service is available.
Otherwise it needs to be set to FIXED
IP Address (page 315) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested value
Subnet Mask (page 315) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested
Gateway IP (page 316) can be set here when it is used
AirGate Connection (page 318) has to be set to Enabled
AirGate Address (page 301) currently there is one AirGate server running at URL global.airgate.link (enter
this URL into the setpoint)
IMPORTANT: AirGate Key has to be configured. User with administrator rights has a possibility to
set up or change AirGate Key via InteliConfig using Tools -˃ Access Administration -˃ Change
AirGate Key.
IMPORTANT: Controller has to be connected to the Internet.

Image 5.10 Second screen of InteliConfig – AirGate
In order to connect to InteliConfig following information have to be filled out:

AirGate ID (page 393)
AirGate Address (page 301)
Controller Address (page 1)
User name and Password
AirGate Key
AirGate Key.

5.3 Operator Guide
5.3.1 Front panel elements 62
5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure 64
5.3.3 Browsing alarms 77
5.3.4 Login 78
5.3.5 Production mode 81
5.3.6 Information screen 82
5.3.7 Language selection 84
5.3.8 Display contrast adjustment 85
5.3.1 Front panel elements
Image 5.11 Operator interface of InteliLite 4 AMF 9
Control buttons
Position Picture Description
LEFT button. Use this button to move left or to change the mode. The button
can change the mode only if the main screen with the indicator of currently
selected mode is displayed.

Note: This button will not change the mode if the controller mode is forced by
one of binary inputs listed in the Reference Guide – "Operating modes"
chapter.
RIGHT button. Use this button to move right or to change the mode. The
button can change the mode only if the main screen with the indicator of
currently selected mode is displayed.
Note: This button will not change the mode if the controller mode is forced by
one of binary inputs listed in the Reference Guide – "Operating modes"
chapter.
HORN RESET button. Use this button to deactivate the horn output without
acknowledging the alarms.
FAULT RESET button. Use this button to acknowledge alarms and

deactivate the horn output. Inactive alarms will disappear immediately and
status of active alarms will be changed to "confirmed" so they will disappear
as soon as their reasons dismiss.
UP button. Use this button to move up or increase value.
PAGE button. Use this button to switch over display pages.
DOWN button. Use this button to move down or decrease value.
ENTER button. Use this button to finish editing a setpoint or moving right in
the history page.
START button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to initiate the
start sequence of the engine.
STOP button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to initiate the stop
sequence of the Gen-set. Repeated pressing of button will cancel current
phase of stop sequence (like cooling) and next phase will continue.
GCB button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to open or close the
GCB.
MCB button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to open or close the
MCB.
Indicators and others

Position Description
GENERATOR status indicator. There are two states – Gen-set OK (indicator is green) and
Gen-set failure (indicator is red). Green LED is on if the generator voltage and frequency is
present and within limits. Red LED starts flashing when Gen-set failure occurs. After
FAULT RESET button is pressed, Red LED goes to steady light (if an alarm is still active)

or is off (if no alarm is active).
MAINS status indicator. There are two states – Mains OK (indicator is green) and Mains
failure (indicator is red). Green LED is on, if mains is present and within limits. Red LED
starts blinking when the mains failure is detected and after the Gen-set has started and
connected to the load it lights permanently until the mains failure disappears.
Graphic B/W display, 132 × 64 px.
GCB Status. Green LED is on if GCB is closed. It is driven by GCB CLOSE/OPEN output
or by GCB feedback signal.
MCB Status. Green LED is on if MCB is closed. It is driven by MCB CLOSE/OPEN output
or by MCB feedback signal.
5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure

The displayed information is structured into "pages" and "screens". Use PAGE button to switch over the pages.
The page Measurement consists of screens which display measured values like voltages, current, oil
pressure etc., computed values like i.e. gen-set power, statistic data and the alarm list on the last screen.
The page Setpoints contains all setpoints organized to groups and also a special group for entering
password.
The page History log shows the history log in the order that the last record is displayed first.
Main Screen
Symbols
Padlock – active when LBI ACCESS LOCK is active
R – active when there is active remote connection to controller
Exclamation mark – active when there is any alarm in alarmlist

Measurement Screens
Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.


Note: Available only with plug-in module.



Note: Available only with ECU supported by TIER4F

Note: From all of these pages it is possible to switch seamlessly to the setpoint group page by pressing Page
button.
Note: There can be some additional screens and also some screens can be hidden. Screen’s visibility
depends on actual configuration (usage of extension or communication modules, ECU etc.).
Setpoint Screens
Note: From all measurement pages we can fluently go to the setpoint group page by pressing Page button.

Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select required
setpoint group.
Note: Use Enter button to enter selected setpoint group.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
setpoint.
Note: Use Left and Right button to select required setpoint.
Note: Use Enter button to enter selected setpoint.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to set
required value of
selected setpoint.
Note: Use Enter button to confirm adjusted value of setpoint.
Note: Use Page button to discard changes, to set setpoint to previous value and to return to the list of
setpoints of selected group.

History Log
Note: From setpoint group page we can fluently go to the history log pages by pressing Page button.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Enter button to move to the next page of history log.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Enter button to move to the first page of history log.
IMPORTANT: The records are numbered in reverse order, i.e. the latest (newest) record is "0" and
older records have "-1", "-2" etc.

Note: This is only basic history record. There can be some additional screens in case that in controller is
extension module or ECU is configured. Also it depends on connection type.
5.3.3 Browsing alarms
Note: Use Up button to move to alarmlist from main measurement screen.
Active alarms are displayed as white text on black background. It means the alarm is still active, i.e. the
appropriate alarm conditions are still present.
Inactive alarms are displayed as black text on white background. It means the alarm is no more active, i.e.
the appropriate alarm conditions are gone.
Not confirmed alarms are displayed with an asterisk. It means the alarm is still not acknowledged
(confirmed).
ECU alarms: SPN/FMI/OC/SC
SPN – Suspect parameter number
FMI – type of protection
OC – number of errors
SC – source of error

User access management alarms
The controller comes to the customer with turned on Production mode, the default administrator password and
with no filled email address for password reset. Due to the security reasons following user access management
alarms appear. Detailed description of situation when the alarms are active are described below:
Wrn Production Mode is present in the alarm list all the time while production mode is turned on. To turn
off the Production mode go to User management and uncheck the checkbox Production mode or go to
Production Mode display screen and select disable.
Wrn Default Password appears in alarmlist when the default administrator password is set and
communication module is plugged in the controller. The purpose of alarm is to inform that the controller might
be or is connected to the untrusted interface and cybersecurity rules are not fulfilled due to default
administrator password.
Wrn Password reset e-mail addr is not set appears in alarmlist when there is no email address set and
the administrator password is not the default one. The purpose of alarm is to inform that there is possibility
that the controller might not be accessible by administrator password due to forgotten password reason.
Password reset procedure cannot be performed without filled email address. To fill out email address, the
administrator password is required.
5.3.4 Login
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select setpoint group
Login.
Note: Use Enter button to enter setpoint group Login.

Note: Use Up and
Down Button to
select Login.
Note: Use Enter button to enter Login.
UserID Edit
Note: Use Up and

Down Button to
change the digit.
Note: Use Left and Right button to move between digits.
Note: Use Enter button to confirm the UserID or Page button to cancel entering Login.

PIN Edit
Note: Use Up and

Down Button to
change the digit.
Note: Use Left and Right button to move between digits.
Note: Use Enter button to confirm the PIN and Loging or Page button to cancel entering the Login.
Note: In case that invalid UserID or PIN are entered, the controller shows Wrong Credentials screen. Use
Enter button to enter Login again or Page Button to go back to menu.

5.3.5 Production mode
Note: Use Enter button to enter setpoint group Login.
Note: Use Up and

Down Button to
select Production
Mode
Note: Use Enter button to enter Production Mode.

Note: Use Up and
Down Button to
change to disabled
Note: Use Enter button to disable the Production Mode.
Note: Once Disabled is confirmed by Enter button the option Enabled is no longer on the screen and therefore it
is not possible to enable Production mode by HMI display screen. Use InteliConfig to enable the Production
mode.
5.3.6 Information screen
+
Note: On Main measurement screen press Enter and Page button together. Enter button has to be pressed
first.

Note: Use Page button to move to the next page.
Note: Use Up button to move back to main measurement screen.

5.3.7 Language selection
+
Note: On Main measurement screen press Enter and Page button together. Enter button has to be pressed
first.

Note: Use Up and
down button to
select required
language.
Note: Use Enter button to confirm selected language.
5.3.8 Display contrast adjustment
+ +
Note: On any measurement screen press Enter and Note: On any measurement screen press Enter and
Up button together for higher contrast. Down button together for lower contrast.
Note: After setting a contrast, no another action is needed.

5.4 Remote Display
This chapter describes Remote display firmware IL4-RD, which is designed as a remote signaling and control
software for InteliLite 4 family controllers. It is the optional software which is possible to upload into controller
instead of standard controller’s firmware.
5.4.1 General description

Remote display software works as "remote display and control" for the Master InteliLite 4 family controller. Gen-
set can be controlled using Remote display and Master controller simultaneously and independently. All
Remote display screens (Measurement screens, Setpoint screens and History Log) displays the same data as
Master controller. Front panel buttons on both controllers work the same way. All remote display LEDs shows
the same state as corresponding LEDs on Master controller.
Note: Some settings are not shared between display and control unit (setpoint Backlight Timeout (page 203),
Controller language and Controller user mode).
5.4.2 IL4-RD Firmware installation

The IL4-RD Remote display firmware is installed in the same way as any other InteliLite 4 firmware using
InteliConfig PC tool. Reverting Remote display controller back to regular Gen-set controller is carried out the
same way.
Note: InteliConfig shows the most compatible and the most recent firmware as default option. Thus, it is
necessary use "More options" (…) button to pick IL4-RD firmware for uploading to controller. (See details on
picture below.)
Note: IL4-RD consists firmware only, there is no archive included.
Note: When IL4-RD firmware is uploaded to controller there is only possible connect InteliConfig using USB
connection. InteliConfig serves only for firmware update when connected to Remote display. There is no
Master controller SCADA displayed, no possibility to adjust setpoints, display Values etc.
Note: Please refer to InteliConfig Global Guide for details about firmware uploading to controller.

5.4.3 Wiring
IL4-RD can be connected to any InteliLite 4 family controller via onboard RS485 communication port or via
external RS232/RS485 communication ports on CM-232-485 communication module . It is possible to connect
only up to two Remote displays to one Master controller, if they are using different communication COMs. To
connect two or more remote displays to one communication line (e.g. RS485) is not possible. Using one
Remote display it is possible to monitor only one Master controller at the time.
Note: IL4 AMF8 and AMF9 don't have onboard RS485 comm port.
5.4.4 Interconnection variants

RS232
It is necessary to use CM-RS232-485 communication module on both Master controller and Remote display.
COM 1 communication channel is used with these settings:
COM 1 Mode: Direct
COM 1 Communication Speed: 57600 or 115200 bps
Controller Address: 1 – 32
The maximal distance between Master controller and Remote display is 10 m for RS-232 connection. It is
recommended to use standard Null modem cable (crossover cable), although three wires (TxD, RxD, GND)
RS-232 connection is enough for communication.
RS485
Any combination of internal RS485 port or external one on CM-232-485 communication module can be used on
Master and Remote Display.
COM 2 communication channel is used with these settings:
COM 2 Mode: Direct
COM 2 Communication Speed: 57600 or 115200 bps
Controller Address: 1 – 32

The maximal distance between Master controller and Remote display is 1200 m for RS485 connection. It is
recommended to use shielded twisted-pair cables that comply with the EIA RS-485 standard to reduce
interference and to achieve maximal distance.
RS232 + RS485
Master Controller with Two Remote Displays
It is possible to combine two of the previous ways of interconnection and connect two Remote display to one
Master controller concurrently. All the parameters and settings are the same as mentioned above.
Note: Onboard RS485 and CM-232-485 communication module can be used to achieve both remote displays
being connected via RS485 for IL4 MRS16 and IL4 AMF25.
Note: IL4 AMF8, IL4 AMF9 and IL4 AMF20 as master controller can only have up to two remote displays at the
same time and will need to use RS232 combined with RS485.
5.4.5 Connection process

Remote display after power on automatically tries to connect to last known Master (if such configuration exist in
Remote display). Otherwise Remote display starts to search for any Master controller connected. It starts to
search on COM 2 (RS485) using Master controller address 1 – 32 and continues with COM 1 (RS232). Remote
display tries two communication speeds 57600 bps and 115200 bps.
During this autodetection process the message "Trying to connect" is displayed on screen. This process takes
approx. one minute.
When incompatible configuration type is found in detected controller, the message "Unknown cfg format COM x
Addr yy" is displayed on screen for 5 seconds and detecting continues with next address in the range.
When detecting finishes with no compatible Master controller found, the message "No connection" is displayed
on screen for 5 seconds and detecting process starts from the beginning and continues until compatible master
controller is found.
Not supported types of controllers or controllers that are not properly communicating are skipped during the
search.
5.4.6 Connection troubleshooting

There are few reasons why Remote display cannot connect to Master controller:

Not supported type of Master controller is connected.
Not supported firmware in Master controller.
Configuration table error in Master controller.
Wrong settings of setpoint COM x Mode in master controller.
Wrong settings of setpoint COM x Communication Speed in master controller.
Wrong connection, wiring, communication fail.
5.4.7 Function description

Remote display software works as "remote display and control" for the Master InteliLite 4 family controller. Gen-
set can be controlled using Remote display and Master controller simultaneously and independently. All
Remote display screens (Information screens, Measurement screens, Setpoint screens and History Log)
displays the same data as Master controller. Front panel buttons on both controllers work the same way. All
remote display LEDs shows the same state as corresponding LEDs on Master controller. User can switch
screens, enter or set password, adjust setpoints, change language, change Configuration Level, change display
contrast and view history records.
Note: It is recommended to use the same type and model of controller for Master and for Remote display. Only
in such case is assured the proper function of all buttons, LED diodes and display.
Example: When AMF controller HW type is used as a Master controller and MRS controller HW type is
used for Remote display there is no possibility to control MCB in MAN mode as there is no MCB button on
MRS controller. However, in general all this not recommended combinations works with similar to above
mentioned limitation considered.
Master device is always able to work without connected Remote display. Disconnecting of the serial line
between Master controller and Remote display has no effect to the Master controller.
When the serial line between Master controller and Remote display is disconnected, or communication cannot
be established, Remote display shows it’s own Init screen and message "Trying to connect" and all LEDs are
off.
Once remote display finds compatible master it shows message "Cfg processing" and downloads configuration
table from master controller. After the configuration from Master controller is downloaded Remote display is
reinitiated, jump to master controllers Main measurement screen and regular operation is started.
It is possible to switch to Remote display’s own Init screen to check IL4-RD FW version and serial number of
used controller and communication status by press and hold Page button for more than 3 seconds.
5.4.8 Firmware compatibility

Remote Display
IL4-RD FW is possible to upload into following controllers:
InteliLite 4 AMF25
InteliLite 4 AMF20
InteliLite 4 AMF9
InteliLite 4 AMF8
InteliLite 4 MRS16

Note: All controllers from IL4 family can act as Remote Display of master controller and will always be
compatible with each other.
Note: If IL4 MRS16 is used as a Remote Display in AMF application, the user won't be able to see information
about mains status and there will be no option to control MCB.
5.5 Functions
5.5.1 Operating Modes 90
5.5.2 Start-stop sequence 92
5.5.3 Engine start 94
5.5.4 Stabilization 98
5.5.5 Connecting to load 98
5.5.6 MRS operation 98
5.5.7 AMF operation 98
5.5.8 Dual Operation 101
5.5.9 Engine cool down and stop 104
5.5.10 Gen-set operation states 104
5.5.11 Additional running engine indications 107
5.5.12 History log 107
5.5.13 Breaker control 108
5.5.14 Protections 112
5.5.15 Exercise timers 128
5.5.16 Analog switches 135
5.5.17 Voltage phase sequence detection 135
5.5.18 Load shedding 135
5.5.19 Sensor curves 137
5.5.20 PLC 138
5.5.21 Geo-fencing 144
5.5.22 Aftertreatment Support 144
5.5.23 Alternate configuration 147
5.5.24 E-Stop 147
5.5.25 ECU Frequency selection 148
5.5.26 User setpoints 148
5.5.1 Operating Modes

Selecting the operating mode is done through Left and Right buttons on the front panel or by changing the
Controller Mode (page 200) setpoint (from the front panel or remotely).
Note: If this setpoint is configured as password-protected, the correct password must be entered prior to
attempting to change the mode.
Note: The mode cannot be changed if Access Lock input is active.

The following binary inputs can be used to force one respective operating mode independent of the mode
setpoint selection:
Remote OFF (page 415)
Remote TEST (page 417)
Remote MAN (page 414)
Remote AUTO (page 414)
If the respective input is active the controller will change the mode to the respective position according to the
active input. If multiple inputs are active, the mode will be changed according to priorities of the inputs. The
priorities match the order in the list above. If all inputs are deactivated, the mode will return to the original
position given by the setpoint.
AMF Operating Modes

OFF mode – AMF
No start of the Gen-set is possible .Controller stays in Not ready status and cannot be started any way. The
MCB is closed permanently (MCB Opens On (page 259) = GENRUN) or is open or closed according to
whether the mains is present or not (MCB Opens On (page 259) = MAINSFAIL). No AMF function will be
performed. The buttons MCB , GCB , Start and Stop including the appropriate binary inputs for
external buttons are not active.
IMPORTANT: When engine is running, it is not possible to switch Gen-set to OFF mode.
MAN mode – AMF

The engine can be started and stopped manually using the Start and Stop buttons (or external buttons
wired to the appropriate binary inputs) in MAN mode. When the engine is running, GCB can be closed. Also
MCB can be closed and opened manually using the MCB button, regardless of whether the mains are present or
not. No auto start is performed.
Note: The controller provides interlock between GCB and MCB, it means it is never possible to close both CB
together.
AUTO mode – AMF

The controller does not respond to buttons Start , Stop , MCB ON/OFF and GCB ON/OFF . Engine
start/stop request is evaluated form Mains failure/return.
Note: When the AMF function will start the engine than the engine will be running at least for the time which is
defined in Mains Return Delay (page 247) setpoint, even if the mains would return in the meantime.
TEST mode – AMF only

The Gen-set will be started when the controller is put to TEST mode and will remain running unloaded. If a mains
failure occurs, the MCB will be opened and after Transfer Delay (page 261) the GCB will be closed and the
Gen-set will supply the load. After the mains have recovered, the delay Mains Return Delay (page 247) will
count down and if it elapses and the mains is still OK, the controller will transfer the load back to the mains after
Transfer Delay (page 261) and the Gen-set will remain running unloaded again until the mode is changed.
Remote test on load

When binary input is active, the controller automatically transfers load from the mains to the Gen-set. See LBI
REM TEST ON LOAD (PAGE 413).

MRS Operating Modes
OFF mode – MRS
No start of the Gen-set is possible. Controller stays in Not ready status and cannot be started any way. The
buttons GCB , Start and Stop including the appropriate binary inputs for external buttons are not
active.
IMPORTANT: When engine is running, it is not possible to switch Gen-set to OFF mode.
MAN mode – MRS

The engine can be started and stopped manually using the Start and Stop buttons (or external buttons
wired to the appropriate binary inputs) in MAN mode. When the engine is running, GCB can be closed.
AUTO mode – MRS

The controller does not respond to buttons Start , Stop and GCB ON/OFF .Engine start/stop request
is given by binary input Remote Start/Stop (page 416).
5.5.2 Start-stop sequence

State Condition of the transition Action Next state
Ready Start request PRESTART (PAGE 449) on Prestart Prestart
Time (page 208) counter started
RPM > 2 or Oil pressure > Starting Stop (Stop
Oil Pressure (page 209) or fail)
Generator voltage > 10V or D+
voltage is higher than D+
Threshold (page 223)
OFF Mode selected or Shutdown Not Ready
alarm active
Not Ready RPM < 2, Oil pressure not Ready
detected, Generator voltage < 10
V, D+ not Active no shutdown
alarm active, other than OFF Mode
selected
Prestart Prestart time elapsed FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 432) on, Cranking
STARTER (PAGE 453) or Maximum
Cranking Time (page 207)
counter started
Cranking RPM > Starting RPM STARTER (PAGE 453) or PRESTART Starting
(PAGE 449) off
D+ input activated or oil pressure STARTER (PAGE 453) or PRESTART Cranking
detected or Generator voltage > (PAGE 449) off
25% Nominal voltage
Maximum Cranking Time (page STARTER (PAGE 453) or FUEL Crank pause
207), 1st attempt SOLENOID (PAGE 432) off, STOP

SOLENOID (PAGE 454) on,
Cranking Fail Pause (page 207)
timer started
Maximum Cranking Time (page STARTER (PAGE 453) or PRESTART Shutdown
207) elapsed, last attempt (PAGE 449) off (Start fail)
all cranking attempts elapsed FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 432) off, Shutdown
STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 454) on (Start fail)
Crank pause Cranking Fail Pause (page 207) STARTER (PAGE 453) or FUEL Cranking
elapsed SOLENOID (PAGE 432) on, STOP
SOLENOID (PAGE 454) off,
Maximum Cranking Time (page
207) counter started
Starting Idle Time (page 215) elapsed Minimal Stabilization Time Running
(page 217) and Maximal
Stabilization Time (page 218)
counter started
any shutdown condition FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 432) off, Shutdown
STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 454) on
Running Stop request READY TO LOAD (PAGE 451) Cooling
off,Cooling Time (page 219)
counter started
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown READY TO LOAD (PAGE 451) off, Shutdown
condition FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 432) off
GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 434) Loaded
closed
Loaded GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 434) Running
opened
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 432) off, Shutdown
condition STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 454) on,
READY TO LOAD (PAGE 451) off,
Cooling Cooling Time (page 219) elapsed FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 432) off, Stop
STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 454) on
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 432) off, Shutdown
condition STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 454) on
Start request READY TO LOAD (PAGE 451) on Running
Stop RPM = 0, Oil pressure not Ready
detected, Generator voltage <10 V,
D+ not active
If at least one of engine running Stop (Stop
indication is detected when Stop fail)
Time (page 219) elapsed.
Note: If all generator parameters are OK and Minimal Stabilization Time (page 217) elapsed, indicates that
GCB is possible to close. In AUTO Mode GCB is closed in this moment automatically.

Note: The start-up sequence can be interrupted in any time by stop request.
5.5.3 Engine start

Diesel engine
The setpoint Fuel Solenoid (page 206) has to be switched to the Diesel position.
After the command for start is issued (pressing Start button in MAN mode, auto start condition is fulfilled in
AUTO mode or controller is switched to TEST mode), outputs PRESTART (PAGE 449) and GLOW PLUGS
(PAGE 438) are energized for time period given by the setpoints Prestart Time (page 208) and Glow Plugs
Time (page 209).
After Prestart Time (page 208) and Glow Plugs Time (page 209), the output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 432)
is energized and after Fuel Solenoid Lead (page 215) the starter of motor is activated by energizing the
output STARTER (PAGE 453).
When one or more of following conditions are met, the starter output is de-energized:
The engine speed exceeds the value of Starting RPM (page 208), or
One of Additional running engine indications (page 107) signals is active.
The controller remains in the Starting phase until the engine speed exceeds the value of Starting RPM
(page 208), after that it is considered as started and the Idle period will follow.
The maximum duration that the output STARTER (PAGE 453) is energized is determined by the setpoint
Maximum Cranking Time (page 207). If the engine does not start within this period, the output STARTER
(PAGE 453) is de-energized and a pause with length determined by Cranking Fail Pause (page 207) will
follow. PRESTART (PAGE 449) and GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 438) outputs are active during the pause. After the
pause has elapsed, the next start attempt is executed. The number of start attempts is given by the setpoint
Cranking Attempts (page 206).
Once the engine is started, the Idle period follows. The binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 441) remains
inactive (as it was during the start). The idle period duration is adjusted by the setpoint Idle Time (page
215).
After the idle period has finished, the output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 441) is activated and the start-up
sequence is finished. The Stabilization (page 98) phase follows.

Image 5.12 Flowchart of start of diesel engine

GAS engine
The setpoint Fuel Solenoid (page 206) has to be switched to the Gas position.
After the command for start is issued (pressing Start button in MAN mode, auto start condition is fulfilled in
AUTO mode or controller is switched to TEST mode), outputs PRESTART (PAGE 449) and GLOW PLUGS
(PAGE 438) are energized for time period given by the setpoints Prestart Time (page 208) and Glow Plugs
Time (page 209).
When the engine speed exceeds 30 RPM, the outputs FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 432) and IGNITION (PAGE 441)
are energized.
When the engine speed exceeds value of Starting RPM (page 208), the starter of engine is de-energized,
the engine is considered as started and the Idle period will follow.
IMPORTANT: Additional running engine indications (page 107) signals are not evaluated during the
start of a gas engine. The Pickup must be used in any case!
The maximum duration that the output STARTER (PAGE 453) is energized is determined by the setpoint
Maximum Cranking Time (page 207). If the engine does not start within this period, outputs STARTER
(PAGE 453) and FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 432) are de-energized and a pause with length determined by
Cranking Fail Pause (page 207) will follow. PRESTART (PAGE 449), GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 438) and IGNITION
(PAGE 441) outputs are active during the pause. After the pause has elapsed, the next start attempt is
executed. The number of start attempts is given by the setpoint Cranking Attempts (page 206).
Once the engine is started, the Idle period follows. The binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 441) remains
inactive (as it was during the start). The idle period duration is adjusted by the setpoint Idle Time (page
215).
After the idle period has finished, the output DESCRIPTION (PAGE 441) is activated and the start-up sequence
is finished. The Stabilization (page 98) phase follows.

Image 5.13 Flowchart of start of gas engine

5.5.4 Stabilization
When the Engine start (page 94) sequence is finished, the Gen-set goes into the stabilization phase. There are
two timers (setpoints) in this phase:
Minimal Stabilization Time (page 217) starts to count down just after the idle period has finished.
Generator voltage and frequency are not checked (respective protections are not evaluated) and the GCB
cannot be closed even if the generator voltage and frequency are within limits.
Maximal Stabilization Time (page 218) starts to count down just after the idle period has finished.
Generator voltage and frequency are not checked (respective protections are not evaluated) but, opposite to
the previous timer, the GCB can be closed if generator voltage and frequency are within limits.
In situations where the GCB is closed automatically (AUTO, TEST modes), the closing of GCB will occur in the
first moment when the generator voltage and frequency will get into limits and the Minimal Stabilization Time
(page 217) has already elapsed.
In the event that the generator voltage or frequency are not within limits within the Maximal Stabilization Time
(page 218) period, the appropriate protection(s) will be activated and the Gen-set will be cooled down and
stopped.
Note: The limits for the generator voltage and frequency are given by setpoints in the Group: Generator
settings (page 237).
Note: The value of the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 217) setpoint has to be lower than the value of
Maximal Stabilization Time (page 218) setpoint.
5.5.5 Connecting to load

When the Stabilization (page 98) phase is finished, the Gen-set can be connected to the load.
The command for connecting the Gen-set to the load is issued either automatically (AUTO, TEST modes) or
manually by pressing the GCB button. The following conditions must be valid:
The Gen-set is running and the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 217) timer has elapsed.
The Gen-set voltage and frequency are within limits.
5.5.6 MRS operation

The "MRS function" represents manual or remote start of gen-set. It is ideal for prime power applications.
The MRS procedure

When the start command is detected, the following steps are performed:
The Gen-set is started.
GCB is closed and the Gen-set begins to supply the load (in AUTO mode, otherwise GCB button has to be
pressed)
When the stop command is detected, the following steps are performed:
GCB is opened and the Gen-set stops supply the load.
After GCB is opened, the Gen-set cools down and a stop.
5.5.7 AMF operation

The "AMF function" represents the automatic start in the event that the mains have failed and stop after the
mains have been restored. The automatic start can be enabled or disabled by binary inputs AMF START BLOCK

(PAGE 402) or MAINS FAIL BLOCK (PAGE 410).
Note: The AMF function works only in AUTO mode.
AMF sequence
State Condition of the transition Action Next state

Mains Mains failed or MCB MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 444)off, Mains failure
operation FEEDBACK (PAGE 411) Emergency Start Delay (page 247) timer
dropout, MCB Opens On started
(page 259) = Mains Fail
Mains failed or MCB Emergency Start Delay (page 247) timer Mains failure
FEEDBACK (PAGE 411) started
dropout, MCB Opens On
(page 259) = Gen Run
Mains failure Mains voltage and frequency After elapsing MCB Close Delay (page Mains
OK, MCB Opens On (page 248) MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 444) on operation
259) = Mains Fail
Mains voltage and frequency None Mains
OK, MCB Opens On (page operation
259) = Gen Run
Emergency Start Delay Engine start sequence performed, then Island
(page 247) elapsed, MCB GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 434) on operation
Opens On (page 259) =
Mains Fail
Emergency Start Delay Engine start sequence performed, then Island
(page 247) elapsed, MCB MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 444) off, time operation
Opens On (page 259) = Gen delay Transfer Delay (page 261)
Run performed and GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE
434) on
Island Mains voltage and frequency Mains Return Delay (page 247) timer Mains return
operation OK started
Mains return Mains failed Island
operation
Mains Return Delay (page GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 434) off, then Mains
247) elapsed after Transfer Delay (page 261) MCB operation
CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 444) on and then
engine stop sequence performed
Note: Mains failed means mains over/under -voltage, over/under -frequency, voltage asymmetry is issued
(preset delay must elapse).
Note: If during start-up sequence mains returns, then MCB is reclosed with delay MCB Close Delay (page
248)(if opened, depending on MCB Opens On (page 259) setpoint) and start-up sequence is interrupted.
Note: If mains fails during stop procedure (cooling) again, stop sequence is interrupted, MCB opened and GCB
re-closed with Transfer Delay (page 261).

Mains failure detection
The mains are considered as faulty when one or more of the following conditions are valid:
The mains voltage is out of the limits given by the setpoints Mains Undervoltage (page 252) and Mains
Overvoltage (page 250) for a time period longer than Mains Voltage Unbalance Delay (page 254).
The mains frequency is out of the limits given by the setpoints Mains Underfrequency (page 255) and
Mains Overfrequency (page 254) for a time period longer than Mains < > Frequency Delay (page 256).
The MCB close command was not successful and the alarm Wrn MCB Fail (page 494) was not reset.
Phase rotation is incorrect.
Healthy mains detection

The mains are considered to be healthy when all of following conditions are valid:
The mains voltage is within the limits given by the setpoints Mains Undervoltage (page 252) and Mains
Overvoltage (page 250).
The mains voltage unbalance is within the limits given by the setpoint Mains Voltage Unbalance (page
254).
The mains frequency is within the limits given by the setpoints Mains Underfrequency (page 255) and
Mains Overfrequency (page 254).
The alarm Wrn MCB Fail (page 494) is not active (if MCB feedback is active). This condition is not required
if MCB is open (MCB feedback is inactive).
Phase rotation is correct.
The AMF procedure

When the mains failure is detected, the following steps are performed:
If the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 259) is set to Mains Fail, the MCB is opened
The timer for automatic start of the Gen-set Emergency Start Delay (page 247) begins to count down.
After the timer has elapsed, the Gen-set is started.
Note: The automatic start of the Gen-set due to AMF function can be disabled by the binary inputs AMF START
BLOCK (PAGE 402) or MAINS FAIL BLOCK (PAGE 410).
If the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 259) is set to Gen Run, the MCB is opened once the generator
voltage is within limits (after Minimal Stabilization Time (page 217) elapses).
Note: If the mains are restored to health and the Gen-set is still not connected to the load, the controller
interrupts the startup process and closes back the MCB.
After Transfer Delay (page 261) elapses, the GCB is closed and the Gen-set begins to supply the load.
After the mains restored to normal, the timer Mains Return Delay (page 247) begins to count down.
Maximum time between closing of MCB and opening GCB is given by the setpoint Transfer Delay (page
261). After GCB is opened, the Gen-set cools down and a stops.
IMPORTANT: Controller has this behavior only in AUTO mode!

5.5.8 Dual Operation
Dual operation – AMF
Dual operation - AMF consists 2 gen-sets and 1 mains. Principle of dual operation is in switching the Gen-sets
in supplying of load when there is a mains fail or LBI REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 416) is activated on Master
controller. Each controller measures mains and its gen-set. Interlock between all breakers (GCB1, GCB2 and
MCB) is required. If there is fail of one Gen-set, second Gen-set will take the load.
MCB control from both controllers is not required. Slave controller in Dual Operation doesn’t control MCB (MCB
Close/Open is in open position). However it is recommended to be prepare to control MCB also from slave
controller – in case of fail of Dual Operation, both controllers are switch to normal AMF operation.
IMPORTANT: Dual operation works only in AUTO mode.
IMPORTANT: Dual operation is in fail also during process of adjustment of setpoints. In this
moment slave still tries to control MCB.
IMPORTANT: Setpoint MCB Opens On (page 259) has to be set-up to Mains Fail option.
IMPORTANT: LBI MAINS FAIL BLOCK (PAGE 410) can cause fail of dual operation system. In case of
different states of mains on master and slave controllers, alarm AHI Dual Operation Different Mains
(page 490) is activated and gen-sets are switched to normal operation.
Note: LBI AMF START BLOCK (PAGE 402) is evaluated on both controllers. When this LBI is activated, gen-set
can’t start in dual operation. Second gen-set (without active AMF START BLOCK (PAGE 402)) will start. Gen-
sets are not swapping the load until this LBI is active. Behaviour is the same like with alarm of 2nd level.
Note: MCB Fail protection is not used in Slave controller during Dual Operation. MCB is controlled only via
Master. Slave controller has MCB Close/Open in open position all the time during Dual Operation.
Start/stop events
Event Dual AMF
Mains Fail Evaluated by Master only
LBI REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 416) Evaluated by Master only
Dual operation – MRS

Dual operation MRS consists 2 gen-sets. Principle of dual operation is in switching the gen-sets in supplying of
load when REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 416) is activated on Master controller (on slave controller this LBI has
no function in Dual Operation). Each controller measures its gen-set. Interlock between all breakers (GCB1 and
GCB2) is required. If there is fail of one gen-set, second gen-set will take the load.
IMPORTANT: Dual operation works only in AUTO mode.
IMPORTANT: Dual operation is in fail also during process of adjustment of setpoints.
IMPORTANT: It is not possible to use Auto Run option in Exercise timers with dual operation.
Start/stop events
Event Dual MRS
LBI REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 416) Evaluated by Master only

Communication
Communication can be established via communication module CM-RS232-485. Communication line is
selected via setpoints COM1 Mode (page 293) or COM2 Mode (page 294). There are options DualMaster and
DualSlave. These options adjust, which communication line is selected and which role controller has in Dual
Operation.
IMPORTANT: For correct communication it is necessary to have one Master and one Slave
controller on the same communication line.
IMPORTANT: There are no shared setpoints. It is necessary to have the same settings of AMF
setpoints and engine timers in both controllers.
In case of communication fail between controllers, alarm AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 489) is activated.
This alarm is activated on both controllers. Both controllers are switched to normal operation.
Adjustment of COM Modes

COM Mode in COM Mode in
Behavior
controller 1 controller 2
Master Slave OK – normal dual operation function
Slave Master OK – normal dual operation function
There will be communication fail (it is necessary to have master and
slave to establish communication line) – there will be active
Master Master alarm AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 489). This alarm will be active
on both controllers. Both controllers will be switched to normal
operation.
Slave Slave alarm AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 489). This alarm will be active
on both controllers. Both controllers will be switched to normal
operation.
Disabled Master/Slave alarm AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 489). This alarm will be active
on master/slave controller. Both controllers will be switched to normal
operation.
slave to establish communication line) – there will be active alarm
Master/Slave Disabled AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 489). This alarm will be active on
master/slave controller. Both controllers will be switched to normal
operation.
Disabled Disabled Both controllers are in normal operation.
Switching of Gen-sets
Switching of Gen-sets is based on their Running Hours (page 379). The time how long the Gen-set is running
is adjusted via setpoint Running Hours Max Difference (page 259). When difference of Running Hours
(page 379) between Gen-sets is bigger then value adjusted in this setpoint, load is transferred from first Gen-set
to second Gen-set. First Gen-set is supplying the load until second Gen-set is in running state. Then the GCB of

first Gen-set is opened. From this moment timer Transfer Delay (page 261) counts down. When it counts
down, GCB of second Gen-set can be closed.
Note: Value of Running Hours (page 379) can be modified by setpoint Running Hours Base (page 260).
This setpoint can add or remove additional running hours to value from statistics. This modified value of running
hours is used in dual operation function.
Note: In case that both Gen-sets have the same running hours, Master controller has higher priority.
Note: Switching of Gen-sets can be inhibit by setpoint Swap Gen-sets (page 260) or by binary input DUAL
SWAP GEN-SETS (PAGE 405).
Note: Priority of Gen-set can be changed by binary input DUAL TOP PRIORITY (PAGE 405). In this case running
hours values are not used to decide, which Gen-set should start.
Dual operation adjustment

Prepare two InteliLite 4 AMF 9 controllers with CM-RS232-485 module.
Adjust setpoints COM1 Mode (page 293) or COM2 Mode (page 294) (depends on preferred
communication line) to DualMaster on first controller and Dual Slave on second controller
Copy the identical configurations to both of them
Use wiring with mechanical/electrical interlock between all breakers (mechanical interlock is preferred)
Switch both controllers to OFF mode to prevent automatic or remote start
Interconnect communication terminals on CM-RS232-485 modules
Adjust setpoint MCB Opens On (page 259) to Mains Fail option
Adjust setpoint Running Hours Max Difference (page 259) on Master controller
Adjust setpoints Running Hours Base (page 260) on both controllers if running hours change is needed for
dual operation
Adjust additional function of dual operation – Master Error Protection (page 261), Slave Error Protection
(page 261) and Swap Gen-sets (page 260) setpoints
Change the mode of both controllers to AUTO
System is now ready for dual operation function
Note: Breakers feedbacks are recommended, but not required.
Alarms related to dual operation:

AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 489)
Wrn Dual Operation Master Fail (page 489)
Wrn Dual Operation Slave Fail (page 490)
AHI Dual Operation Different Mains (page 490)
ALI Dual Operation Different FW Version (page 489)

5.5.9 Engine cool down and stop
The cool down phase follows after the stop command has been issued and the GCB has been opened.
Duration of the cool down phase is determined by the setpoint Cooling Time (page 219).
Cooling is performed either at nominal speed (generator voltage and frequency protections are evaluated) or
at idle speed (generator voltage and frequency protections are not evaluated). Selection of the speed is done
by the setpoint Cooling Speed (page 219).
The cool down can be finished manually in MAN mode by pressing the STOP button.
If a new start request comes, the cool down will be interrupted and the Gen-set will go back to the
stabilization phase. If the cooling was at nominal speed, the stabilization timers will not count down again so
the GCB is ready to be closed (after 2 seconds delay).
When the cool down is finished, the output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 432) is de-energized and STOP SOLENOID
(PAGE 454) is energized. The engine will stop within the time period determined by the setpoint Stop Time
(page 219). If the engine does not stop within this time, the alarm Wrn Stop Fail (page 491) will be issued.
The output STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 454) is energized until the engine is stopped, but at least for the duration of
Stop Time (page 219). If the Stop Time (page 219) has elapsed and the engine has still not stopped, the STOP
SOLENOID (PAGE 454) is de-energized for 5 s and then energized again for Stop Time (page 219) and this
repeats until the engine is stopped.
The output Ignition (page 441) is continuously energized until the engine is stopped.
Stopped Gen-set evaluation

The Gen-set is considered as stopped when all of following conditions are valid:
The engine speed is lower than 2 RPM.
The generator voltage in all phases is lower than 10 V.
None of Additional running engine indications (page 107) signals is active.
5.5.10 Gen-set operation states

Engine state machine
Autotest during controller power on.

Note: Sometimes controller stays in Init mode after FW upgrade. It means that there
Init
are new parameters which should be checked by user. It is possible to disable this
control via InteliConfig.
Gen-set is not ready to start.
Not ready
Example: When shutdown alarm is active or unit is in OFF mode.
Prestart sequence in process, PRESTART (PAGE 449) output is active.
Prestart
Example: Usually used for preheating or processes executed prior Gen-set start.
Cranking Engine is cranking, STARTER (PAGE 453) output is active.
Pause Pause between start attempts.
Starting Starting speed is reached and the Idle timer is running.
Running Gen-set is running at nominal speed.
Loaded Gen-set is running at nominal speed and GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 434) is active.

Stop.
Stop
Example: Automatic or manual stop command was issued, engine is stopping.
Shutdown Shut-down alarm activated.
Ready Gen-set is ready to run.
Cooling Gen-set is cooling before stop.
EMERGENCY MAN (PAGE 406) Gen-set operation.
Example: Used for bypass the controller and engine manual start.
EmergMan
Controller mode, where the LBI EMERGENCY MAN (PAGE 406) is activated. All control
functions are stopped
Engine started conditions

Engine speed (RPM) > Starting RPM (page 208) or
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 209) or
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 412) is in logical 0 or
D+ terminal active (reached D+ Threshold (page 223) of supply voltage) for minimum 1 s or
Generator voltage > 25 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 195) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 195)
(any phase)
Note: Any of these condition will disconnect starter of the engine, however for transition to next state RPM
needs to be higher than Starting RPM (page 208).
Engine running conditions

Engine speed (RPM) > Starting RPM (page 208) or
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 209) or
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 412) is in logical 0 or
Generator voltage > 25 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 195)
Still engine conditions

Engine speed (RPM) < Starting RPM (page 208) and
Oil pressure < Starting Oil Pressure (page 209) and
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 412) is in logical 1 and
Generator voltage < 50 V (all phases)
Note: When the engine was running before and all above conditions are fulfilled, additional 2 s delay is
necessary to confirm "still engine".
When any engine running conditions are appeared on still engine than the Wrn Stop Fail (page 491) is
activated with following delay:
For generator voltage from 10 V to < 50 % of nominal voltage, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1 s
For generator voltage > 50 % of nominal voltage, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 200 ms
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 209), Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1 s
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 412) is in logical 0, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1 s
For detected RPM, there is no delay.

Stop engine conditions
If no engine running conditions are validated than the controller will wait extra 12 s before leaving the Machine
state Stop and than it will release the STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 454) output.
Image 5.14 Engine stops in Stop Time (page 219)
When the total time of stopping will exceed setpoint Stop Time (page 219) then the Wrn Stop Fail (page 491)
and binary outputs for stopping are activated. The controller will continuously try to stop the engine.
Image 5.15 Engine stops after first Stop Time (page 219)
Electric state machine
Mains is present and all its values are within limits.

MainsOper
Example: MCB is closed, GCB is opened
MainsFlt Mains fails
Island operation
IslOper
Example: MCB is opened, GCB is closed

MainsRet Mains recover
BrksOff GCB, MCB opened
5.5.11 Additional running engine indications

It is helpful to have information other than speed (RPM), whether the engine is rotating or not, especially if RPM
is measured from the generator frequency instead of magnetic pickup. The generator frequency measurement
can be unreliable at very low speeds and/or may have a delayed reaction to sudden and big changes (i.e. in the
moment that the engine has just started…).
The following conditions are evaluated as additional running engine indication:
Voltage on the D+ input is higher than the D+ Threshold (page 223) of battery voltage. Connect this input
to the D+ (L) terminal of the charging alternator and enable the D+ function by the setpoint D+ Threshold
(page 223) . If D+ terminal is not available, leave the input unconnected and disable the function.
The pickup is not used and frequency is not detected on the pickup input. Connect the pickup input to the W
terminal of the charging alternator if you do not use pickup and the W terminal is available. If not, leave the
input unconnected.
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 209) setpoint. The oil pressure is evaluated from the analog
input or from the ECU if an ECU is configured.
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 412) is in logical 0.
At least one phase of generator voltage is >25 % of nominal voltage.
These signals are used during start for powering down the starter motor even if still no RPM is measured and
also during stop in order to evaluate if the engine is really stopped.
5.5.12 History log

The history log is an area in the controller’s non-volatile memory that records "snapshots" of the system at
moments when important events occur. The history log is important especially for diagnostics of failures and
problems. When the history file is full, the oldest records are removed.
Each record has the same structure and contains:
The event which caused the record (e.g. "Overspeed alarm" or "GCB closed")
The date and time when it was recorded
All important data values like RPM, kW, voltages, etc. from the moment that the event occurred.
Record structure
Name Abbreviation Description

Row number (0 corresponds to the last record, -1 to the previous
Number No.
one, etc.)
Reason for history record (any event or alarm related to the gen-
Reason Reason
set
Time Time Time
Date Date Date
RPM RPM Engine rotations per minute
Power Pwr Generator active power

Reactive power Q Generator reactive power
Power Factor PF Generator power factor
Load Character LChr Generator load character
Generator
Gfrq Generator Frequency
Frequency
Generator Voltage Vg1 Generator voltage Ph1
Generator Current Ig1 Generator current Ph1
Mains Frequency Mfrq Mains Frequency
Mains Voltage Vm1 Mains voltage Ph1
Mains Current IL1 Mains current Ph1
Voltage Battery VBat Voltage of battery
Analog Input 1 Ain1 Analog input 1
Binary Inputs BIN Controller binary inputs
E-Stop E-Stop State of dedicated E-Stop input
Binary Outputs BOUT Controller binary outputs
Controller Mode Mode Controller mode
Note: When some setpoint is changed, in history log is written its number of communication object.
5.5.13 Breaker control

The following power switches are controlled by the controller:
The generator circuit breaker or contactor – GCB
The Mains circuit breaker or contactor – MCB

It is possible to use either a motorized circuit breaker or contactor. Below is a list of available control outputs
that should fit all types of contactors or breakers. The following rules must be kept to when designing the wiring
of power switches:
The control outputs must be configured and wiring of the power switches must be provided in such a way,
that the controller has full control over the breakers – i.e. the controller can open and close the breaker at any
time.
The breaker must respond within max. 5 seconds to a close and open command. Special attention should be
paid to opening of motorized circuit breakers, as it could take more than 5 seconds on some types. In such
cases it is necessary to use an undervoltage coil for fast opening.
After opening the breaker, there is internal delay for another closing of breaker. Delay is 6 seconds –
5 seconds for OFF coil and 1 second for UV coil. After these 6 seconds, breaker can be closed again. For
opening of breaker there is no delay.
Breaker control outputs
An output for control of a contactor. Its state represents the breaker position requested by
Close/Open the controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command,
otherwise an alarm is issued.
An output giving a 5 second pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed. The output
ON coil
is intended for control of close coils of circuit breakers.
An output giving a pulse in the moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until
OFF coil the feedback deactivates, but at least for 5 seconds. The output is intended for control of
open coils of circuit breakers.
The GCB UV coil output is active the whole time the Gen-set is running (not in idle or
cooling). The MCB UV coil output is active when the controller is switched on. The output
UV coil
is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the moment the breaker has to be switched off. The
output is intended for control of undervoltage coils of circuit breakers.
Image 5.16 Breaker control outputs

MCB special requirements
If a contactor is used on the MCB position, it is recommended that the wiring be provided in such a way that
the contactor will be normally closed and will open if the logical binary output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 444)
is activated. This behavior is called "negative logic" and can be adjusted by the setpoint MCB Logic (page
257). The negative logic will prevent accidental opening of the MCB when the controller is switched off.
If a contactor is used on the MCB position, it will open itself immediately after the mains have failed,
because it will lose power for the coil. That is why the following adjustment is necessary to prevent triggering
the Wrn MCB Fail (page 494) alarm: MCB Opens On (page 259) = Mains Fail, Mains <> Voltage Delay
(page 253) ≤1.
If a 230 V motor driven circuit breaker is used on the MCB position and an undervoltage coil is not fitted, it is
not possible to open the breaker after the mains have failed, because there is no power for the motor drive
until the Gen-set is started and providing voltage. Adjusting the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 259) = Gen
Run will prevent triggering the Wrn MCB Fail (page 494) alarm.
Breaker fail detection

Breaker fail detection is based on binary output breaker close/open comparing with binary input breaker
feedback.
IMPORTANT: It is necessary to configure breaker feedback to use this function.
IMPORTANT: Also it is possible to use breakers without feedbacks. In this case there is no check
of breaker real state.
There are three different time delays for breaker fail detection – see following diagrams.
When binary output breaker close/open is in steady state and breaker feedback is changed the breaker fail is
detected immediately (no delay).
Image 5.17 Breaker fail – breaker close/open in steady position – open

Image 5.18 Breaker fail – breaker close/open in steady position – close
When binary output breaker close/open opens there is 5 sec delay for breaker fail detection.
Image 5.19 Breaker fail – breaker close/open opens
When binary output breaker close/open closes there is 5 sec delay for breaker fail detection.
Image 5.20 Breaker fail – breaker close/open closes

5.5.14 Protections
Fixed Protections
Fixed protections are built in protections for Generator, Engine, Mains or for other functionalities (battery
voltage, fuel theft, D+, etc…). Their purpose is to inform or perform actions when the malfunction is detected.

Fixed Protection types
Fault LBO Horn LBO Alarm Action: SD

Alarm Action:
Name Level Abbreviation History Reset activation (inc. activation (inc. Gen-set Override Common LBO
List CB open
needed Flashing) Flashing) stop blocking
AL COMMON
Warning 1 Wrn - - -
WRN ( PAGE 423)
History Record
1 Hst - - - - - - - -
Only
Alarm List
1 ALI - - - - - - - -
Indication
AL COMMON SD
Shutdown 2 Sd
( PAGE 423)
Breaker Open & AL COMMON
2 BOC
Cool Down BOC ( PAGE 422)

Protection blocking
Engine and generator fixed protections are blocked during starting phases or Ready and Stop states. They
become unblocked once Maximal Stabilization Time (page 218) is elapsed or GCB is closed depends what
happens first.
Exceptions are:
Overspeed protection which has two limits defined via setpoints Overspeed Sd (page 224) and Starting
Overspeed Sd (page 224). Starting Overspeed limit is considered in the starting phase till Starting
Overspeed Time elapses. This time starts to count once the RPM exceeds the value of Starting RPM
(page 208).
E-Stop and Emergency stop
The other way how fixed protections can be blocked is by active LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 417).
Note: LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 417) (Shutdown Override) does not block evaluation of fixed protection
conditions and their visualization. They are recorded into alarm list or history. It only blocks their actions.
Shutdown Override blocks all level 2 (Sd, BOC) fixed protection. It does not block level 1 (Wrn, AHI, Hist) or
protection of type Sd Override.
Some generator or engine protections have an option to DISABLE the protection.

The setting is done by using the setpoint which is associated to the fixed protection. Each setpoint offers these
options.
Setpoint options
Options Description
Enable Protection is enabled
Disable Protection is blocked
ExtDisable Disabling of the protection can be forced by LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE (PAGE 413)
Generator and engine protections lists
Generator protections
Alarms / Protection name
BOC Short Circuit (page 526)
Current BOC Overcurrent IDMT (page 526)
BOC Current Unbalance (page 525)
BOC Generator Overfrequency (page 520)
Frequency
BOC Generator Underfrequency (page 520)
ALI Gen Ph L1 Inverted (page 503)
ALI Gen Ph L2 Inverted (page 503)
Others ALI Gen Ph L3 Inverted (page 504)
ALI Gen Ph Rotation Opposite (page 504)
Sd Earth Fault Current (page 526)
Power BOC Overload (page 525)

Sd Generator L1 Overvoltage (page 514)
Sd Generator L1L2 Overvoltage (page 515)
BOC Generator L1 Undervoltage (page 516)
Voltage
BOC Generator L1L2 Undervoltage (page 517)
BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-N (page 520)
BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph (page 519)
Mains protections
Mains Overfrequency (page 505)
Frequency
Mains Underfrequency (page 506)
ALI Mains Ph L1 Inverted (page 504)
Others
ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite (page 505)
Mains L1 Overvoltage (page 521)
Mains L1 Undervoltage (page 521)
Mains L2 Undervoltage (page 522)
Mains L1L2 Overvoltage (page 523)
Voltage
Mains L1L2 Undervoltage (page 523)
Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-n (page 505)
Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-ph (page 505)

Engine protections
Sd Overspeed (page 513)
Speed
Sd Underspeed (page 513)
User Protections
InteliLite 4 allows users to configure their own protections to any analog input or binary input/output. Only one
protection of 1st level and/or one protection of 2nd level can be configured on logical binary input/output. More
than one protection can be configured on analog input. Max simultaneous number of configured user protections
is 32.
Source upon which the protection is configured can be selected. It can be any analog value or binary state.
Source
Analog values Binary states
Binary inputs
Analog inputs
Controller, Modules, ECU
Controller, Modules
Binary outputs
Values
PLC
ECU, Generator, Mains, others
Protection states
Statistics
LBOs
Protection activation
Type Name of activation Description
Over Limit Protection is activated if value is over limit.
Over Limit + Fls Protection is activated if value is over limit or in a fault state.
Analog Under Limit Protection is activated if value is under limit.
Under Limit + Fls Protection is activated if value is under limit or in a fault state.
Fls only Protection is activated if value is in a fault state.
True Protection is activated if value is Logical 1.
TrueOrFls Protection is activated if value is Logical 1 or in a fault state.
Binary
False Protection is activated if value is Logical 0.
FalseOrFls Protection is activated if value is Logical 0 or in a fault state.

User Protection types
Fault LBO Horn LBO Alarm Action: SD

Alarm Action:
Name Level Abbreviation History Reset activation (inc. activation (inc. Gen-set Override Common LBO
List CB open
needed Flashing) Flashing) stop blocking
AL COMMON
Warning 1 Wrn - - -
WRN ( PAGE 423)
History Record
1 Hst - - - - - - - -
Only
AlarmList
1 AL - - - - - - - -
indication
AL COMMON SD
Shutdown 2 Sd
( PAGE 423)
Breaker Open & AL COMMON
2 BOC
Cool Down BOC ( PAGE 422)
Shutdown
2 Sd - -
Override

Protection blocking
It is possible to configure one Protection Blocking to any User Protections (page 116). This function is used to
block certain protections when their function is unwanted or meaningless. Each user protection has an option to
set the blocking condition.
Protection blocking
Block Type Description
All the time The protection is not blocked. It can be blocked only by LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 417).
Run Only The protection is blocked depending on engine state and time defined by setpoint Run Only
Block Delay Block Delay (page 218). It can also be blocked by LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 417).
The protection is blocked by LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE (PAGE 413) or by LBI SD
Force Block
OVERRIDE (PAGE 417).
The protection is blocked depending on engine state. It is unblocked once Maximal
Electrical
Stabilization Time (page 218) is elapsed or GCB is closed. It can also be blocked by LBI
Protection
SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 417).
Note: LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 417) (Shutdown Override) does not block evaluation of user protection
conditions and their visualization. They are recorded into alarm list or history. It only blocks their actions.
Shutdown Override blocks all level 2 (Sd,BOC) protection. It does not block level 1 (Wrn, AHI, Hist) or
protection of type SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 417).
Image 5.21 Run only block delay and electrical protection blocking
History record
Always – History is recorded all the time.
Once – History is recorded only once after fault reset.
Note: Every User protection is evaluated with period 0.1 s.

Configuration of protections in InteliConfig
Control tab → Controller configuration → Protections tab → Analog / Binary protections
Select the desired protections to be configured (Analog protections / Binary protections).
Add protection by clicking on the icon .
Delete selected protection by clicking on the icon .
Edit selected protection by clicking on the icon .

Adding analog protection
Selecting the input source see User Protections on page 116.
Selecting the protection type see Fixed Protection types on page 113.
Selecting the protection activation see Protection activation on page 116.
Selecting the block type see Protection blocking on page 118.
Selecting if the occurrence of a protection is recorded every time or only once after a Fault
Reset.
Selecting the input for limit.
Setpoints must have the correct resolution and dimension as protection source value.
Existing setpoint
New user setpoint
Existing user setpoint
Prefix is added to the name based on protection type / level
Selecting the input for delay.
Setpoints must have the correct resolution 0.1 and dimension [s]
Existing setpoint
New user setpoint
Prefix is added to the name based on protection type / level.
Text input for Alarm / History message.
If user protection state is checked then created user protection has LBO located in Bin Values in
the Group: User Protection States (page 385).

Adding binary protection
Selecting the input source see User Protections on page 116.
Selecting the protection type see Fixed Protection types on page 113.
Selecting the protection activation see Protection activation on page 116.
Selecting the block type see Protection blocking on page 118.
Selecting if the occurrence of a protection is recorded every time or only once after a Fault
Reset.
Selecting the input for delay.
Setpoints must have the correct resolution 0.1 and dimension [s]
Existing setpoint
New user setpoint
Text input for Alarm / History message
If user protection state is checked then created user protection has LBO located in Bin Values in
the Group: User Protection States (page 385).
Protection states
Protection states are states of fixed and user protections. These states can be configured as binary output or
used in PLC logic.

Fixed protection states
Important Fixed Protections (page 112) have a protection state. The protection state is (usually) named
exactly as the alarm. Fixed protection states are in a group of 32 values.
Protection states groups:
FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 384)
User protections states

During the Configuration of protections in InteliConfig (page 119), you can decide whether you want to add
user protection state for the protection. The name is exactly same as the alarm's message.
User protection states are in a group of 32 values.
Note: Group of User protection states is showed only when there is at least 1 protection state in it.
Protection states group:

USER PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 385)
Alarm management
The controller evaluates two levels of alarms. Level 1 – yellow alarm – is a pre-critical alarm that is only
informative and does not take any action regarding Gen-set control. Level 2 – red alarm – represents a critical
situation, where an action must be taken to prevent damage of the Gen-set or technology.
One alarm of level 1 and one alarm of level 2 can be assigned to each binary input at once.
Multiple protections can be assigned on each analog input.
There are also Built-in alarms (page 126) with fixed alarm types.
Each alarm is written to the Alarmlist (page 126).
Each alarm causes a record to be written into the history log.
Each alarm activates the Alarm and Horn output.
Each alarm can cause sending of a SMS message or an email.

Analog input alarm evaluation principle
Image 5.22 Analog input alarm evaluation principle
Alarm handling
There are four different alarm categories regarding the period when the alarms are evaluated. The category is
selectable for alarms assigned to binary/analog inputs and fixed for built-in alarms. The categories are the
following:
The alarm is evaluated all the time when the controller is switched on.
The alarm is evaluated only when the engine is running. This type should be used for e.g. oil pressure. These
alarms begin to be evaluated after the engine has been started with the delay given by the setpoint Run
Only Block Delay (page 218).
The alarm is evaluated only when the generator is excited. These alarms begin to be evaluated after the
engine has been started and Maximal Stabilization Time (page 218) has elapsed or the GCB has been
closed. They remain evaluated until cooling has finished. Only Generator under/overvoltage, Generator
voltage unbalance and Generator under/overfrequency belong to this category. This category is not
configurable to binary and analog input alarms.
The alarm is evaluated only when LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE (PAGE 413) is not active.
If an alarm is being evaluated and the appropriate alarm condition is fulfilled, the delay of evaluation will start to
run. The delay is adjustable by a setpoint If the conditions persist, the alarm will activate. The alarm will not
activate if the condition is dismissed while the delay is still running.
After pressing the Fault reset button or activating the binary input FAULT RESET BUTTON (PAGE 407), all active
alarms change to confirmed state. Confirmed alarms will disappear from the Alarmlist as soon as the respective
condition dismisses. If the condition is dismissed before acknowledging the alarm, the alarm will remain in the
Alarmlist as Inactive.
Note: The input SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 417) can be used for temporary disabling of red alarms to shutdown the
engine. This input may be used in situations where providing the power is extremely important – e.g. if the Gen-
set drives pumps for fire extinguishers (sprinklers).

Alarm states
An alarm can have following states:
Active alarm: the alarm condition persists, alarm delay has elapsed.
Inactive alarm: the alarm condition has disappeared, but the alarm has not been confirmed.
Confirmed alarm: the alarm condition persists, but the alarm has already been confirmed.
Image 5.23 Alarm List
Alarm types – Level 1

The level 1 alarm indicates that a value or parameter is out of normal limits, but has still not reached critical
level. This alarm does not cause any actions regarding the gen-set control.
Warning (Wrn)
The alarm appears in the Alarmlist and is recorded into the history log. Activates the output AL COMMON W RN
(PAGE 423) as well as the standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 440) and ALARM (PAGE 425)).
Alarm indication only (AL Indic)

The alarm indication only alarm does not perform any actions regarding Gen-set control. Alarm is only displayed
in alarmlist.
History record only (HistRecOnl)

The event is recorded into the history. Standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 440) and ALARM (PAGE 425)) are
not activated.
Alarm types – Level 2

The level 2 level alarm indicates that a critical level of the respective value or parameter has been reached.
Note: It is not possible to start the engine if any red level protection is active or not confirmed.
IMPORTANT: The Gen-set can start by itself after acknowledging the alarms if there is no longer an
active red alarm and the controller is in AUTO or TEST mode!
Shutdown (Sd)
The alarm appears in the alarmlist and is recorded into the history log. It causes immediate stop of the Gen-set
without cooling phase. Also GCB breaker is open. The Gen-set cannot be started again while there is a
shutdown alarm in the alarmlist. Activates the output AL COMMON SD (PAGE 423) as well as the standard alarm
outputs (HORN (PAGE 440) and ALARM (PAGE 425)).

Breaker open and cool down (BOC)
The event appears in the alarmlist and is recorded into the history log. It causes immediate opening of the GCB
and then the standard stop sequence with cooling follows. The Gen-set cannot be started again while there is a
BOC alarm in the alarmlist. Activates the output AL COMMON BOC (PAGE 422) as well as the standard alarm
outputs (HORN (PAGE 440) and ALARM (PAGE 425)).
IMPORTANT: In case there is no feedback from breakers configured Breaker open and cool down
will be replaced by shutdown alarm type.
Sensor fail detection (FLS)

If the measured resistance on an analog input exceeds the valid range, a sensor fail will be detected and a
sensor fail message will appear in the Alarmlist (page 126). The valid range is defined by the most-left (RL)
and most-right (RH) points of the sensor characteristic ±12.5 % from RH-RL.
Note: Sometimes there can be problem with lower limit of valid range which can be counted as negative
number. In this case the lower limit is set as one half of the RL point of the sensor curve characteristic.
Image 5.24 Sensor fail detection principle
Remote alarm messaging

If communication plug-in module is connected to the controller, the controller can send SMS messages (CM2-
4G-GPS module) and emails (CM2-4G-GPS or CM3-Ethernet modules) at the moment when a new alarm
appears in the Alarmlist (page 126) or new event is written in History log (page 107). The message will
contain a copy of the Alarmlist (page 126) or reasons from History log (page 107). To enable this function
first check-out controller internet connection (Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings (page 314) for CM3-Ethernet or
Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings (page 298)/Subgroup: Cellular Interface (page 295) for CM2-4G-GPS). Then
adjust setpoints Event Message (page 329), Wrn Message (page 330), BOC Message (page 328) and Sd
Messages (page 329) to ON. Also enter a valid GSM phone number or email address to the setpoints
Telephone Number 1 (page 309), Telephone Number 2 (page 310), Telephone Number 3 (page 310),
Telephone Number 4 (page 311), Email Address 1 (page 326), Email Address 2 (page 327),Email
Address 3 (page 327), and Email Address 4 (page 327).

Alarmlist
Alarmlist is a container of active and inactive alarms. It will appear automatically on the controller display, if a
new alarm occurs, or can be displayed manually from the display menu.
Active alarms are shown as inverted, not yet confirmed alarms are marked with asterisk before them.
Alarmlist contains three types of alarms:
Controller built-in alarms
User configured alarms
ECU alarms
Controller built-in alarms

An alarm message in the alarmlist begins with a prefix, which represents the alarm type (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC).
Then the alarm name follows. In some cases the prefix can be omitted.
User configured alarms

An alarm message in the alarmlist begins with a prefix, which represents the alarm type (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC).
Alarm type is selected by user during the configuration of binary or analog user protection. Then the alarm name
follows, which can be adjusted by user during the configuration.
ECU alarms
The ECU alarms are received from the ECU. The alarms are represented by the Diagnostic Trouble Code,
which contains information about the subsystem where the alarm occurred, the alarm type and the alarm
occurrence counter.
The most common fault codes are translated into text form. Other fault codes are displayed as a numeric code
and the engine fault codes list must be used to determine the reason.
Built-in alarms
Protection
Events specification Description
type
Battery voltage is out of limits given by Battery Overvoltage
Wrn Battery Overvoltage WRN
(page 230) setpoint.
Wrn Battery Battery voltage is out of limits given by Battery Undervoltage
WRN
Undervoltage (page 230) setpoint.
RTC Battery Flat WRN RTC battery weak or flat and has to be changed.
If the controller switches off during starting sequence (
STARTER (PAGE 453) output is active) it doesn't try to start
Sd Battery Flat SD
again and activates this protection (controller assumes bad
battery condition).
Gen-set start failed. All crank attempts were tried without
Sd Start Fail SD
success.
Sd Gen Lx Undervoltage The generator voltage is out of limits given by Generator
SD
BOC Gen Lx Overvoltage Undervoltage BOC (page 242) and Generator Overvoltage
BOC
(where x=1,2,3) Sd (page 240) setpoints.
The generator voltage is unbalanced more than the value of

BOC Gen V Unbalance BOC
Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 242) setpoint.

Protection
type
The generator frequency is out of limits given by Generator
BOC Gen >, <Frequency BOC Overfrequency BOC (page 243) and Generator
Underfrequency BOC (page 244) setpoints.
The generator current is unbalanced more than the value of
BOC Current Unbalance BOC
Current Unbalance BOC (page 240) setpoint.
Generator current exceeds the limit for IDMT protection given
BOC Current IDMT BOC by Nominal Current (page 190) and IDMT Overcurrent
Delay (page 238) setpoints.
The load is greater than the value given by Overload BOC
BOC Overload BOC
(page 237) setpoint.
This alarm is activated when Earth Fault value exceeds Earth
Sd Earth Fault SD Fault Sd (page 333) limit for at least Earth Fault Delay (page
332) period.
The protection comes active if the speed is greater than
Sd Overspeed SD
Overspeed Sd (page 224) setpoint.
During starting of the engine when the RPM reach the value of
Starting RPM (page 208) setpoint the starter is switched off
and the speed of the engine can drop under Starting RPM
Sd Underspeed SD
(page 208) again. Then the Underspeed protection is active.
Protection evaluation starts 5 seconds after reaching Starting
RPM (page 208).
If the input Emergency Stop is active shutdown is immediately
Emergency Stop SD
activated.
E-Stop SD If the input E-Stop is active shutdown is immediately activated.
GCB Fail SD Failure of generator circuit breaker.
MCB Fail WRN Failure of mains circuit breaker.
Failure of magnetic pick-up sensor for speed measurement.
This alarm appears, if starter was disengaged for other reason
Sd RPM Measurement than over-crossing Starting RPM (page 208) (like oil pressure
SD
Fail or D+) and at the end of timer Maximum Cranking Time
(page 207) there are no RPMs > Starting RPM (page 208)
detected.
Gen-set stop failed. See description at Gen-set Operation
Wrn Stop Fail WRN
States chapter.
Charge Alternator Fail WRN Failure of alternator for charging the battery.
Wrn Override All Sd WRN The protection is active if the output Sd Override is active.

Protection
type
MP Mains Lx >V
The mains voltage is out of limits given by Mains Overvoltage
MP Mains Lx <V MP
(page 250) and Mains Undervoltage (page 252) setpoints.
(where x=1,2,3)
The mains voltage is unbalanced more than the value of Mains
Mains Voltage Unbalance MP
Voltage Unbalance (page 254) setpoint.
The mains frequency is out of limits given by Mains
Mains >, <Frequency MP Overfrequency (page 254) and Mains Underfrequency
(page 255) setpoints.
Note: This table does not contain all alarms in controller. It is only list of the most common alarms.
5.5.15 Exercise timers

The exercise (general-purpose) timers in controller are intended for scheduling of any operations such as e.g.
periodic tests of the Gen-set, scheduled transfer of the load to the Gen-set prior to an expected disconnection of
the mains etc.
Related setpoints for timer 1 are:
Timer 1 Function (page 273) Timer 1 Day (page 277)
Timer 1 Repetition (page 275) Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week (page 277)
Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 274) Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 277)
Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 275) Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month (page 278)
Timer 1 Duration (page 275) Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 279)
Timer 1 Repeated (page 276) Timer 1 Weekends (page 280)
Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 276) Timer 1 Setup (page 274)

Timer 2 Setup (page 282) Timer 2 Repeat Week In Month (page 286)
Timer 2 Repeat Day (page 284) Timer 2 Setup (page 282)

Available modes of each timer:
This is a single shot mode. The timer will be activated only once at preset date/time for preset
Once
duration.
The timer is activated every "x-th" day. The day period "x" is adjustable. Weekends can be
Daily
excluded. E.g. the timer can be adjusted to every 2nd day excluding Saturdays and Sundays.
The timer is activated every "x-th" week on selected weekdays. The week period "x" is
Weekly
adjustable. E.g. the timer can be adjusted to every 2nd week on Monday and Friday.
The timer is activated every "x-th" month on the selected day. The requested day can be
Monthly selected either as "y-th" day in the month or as "y-th" weekday in the month. E.g. the timer
can be adjusted to every 1st month on 1st Tuesday.
Short The timer is repeated with adjusted period (hh:mm). The timer duration is included in the
period period.
Once mode
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup.
Note: First of all function of timer has to be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 273).
Image 5.25 Once mode – InteliConfig
In timer mode select Once. In timer settings adjust date and time of occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration
of timer.

Set-up via controller interface
In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 273)
setpoint. Than go to Timer 1 Setup and press enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 275) setpoint select
Once mode. Then adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 274), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 275) and
Timer 1 Duration (page 275).
Note: Use left and right buttons to move between timer setpoints.
Daily mode
Image 5.26 Daily mode – InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Daily. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the x-th day of repetition
(Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 279)) and behavior of timer on weekends (Timer 1 Weekends (page 280)).
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be again activated every 3rd day at 12:00 for 1 hour including weekends.

Repeated mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 274), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 275)
and Timer 1 Duration (page 275). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 276) select Daily and adjust Timer 1

Refresh Period (page 279) (x-th day of repetition) and Timer 1 Weekends (page 280) (behavior of timer on
weekends).
Weekly mode
Image 5.27 Weekly mode – InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Weekly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the x-th week of repetition
(Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 279) and days when timer should be active (Timer 1 Day (page 277).
be again activated every 2nd week on Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 12:00 for 1 hour.

and Timer 1 Duration (page 275). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 276) select Weekly and adjust Timer
1 Day (page 277) (days when timer should be active) and Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 279) (x-th week of
repetition).

Monthly mode
There are two types of monthly repetition. First of them is based on repeating one day in month.
Image 5.28 Monthly mode – InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Monthly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the type of monthly
repetition and the x-th day of repetition (Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 277)). Than select the x-th month
of repetition.
be again activated every 2nd day in 2nd month at 12:00 for 1 hour.

Second type of monthly repetition is based on repeating days in week in month.
Image 5.29 Monthly mode – InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Monthly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the type of monthly
repetition, the x-th week of repetition and days in week. Than select the x-th month of repetition.
be again activated every 2nd week in 2nd month on Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 12:00 for 1 hour.

There are two types of monthly repetition. First of them is based on repeating one day in month.
and Timer 1 Duration (page 275). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 276) select Monthly and adjust type of
monthly repetition via Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 276), Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 279) (x-th month of
repetition) and Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 277) (concrete day in repeated months).
Second type of monthly repetition is based on repeating days in week in month.
and Timer 1 Duration (page 275). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 276) select Monthly and adjust type of
monthly repetition via Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 276), Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 279) (x-th month of
repetition), Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week (page 277) (days in week when timer is active) and Timer 1
Repeat Week In Month (page 278) (concrete week in repeated months).

Short period mode
Image 5.30 Short period mode – InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Short period. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the interval of repetition
(shorter than 1 day).
be again activated every 4th hour for 1 hour.

and Timer 1 Duration (page 275). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 276) select Short Period and adjust
Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 279) (interval of repetition).

5.5.16 Analog switches
There are logical analog function dedicated for analog switches. Each analog switch has setpoints for level ON
and level OFF and logical binary output.
Analog switch Setpoints Binary output

AIN Switch01 On (page 267)
AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 459) AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 421)
AIN Switch01 Off (page 268)
AIN Switch02 On (page 269)
AIN SWITCH 02 (PAGE 459) AIN SWITCH02 (PAGE 421)
AIN Switch02 Off (page 270)
The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints.
Image 5.31 Principle of analog switch
5.5.17 Voltage phase sequence detection

Controller detects phase sequence voltage terminals. This protection is important after controller installation to
avoid wrong voltage phase connection. When the phases are connected in different order following alarms are
detected:
ALI Gen Ph Rotation Opposite (page 504)
ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite (page 505)
5.5.18 Load shedding

The Load shedding is controlled disconnection of less important load groups (circuits) when the object
consumption is too high.
Load shedding stages

The Load Shedding function consists of 2 stages which are numbered 1-52. Stages are disconnected in
ascending order up to the last configured stage. Reconnecting of stages is in descending order and starts with
higher configured stage. Stage is considered as configured when respective Load Shedding Output is
configured. Highest activated load shedding stage is stored in value Load Shedding Status (page 381).
Load shedding outputs

Stage LBO
Stage 1 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 1 (PAGE 443)
Stage 2 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 2 (PAGE 443)

How the Load shedding controls the Load shedding outputs
The load shedding function is active in all controller modes except OFF.
Load shedding has 2 steps and each step is linked with its own binary output, LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 1 (PAGE
443), LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 2 (PAGE 443).
The Load shedding outputs can be activated one by one in the direction 1, 2. The condition for activation are
defined by setpoints Load Shedding Level (page 264) and Load Shedding Delay (page 265).
The Load shedding outputs are deactivated one by one according to the conditions given by the setpoints Load
Reconnection Level (page 265), Load Reconnection Delay (page 265), AUTO LOAD RECONNECTION (PAGE
266).
For manual reconnection of the load is desired the Auto Load Reconnection (page 266) setpoint needs to be
disabled and the MANUAL LOAD RECONNECTION (PAGE 410) digital input needs to be configured.
Image 5.32 Load shedding
Image 5.33 Load reconnection

Image 5.34 Load manual reconnection
5.5.19 Sensor curves

Background of the sensor calibration
To correct measuring error of each analog input (pressure, temperature, level, etc.) calibrating constants should
be set. Calibration is made by adding the value of setpoint CU AIN1 Calibration (page 333), or CU AIN2
Calibration (page 334), or CU AIN3 Calibration (page 334) directly to the calculated value at analog input.
Note: The calibration must be done at the operational point of the analog input (e.g. 80 °C, 4.0 Bar etc..)
Default sensor curves

There are 16 default resistive curves available. The following table provides information on minimum/maximum
values of respective sensors. Actual values especially of temperature curves may differ. Meaning is to prolong
curve to the lower temperature values, so the cold engine will not raise alarm fail sensor.
Curve Min [Ω] Max [Ω] Units

VDO 10 Bar 10 180 Bar
VDO40-120°C 22 3200 °C
VDOLevel% 0 180 %
General line 1 0 1000 Ω

Note: Curves can be modified via InteliConfig. In InteliConfig are also prepared some standard curves.
IMPORTANT: For right behavior of function Total Fuel Consumption, curve for analog input FUEL
LEVEL (PAGE 460) has to be in percentage and setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 227) has to be
adjusted correctly.
5.5.20 PLC
PLC Editor is powerful tool which helps you to create your own PLC scheme. It has graphical interface to have
user interface easy to use.
Image 5.35 PLC Editor main page
List of available PLC blocks
PLC block Number of blocks

OR/AND 16
XOR/RS 2
Comparator with hysteresis (Comp Hyst) 2
Comparator with delay (Comp Time) 2
Timer 1
Delay 4
Counter 0

Working with the editor
If the currently opened archive does not contain any PLC program, then an empty drawing is created
automatically when you select the PLC Editor. The procedure of creation of a PLC drawing (program) contains
following essential steps:
Adjust the sheet to your needs. See Working with sheets (page 139) for more information.
Add PLC blocks into the sheets. See Adding PLC blocks (page 139) for more information.
Define inputs and outputs of the PLC program. See Define inputs and outputs (page 140) for more
information.
Create connections between inputs, blocks and outputs. See Creating wires (page 142) for more
information.
Adjust properties of the blocks. See List of PLC blocks (page 462) for more information about blocks.
Working with sheets

Drag the sheet edges to re-size the sheet according to your needs.
Image 5.36 Adjusting PLC sheet
Adding PLC blocks

Adding PLC block is simple and intuitive. Follow the procedure below to add PLC block.
Select required block from the list of available PLC blocks at the left and drag it into the sheet.
Double-click on the block and adjust properties of the block. See List of PLC blocks (page 462) for more
information about blocks.

Connect the block inputs and outputs by drawing wires in the sheet. See Define inputs and outputs (page
140) for more information. It is also possible to connected inputs and outputs via properties of selected PLC
block.
Image 5.37 Adding PLC blocks
Note: To delete PLC block just click on it and press delete button. Also delete selection function can be used.
Note: To see context help for selected PLC block just press F1 button.
Define inputs and outputs
Image 5.38 Blank sheet of PLC Editor
Inputs
Sheet inputs are located at the left side of a sheet. Follow the procedure below to add or edit an input.

Double-click on a free input position or existing input to add new input or edit the existing one.
Select the source for the input.
If you create a binary input, you can select a source from following categories:
Bin. values – this category contains all binary values available in the controller as binary inputs,
logical binary outputs, fixed protection states, user buttons, user protection states.
PLC outputs – this category contains all PLC blocks binary outputs available in the controller.
If you create an analog input, you can select a source from following categories:
Ana. values – this category contains all analog values available in the controller as analog inputs,
electrical values, values from ECU etc.
All setpoints – this category contains all setpoints of the controller except the dedicated PLC
setpoints. Names, resolutions and dimensions of these setpoints can not be modified.
Image 5.39 PLC inputs
Outputs
Sheet outputs are located at the right side of a sheet. Follow the procedure below to add or edit an input.
Double-click on a free output position to add new sheet output.
Double-click on an already created output to configure the output onto a controller output terminal or a logical
binary input (first of all some PLC block output has to be connected to this output to enable configuration of
output).

Image 5.40 PLC outputs
IMPORTANT: It is necessary to click on Connect button after selecting the output. Otherwise PLC
output is not connected to output.
Creating wires
Wires can be create between PLC inputs and PLC blocks and between PLC blocks and PLC outputs.
IMPORTANT: Keep the order of starting and finishing connection points. Wires between inputs and
blocks have to start from inputs. Wires between blocks and outputs have to start from blocks.
Follow the procedure below to create wire:

Locate the mouse pointer over the starting point of the wire. If the area under the mouse pointer is a
connection point, the pointer will change the color (fill of pointer will be white).
Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the wire to the destination of required connection point. If you
point over a valid connection point, the connection point will be marked with a red circle.
Release the left mouse button to create a wire between the two points. The wire is routed automatically.
Note: It is possible to make connection only between the outputs and inputs with the same type of value (binary
or analog). Binary values are marked by black pointer, analog values are marked with green pointer.
Note: To delete wire just click on it and press delete button. Also delete selection function can by used.

PLC logic execution rules
The PLC program is executed every 100 ms. The blocks are executed in order according to block numbers (item
numbers), which are indicated in each block. The block numbers are assigned automatically according to
position on sheet.
Image 5.41 PLC execution logic
IMPORTANT: Please always check that the blocks are ordered correctly, especially if you use direct
feedbacks from outputs to inputs within one sheet. Wrong order may lead to incorrect results!!!
Other functions
Consistency check
Use this function to check if all inputs and outputs of PLC block are connected.
Delete whole content of sheet

Use this function to delete the whole content of sheet (including blocks, wires, inputs, outputs, etc...).

Hints
Use this function to enable or disable quick hints for blocks (controller help is not affected by this function).
PLC monitor
PLC Monitor is a powerful tool for monitoring your PLC. Just click on PLC Monitor button on main InteliConfig
page to see you PLC. Active inputs and outputs have blue color. Also wires with active signals have blue color.
IMPORTANT: It is not possible to edit PLC in PLC Monitor tool.
5.5.21 Geo-fencing
Geo-fencing function (available with CM2-4G-GPS) is kind of protection that evaluates whether the actual GPS
location is within predefined area and based on the evaluation takes an action (sends SMS, stops engine, make
history record etc.). Function is enabled by setpoint Geo-Fencing (page 288) or by logical binary input GEO-
FENCING ENABLE (PAGE 409).
Using InteliConfig, it is possible to set two concentric geo-circles within which the unit is allowed to be located.
Each geo-circle is defined as circular geographic area with center (common for both geo-circles) named Home
Position adjusted via setpoints Home Latitude (page 289) and Home Longitude (page 289) and radius
named Fence Radius adjusted via setpoints Fence Radius 1 (page 290) and Fence Radius 2 (page 292).
Protections can be different for both circles. Protection are adjusted via setpoints Fence 1 Protection (page
290) and Fence 2 Protection (page 291).
It is also possible to see the current position of the controller in WebSupervisor map view.
5.5.22 Aftertreatment Support

Afertreatment support generally provides monitoring and control of after-treatment system installed on
generators engine. The requirements are defined as:
Providing After-Treatment status information by
Displaying universal lamps (icons)
Displaying analog and binary values
Control of After-Treatment regeneration function by
Transmitting commands to the ECU
Providing After-treatment status information

After-Treatment screen
This screen is shown with configured ECU which supports Tier 4 Final. After-Treatment screen is automatically
shown, once any of selected lamps gets active or change status. Deactivating of the lamp will not trigger
showing the screen. The screen is then shown until operator switch it to another one. Alarmlist screen has lower
priority so even new alarm appears, After-treatment screen is still displayed. To avoid displaying blank screen,
inactive lamps are represented by "dotted" icons. For no active lamp the screen shows all dotted icons. Please
see examples below:

Image 5.42 Example of active Tier 4 Final screen
Image 5.43 Example of inactive Tier 4 Final screen
Universal lamps (icons)

Universal lamp icons are shown on the After-Treatment screen. Based on specific value read in specific frame
with specific SPN is every lamp icon either:
shown
hidden
blinking slow (1 Hz)
blinking fast (2 Hz)
Note: Lamp icon blinking is defined as displaying active lamp icon and inverse colored active lamp icon in
required frequency.

Lamp name Active icon Inactive icon Alarm LBO
AHI ECU Yellow ECU YELLOW LAMP

Amber warning lamp
Lamp (page 486) (PAGE 430)
AHI ECU Red Lamp ECU RED LAMP

Red stop lamp
(page 486) (PAGE 429)
AHI ECU Wait To ECU W AIT TO

Engine wait to start lamp
Start (page 486) START (PAGE 430)
AHI ATT Filter ATT FILTER LAMP

ATT filter lamp
Exhaust system high AHI ATT HEST ATT HEST LAMP

temperature lamp Lamp (page 487) (PAGE 426)
AHI ATT SCR Error ATT SCR ERROR

SCR error lamp
Lamp (page 487) LAMP (PAGE 426)
AHI ATT DEF Level ATT DEF LEVEL

DEF low level lamp
Lamp (page 487) LAMP (PAGE 425)
AHI ATT Inhibited ATT INHIBITED LAMP

Regeneration inhibit lamp
Note: ECU Yellow Lamp, ECU Red Lamp, ECU Wait To Start Lamp can be disabled during prestart phase.
Checkbox: Ignore ECU lamps during prestart is located in InteliConfig -> Controller Configuration -> Modules ->
ECU module -> Electronic control unit settings.
Note: Aftertreatment support can be disabled. Aftertreatment HMI Screen is hidden and alarms related to
aftertreatment are not shown. Use the checkbox: Disable aftertreatment support located in InteliConfig ->
Controller Configuration -> Modules -> ECU module -> Electronic control unit settings.
Control of After-Treatment regeneration function

User can force or inhibit regeneration process by activating appropriate binary inputs of the controller. Please
see the list of binary inputs below:
ATT FORCE REGEN (PAGE 403)
ATT INHIBIT REGEN (PAGE 403)
ATT INTERLOCK (PAGE 404) (Engine of type John Deer)

5.5.23 Alternate configuration
In controller are 3 sets of configuration.
Configuration set 1 Configuration set 2 Configuration set 3

Nominal Power Split Phase 1 Nominal Power Split Phase 2 Nominal Power Split Phase 3
(page 341) (page 347) (page 353)
Nominal Power 1 (page 340) Nominal Power 2 (page 346) Nominal Power 3 (page 352)
Nominal RPM 1 (page 335) Nominal RPM 2 (page 341) Nominal RPM 3 (page 347)
Nominal Frequency 1 (page 335) Nominal Frequency 2 (page 342) Nominal Frequency 3 (page 348)
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 (page
336) 342) 348)
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 (page
336) 342) 348)
Nominal Current 1 (page 336) Nominal Current 2 (page 343) Nominal Current 3 (page 349)
Connection Type 1 (page 337) Connection type 2 (page 343) Connection type 3 (page 349)
ECU Speed Adjustment 1 (page ECU Speed Adjustment 2 (page ECU Speed Adjustment 3 (page
340) 346) 352)
Configuration sets can be changed via logical binary inputs ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 402) and ALTERNATE
CONFIG 3 (PAGE 402). Configuration set 1 is active when there is no input activated. In case that inputs
ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 402) and ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 402) are active at the same time, the
configuration set 3 is took in account.
ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 402) ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 402) Active configuration set
0 0 1
1 0 2
0 1 3
1 1 3
IMPORTANT: Alternative configuration can only be switched when the Gen-set is stopped!
5.5.24 E-Stop
Binary outputs for the control of some essential functions are internally wired as "safe", it means, that their
deactivation is directly bind with the dedicated Input E-STOP (not evaluated as the LBI in the controller). This
BO are fully configurable and are used e.g. for the Starter and Fuel control.
The emergency stop circuit must be secured.
The power supply of the associated binary outputs (BOUT1 and BOUT2) is supplied by the E-STOP input,
not by the + battery voltage.
Note: There is no difference in the way of configuration of all binary outputs. Binary outputs BO1 (Starter), BO2
(Fuel Solenoid) are intended for these functions (not dedicated).
There is a measuring of E-STOP input voltage analogically and setting the binary value (representing
emergency stop input level) based on comparison of the measured voltage to two analog levels, which are
derived from the controller supply voltage (battery voltage) perceptually.

Image 5.44 SW principle of E-STOP
If the input voltage of E-stop is higher than high comparison level (for ex. higher than 80% of the supply
voltage), then E-stop is not activated.
If the input voltage of E-stop is lower than low comparison level (for ex. lower than 60% of the supply
voltage), then E-stop is activated.
If the input voltage of E-stop is located somewhere between low and high comparison levels (for ex. between 60
and 80 %of the supply voltage, then E-stop binary value will stay on its previous state (means E-stop binary
value will not change).
Visualization on CU screen
1 – E-STOP has voltage – state is OK
0 – E-STOP has no voltage – protection is active
For more information about connection see E-Stop on page 47.
5.5.25 ECU Frequency selection

Value Ecu freq select is calculated from Nominal Frequency (page 198) setpoint. Sequence for frequency
change is executed automatically (engine must be in still condition) in following steps
1. Starting of the engine is blocked (state: Not Ready)
2. LBO: ECU Power relay is activated
3. Wait 5 s
4. LBO: Stop Pulse is set for 1 s (standard Stop Pulse duration)
5. Wait 3 s
6. Frequency selection is changed to a new value
7. Wait 2 s
8. LBO: Stop Pulse is set for 1 s (standard Stop Pulse duration)
9. Wait 2 s
10. LBO: ECU Power relay is deactivated
11. Come back from start blocking state
5.5.26 User setpoints

Controller allows user to create their own setpoints, edit and delete the created setpoints. Number of setpoints
created by user is limited to 64. All setpoints created by user are located in Group: User Setpoints. The

Comm. object number (CO) can be found via InteliConfig (Tools tab → Generate Cfg image (COM)). User
setpoints can be used to manage User protections and PLC.
Add User setpoint
Delete selected User setpoint
Edit selected User setpoint
Image 5.45 Setting parameters of an user setpoint

Contents of the user setpoint
Max. 32 characters
Name Note: Does not consider duplicities (It is possible to have setpoints with the same
name, but it is not recommended.)
Can be chosen from a list or
Dimension
User can create their own with a limit of 32 characters.
Resolution Max. 4 decimal place
Range of the data type INT32 (restricted by resolution).
Low Limit Value is set as a constant (can not be set as setpoint).
Max. value cannot exceed High Limit.
Range of the data type INT32 (restricted by resolution).
High Limit Value is set as a constant (can not be set as setpoint).
Min. value cannot be lower than Low Limit.
Default value Must be in range between Low and High Limit (restricted by resolution).
Group in which setpoint will be shown.
Group
Position of a setpoint in a list.
Subgroup Subgroup in which setpoint will be shown.
6 back to Functions
5.6 User management and data access control

Accessing, monitoring and controlling the device via any communication interface require an user to be
logged-in.
When a task (read data, write data , control) is to be performed the access level of the user who is currently
logged-in must be higher or equal to the access level required for the particular task.
User must have her/his user account defined by the administrator of the controller before she/he can log-in
into the controller and perform monitoring, control or configuration tasks.
Note: For trusted interfaces there is an "implicit user"(see Implicit account on page 151) automatically
logged in always while no other explicit user is logged in.
5.6.1 Types of interfaces

The controller communication interfaces are split into two categories according to what kind of environment the
interface is exposed.
Trusted
Trusted interfaces are operated locally inside a closed environment/ infrastructure where additional
measures against misuse or attack take place (e.g. physical access limitation). Due to nature of this
interface less strict cybersecurity rules may be applied.
Trusted interfaces provide Implicit account (page 151) function which allows to perform certain
operations without requiring an explicit user to log in.
Trusted interfaces are USB, RS232, RS485

Untrusted
General-purpose interfaces, which may be exposed to public networks, such as Internet, are untrusted.
The communication is running through networks which are not under control of the entity who operates
the controller. Thus, strict cybersecurity rules must apply for this type of interface.
Untrusted interface are ethernet and cellular module.
5.6.2 User accounts

User account must be created in the controller by administrator before the particular user can login to the
controller.
Note: User accounts must be created for each controller separately and manually. It is not possible to transfer
the accounts from one controller to another.
User account has following properties

Consists of 6-15 alphanumeric characters, must contain at least 1 letter. This is
Username
the main identifier of the particular user account.
Consists of 6-15 alphanumeric characters, must contain at least 1 letter and 1
Password digit. This is the password that is used together with user name to authenticate
(log-in).
Optional 4-digit identification string which can be used for simplified login at
User identifier (UID)
trusted interfaces (e.g. from InteliVision display when connected via Ethernet.
PIN 4-digit “password” to be used together with UID.
Access level Determines Access to controller data (page 155)
Implicit account
At trusted interfaces there is an implicit user automatically logged-in all the time while no other explicit user is
logged-in at the respective interface. This allows terminal devices (e.g. internal display) to show controller
values even without the need of specific person to be logged-in.
The implicit account is fixedly defined in the firmware.
The implicit account has fixed access level 0, unless production mode is activated (see Production mode
on page 152).
Implicit user is logged in all the time while no other user is logged in at the respective interface.
User login
To login to the controller the username and password must be provided into the login form of the
application (InteliConfig (page 12), WebSupervisor (page 12), Remote Display (page 86).
Alternatively, at trusted interfaces, it is possible to login using UID and PIN instead of username and
password. This method of login is designed to simplify the login procedure at devices without alphanumeric
keyboard (e.g. InteliVision).
Note: The controller is featured with a protection against brute force attack to user account credentials. For
details see Account break protection on page 154.

Changing password and PIN
The password and/or PIN for currently logged user can be changed. The user must be logged with username
and password even if PIN has to be changed.
Production mode
Production mode is used to simplify working with the controller while manufacturing, putting into operation or
service works.
In production mode the Implicit account (page 151) has access level adjusted to administrator level. Thus,
in production mode at trusted interfaces (like USB) the operator is allowed to preform any operation which
normally requires administrator to log in without the need of logging in.
IMPORTANT: Production mode is intended only for the manufacturing and/or service purposes
while the controller is in the respective facility and must be turned off before the controller is put
into regular operation.
There is active alarm Wrn Production Mode (page 500) in the alarm list all the time while production mode is
active. To turn off the Production mode go to User management and uncheck the checkbox Production mode or
go to Production Mode display screen and select disable.
Factory default accounts

Each controller comes from the production with one factory default administrator account having following
credentials:
Username: "administrator"
Password: <serial number of the controller>
Example: 12345678
When the controller is being configured for operation the desired user accounts including the administrator
account should be created and then the factory default account can be deleted.
IMPORTANT: Adjust the backup e-mail address before you delete the default administrator
account. This address is used as second authentication factor in password reset request and the
password reset action code will be sent to this and only this e-mail address.
Note: There must always remain at least one administrator account in the system. The controller will not allow
deleting last administrator account.
Wrn Default Password appears in alarmlist when the default administrator password is set and communication
module is plagued in the controller. The purpose of alarm is to inform that the controller might be or is connected
to the unrusted interface and cybersecurity rules are not fulfilled cause there is default administrator password.
Reset accounts to factory default

If credentials (username and/or password) for administrator account are lost, it is possible to reset all user
accounts to the factory default state. For more information see Resetting the administrator password on
page 156.
After reset procedure user accounts are in factory default state.
Wrn Default Password appears in alarmlist when the default administrator password is set and communication
module is plagued in the controller. The purpose of alarm is to inform that the controller might be or is connected
to the untrusted interface and cybersecurity rules are not fulfilled cause there is default administrator password.

5.6.3 Managing accounts
User accounts can be managed from InteliConfig while an online connection to the controller is established. An
user with administrator level must be logged with username/password and is prompted to re-enter accounts
password before the user management dialog is opened.
IMPORTANT: The total available number of accounts in the controller is 5.
Adding account
Click on "+" button in the lower left corner of the user management window, then provide the account properties
as described in User accounts (page 151).
Note: Rules for the User accounts (page 151) credentials apply and some items are optional
Deleting account
Select the account that has to be deleted and click on "-" button in the lower left part of the user management
window.
Note: You can not delete your own administrator account unless there is another administrator account present
in the controller.

Deleting account properties
Select the account that has to be deleted and click on "-" button in the lower left part of the user management
window. Then modify the desired property or properties. You can modify one or more properties at once.
Note: It is not possible to change user name or UID. Instead of this create a new account with the required
changes and delete the original one.
5.6.4 Account break protection

The controller is protecting the user accounts against breaking by a brute-force attack, i.e against breaking into
the controller by fast repeating attempts to login with credentials generated from the range of all possible
combinations.
If the account break protection detects a possible attack and blocks an account or interface the alarm Wrn
Brute Force Protection Active (page 500) is activated. The alarm can be used to send an active message
(e.g. e-mail) to inform about that situation The detailed behavior of the controller depends on situation.
Password protection
1. If an user performs five consecutive attempts to login using username/password, providing correct
username but incorrect password, the respective user account is blocked for a time period of 1 minute. The
attempts count regardless of the interface from which it is performed.
2. During the blocking period it is not possible to login with the respective account (username) from any
interface even if correct password is provided.
3. After the blocking period elapsed next attempt to login with the respective account (username) is possible. If
this attempt fails again the account is blocked again, now for period of 2 minutes.
4. The points 1-3 repeats further, the blocking period is multiplied by 2 in each next cycle. However, the
maximal blocking time is 20 minutes, the blocking time is never higher.
PIN protection
If an user performs ten consecutive attempts to login using UID/PIN, providing correct UID but incorrect
PIN, the user account is permanently blocked for login using UID/PIN. The user must login with
username/password and change the PIN to unblock this login method again.

Interface protection
If anyone performs twenty consecutive attempts to login via one particular interface and does not neither
provide a valid username nor a valid uid the respective interface is blocked for 2 minutes.
During this period it is not possible to use that interface for any login. The blocking period is not progressive in
this case.
5.6.5 Access to controller data

Every request for reading data from the controller or writing data into it requires an user to be logged and that
user must have access level higher or equal to the access level defined for the particular object and
operation.
There are 4 access levels available (level 0 to level 3). The level 3 is administrator level and users who have
this level have full control over the controller.
Reading data
The access level required for reading data from controller is fixedly adjusted to 0. That means reading of data
(except some system objects) is available for any user.
Writing data
The access level required to write (modify) application setpoints or invoke application commands is
configurable via InteliConfig.
Special situations
There are several operations that require administrator level:
Programming firmware
Programming configuration
Managing user accounts
5.6.6 Cybernetic security

The cybernetic security is formed by:
Protection against a brute-force attack to the password
Secure method to reset the password
A new technology of encryption of the remote communication
Web interface can be disabled
Note: Cybernetic security was designed according to ISA 62443, level 2.
Protection against the brute force attack

Protection against the brute force will take a place when an invalid password is entered repeatedly.
If the invalid password is entered 5 times, the controller gets blocked for entering password for a while.
Each further entering of the invalid password cause the consequent blocking time is increased.
If the invalid password is entered repeatedly the controller gets blocked for entering the password
permanently and the password must be reset to a default value as described below.
Note: Blocking of the controller for entering the password have no influence to controller / Gen-setoperation

Note: Permanent blocking cannot occur accidentally, just by user mistake. It can be practically triggered only
by a focused activity.
Resetting the administrator password

If the administrator password is lost or controller is permanently locked due to brute-force attack
protection, proceed according to a procedure described below:
IMPORTANT: There is a backup e-mail address defined in the controller to which and only which
ComAp will send the "password reset action code". Please be sure, that you have adjusted this e-
mail address correctly. Use InteliConfig to adjust the backup e-mail address

Reset password procedure
1. Connect InteliConfig.
2. Get the password reset request code and send it via e-mail to support@comap-control.com

3. Once you receive the reply from ComAp, copy the code from the e-mail (all characters inside the box as
indicated below)

4. Paste the code into the password reset window
Encryption of the communication

New technology "CCS v.1" is used for an authentication and an encryption of the ComAp protocol via
Internet/ethernet/AirGate. This technology is based on strong and proven cryptographic algorithms and has
passed successfully penetration tests and cybersecurity audit.

6 Communication
6.1 PC 160
6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 166
6.1 PC
6.1.1 Direct communication 160
6.1.2 Remote communication 161
6.1.1 Direct communication

A RS232, USB, RS485 or ethernet interface can be used for direct cable connection to a PC.
Connection via RS232

A plug-in communication module CM-RS232-485 is necessary for communication via RS232 connection.
The module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. To find more information about
installation of the modules see Plug-in module installation on page 53.
RS232 interface uses COM1 Mode (page 293) port of the controller. Use a cross-wired serial communication
cable with DB9 female connectors and signals Rx, Tx, GND.
Note: Also USB-RS232 convertor can be used.
Image 6.1 Cross-wired RS232 cable is used
Image 6.2 Cross-wired RS232 cable and USB is used
Connection via RS485

Plug-in module CM-RS232-485 or on board RS485 connector can be used for communication via RS485
connection.
A plug-in communication module CM-RS232-485 is necessary for communication via RS485 connection.
RS485 interface uses COM2 Mode (page 294) port of the controller.

Note: Also USB-RS485 convertor can be used.
Image 6.3 Plug-in module CM RS232-485 is used
Connection via Ethernet

A plug-in communication module CM3-Ethernet is necessary for Ethernet connection.
This connection type is used for communication with the controller from InteliConfig or any other PC tool. This
connection can be used regardless of AirGate is switched on or off. Only three remote clients can be connected
at the same time (via AirGate only two remote clients at the same time). Eight remote clients can be connected
at the same time (six direct IP clients and two AirGate clients).
To connect your PC tool to the controller use the INTERNET connection type and just put the CM3-Ethernet IP
address into the Gen-set address box in the PC tool.
Image 6.4 Ethernet cable is used
Connection via USB

USB interface uses HID profile.
Image 6.5 Shielded USB type A cable is used
6.1.2 Remote communication

IMPORTANT: Factory default password is "0". It is highly recommended to change this parameter.
Ethernet LAN connection

Direct IP LAN connection is intended to be used if the CM3-Ethernet module is reachable from the client
computer by specifying the IP address at which the module can be contacted.

If direct IP connection is to be used within a local network the CM3-Ethernet must have static IP address in
the respective local network.
Note: If you have troubles with setting up static and public IP address for direct connection from Internet try
using AirGate connection instead.
Image 6.6 Ethernet LAN connection
Setting-up static IP address

There are two basic ways to get the static IP address.
First way is to switch the CM3-Ethernet to manual IP address mode. Adjust the setpoint IP Address Mode
(page 314) to FIXED. In that case all setpoints of IP settings (IP Address (page 315), Subnet Mask (page
315), Gateway IP (page 316), DNS IP Address 1 (page 317)) have to be adjusted manually. If this method is
used several basic rules should be kept to avoid conflicts with the remaining network infrastructure:
The static IP used in the controller must be selected in accordance with the local network in which CM-
Ethernet is connected.
The static IP used in the controller must be excluded from the pool of addresses which is assigned by
DHCP server, which is in charge of the respective local network.
The local infrastructure must generally allow using devices with manually assigned IP addresses.
There must not be any other device using the same static IP address. This can be tested from a computer
connected to the same network using "ping <required_ip_address>" command issued from the command
line. The IP address is not occupied if there is not any response to the ping command.
Note: The list above contains only basic rules. Other specific restrictions/rules may take place depending on
the local network security policy, technology used, topology etc.
Next way is to switch the CM3-Ethernet to automatic IP address mode. Adjust the setpoint IP Address Mode
(page 314) to AUTOMATIC. In that case all IP settings are assigned by DHCP server. Then configure the
DHCP server to assign always the same IP address (i.e. static IP address) to the particular CM3-Ethernet
according to it's MAC address.
Internet connection
Public static IP
If public static IP connection is to be used from the Internet, the IP address, which is entered into the client
computer, must be static and public in scope of the Internet.

If CM3-Ethernet is connected to Internet via a local Ethernet network then in most cases port forwarding
must be created from the public IP address of the network gateway to the local IP address of CM3-
Ethernet at the port specified for ComAp protocol. Different port numbers can be used to create multiple
port forwarding rules in the same local network.
AirGate
This connection type is intended for remote connection from InteliConfig, or any other ComAp PC tool over the
Internet in situations, where obtaining fixed public IP address is not possible. Only two remote clients can be
connected at the same time.
This connection type is active if AirGate connection is enabled. Setpoint AirGate Address (page 301) must
contain AirGate server address. It can be entered in text form as well as numeric form. There is a public AirGate
server available at address "global.airgate.link".
Once the controller is attached to the Internet and the AirGate server address is properly adjusted then the
controller registers automatically to the server and an identification string AirGate ID is given to a controller,
which is visible at the controller screen.
In order to connect to InteliConfig following information have to be filled out:
AirGate ID
AirGate server
Controller address
User name and Password
AirGate Key
AirGate Key.
SMS
Event SMS
The InteliLite 4 controller equipped with the CM2-4G-GPS communication module is able to send Event SMS
according to the setting of setpoint:
Event Message (page 329)
Note: Setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 309) has to be adjusted to enable this function.

The following events can be received by mobile phone:
Engine Start/Stop
Manual Start/Stop
Remote Start/Stop
AMF Start/Stop (as Automatic Mains Failure Start/Stop)
Test Start/Stop Gen-set
Mains Fail
Mains Returned
Load on Mains
Load on Gen-set
Test On Load
Message structure:
Gen-set Name (hh:mm:ss dd.mm.yyyy)
hh:mm:ss Mains Fail
hh:mm:ss AMF Start
hh:mm:ss Load on Gen-set
hh:mm:ss Mains Returned
hh:mm:ss Load on Mains
hh:mm:ss AMF Stop
Alarm SMS
The InteliLite 4 controller equipped with the CM2-4G-GPS communication module is able to send Alarm SMS
according to the setting of setpoints:
Wrn Message (page 330)
Sd Messages (page 329)
BOC Message (page 328)
Note: Firstly setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 309) has to be adjusted.
Message structure:
Gen-set Name
AL=(Alarm 1, Alarm 2, Alarm x)
Note: Asterisk means that alarm is unconfirmed and exclamation mark means that alarm is active.

Emails
Event Email
The InteliLite 4 controller equipped with the CM3-Ethernet communication module is able to send Event Email
according to the setting of setpoint:
Event Message (page 329)
Note: Firstly setpoints Email Address 1 (page 326) and SMTP Sender Address (page 324) or SMTP
Server Address (page 324) have to be adjusted.
Note: Summer Time Mode (page 272) and Time Zone (page 331) have to be adjusted for correct time in
emails.
Message structure:
Controller
-----------------------------------------------
Name: XXX
Serial number: XXX
SW branch: XXX
SW version: XXX
Application: XXX
Appl. version: XXX
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
Time: hh:mm:ss
Alarm list
-----------------------------------------------
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Events
-----------------------------------------------
hh:mm:ss Event 1
hh:mm:ss Event 2
hh:mm:ss Event 3

Alarm Email
The InteliLite 4 controller equipped with the CM3-Ethernet communication module is able to send Alarm Emails
according to the setting of setpoints:
Wrn Message (page 330)
Sd Messages (page 329)
BOC Message (page 328)
Note: Firstly setpoints Email Address 1 (page 326) and SMTP Sender Address (page 324) or SMTP
Server Address (page 324) have to be adjusted.
Note: Summer Time Mode (page 272) and Time Zone (page 331) have to be adjusted for correct time in
emails.
Message structure:
Controller
-----------------------------------------------
Name: XXX
Serial number: XXX
SW branch: XXX
SW version: XXX
Application: XXX
Appl. version: XXX
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
Time: hh:mm:ss
Alarm list
-----------------------------------------------
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
History events
-----------------------------------------------
0 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 1
-1 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 2
-2 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 3
Note: Asterisk means that alarm is unconfirmed and exclamation mark means that alarm is active.
6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems

6.2.1 SNMP 167
6.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP 168
6 back to Communication

6.2.1 SNMP
SNMP is an UDP-based client-server protocol used for providing data and events into a supervisory system
(building management system). The controller plays the role of a "SNMP Agent" while the supervisory system
plays the role of a "SNMP Manager".
CM3-Ethernet module is required for SNMP function
Supported versions – SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c
The SNMP Agent function is to be enabled by the setpoint SNMP Agent (page 321) in the CM-Ethernet
setpoint group. The setpoints SNMP RD Community String (page 323) and SNMP WR Community String
(page 323) in the same group can be used to customize the "community strings" for the read and write
operations which have function like "passwords". All requests sent from the SNMP Manager have to contain
community string which match with the community string adjusted in the controller otherwise the controller
refuses the operation.
MIB table
The "MIB table" (Management Information Base) is a table which gives to the Manager description of all objects
provided by the Agent.
The MIB table is specific for each controller type and configuration
The MIB table is to be exported from the controller configuration using InteliConfig
Controllers with identical firmware and configuration share also identical MIB table, however if the
configuration and/or firmware is not identical the MIB table is different and must be exported separately for
each controller.
The root OID of InteliLite 4 controller is 1.3.6.1.4.1.28634.29. Under this node there are following sub-nodes :
Notifications group (SMI v2 only) contains definitions of all notification-type objects that the Agent may send
to the Manager.
GroupRdFix contains read-only objects that exist in all controller regardless of the firmware version/type and
configuration.
GroupRdCfg contains read-only objects that depend on the firmware version/type and configuration.
GroupWrFix contains read-write objects that exist in all controller regardless of the firmware version/type
and configuration.
GroupWrCfg contains read-write objects that depend on the firmware version/type and configuration.
GroupW contains write-only objects.
NotificationData group contains objects that are accessible only as bindings of the notification messages.
SMI version
In InteliConfig the MIB table may be exported in two different formats – SMI v1 and SMI v2. The format which
shall be used for export depends on the SNMP Manager and SMI version that it does support.
Typically, SMI v1 is used for SNMP v1 and vice versa, but it is not a rule and SMI v2 may be also used for
SNMP v1.
SNMP notifications
Except the request-response communication model, in which the communication is controlled by the Manager,
there are also messages that the Agent sends without any requests. These messages are called "Notifications"
and inform the Manager about significant events occurred in the Agent.

The controller can send notifications to two different SNMP Managers (two different IP addresses). The
addresses are to be adjusted in the CM-Ethernet setpoint group by the setpoints SNMP Traps IP Address 1
(page 322) and SNMP Traps IP Address 2 (page 322). If the Manager address is not adjusted the particular
notification channel is off. The controller will send the notifications in format adjusted by the setpoint SNMP
Trap Format.
Each notification (kind of event) is identified by an unique identifier (Trap ID in SNMPv1 or Notification OID
in SNMPv2). This unique identifier gives the specific meaning to the notification message, e.g. Protection 1.
level – Fuel Level – alarm activated.
All possible notifications and their identifiers are listed in the MIB table.
The notification message also contains controller name, serial number and textual description of the event.
SMI version
In InteliConfig the MIB table may be exported in two different formats – SMI v1 and SMI v2. The format which
shall be used for export depends on the SNMP Manager and SMI version that it does support. Typically, SMI v1
is used for SNMP v1 and vice versa, but it is not a rule and SMI v2 may be also used for SNMP v1.
SNMP reserved objects
Name OID Access Data type Meaning

Writing: command argument
pfActionArgument groupWrFix.24550 read,write Gauge32
Reading: command return value
pfActionCommand groupW.24551 write Integer32 Command code *)
pfPassword groupW.24524 write Integer32 Password
Note: *)
For list of commands, arguments and description of the procedure of invoking commands see the description of
the Modbus protocol.
6.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP

MODBUS protocol is used for integration of the controller into a building management system or for remote
monitoring via 3rd party monitoring tools.
MODBUS-RTU can be used on serial interfaces (via on board RS485 connector or via CM-RS232-485
communication module). The MODBUS-RTU server must be activated by switching the setpoint COM1
Mode (page 293) or COM2 Mode (page 294) into the Modbus position. The serial speed for MODBUS-
RTU communication is to be adjusted by the setpoint COM1 MODBUS Communication Speed (page
294) or COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed (page 295).
MODBUS/TCP can be used on the Ethernet interface (CM3-Ethernet module is required). Up to 2 clients
can be connected simultaneously. The MODBUS/TCP server must be activated by the setpoint MODBUS
Server (page 321).
MODBUS, MODBUS/TCP protocol can be used simultaneously with Web connection and direct Ethernet /
AirGate connection.

IMPORTANT: Do not write setpoint repeatedly (e.g. power control form a PLC repeated writing of
baseload setpoint via Modbus). The setpoints are stored in EEPROM memory. which can be
5
overwritten up to 10 times without risk of damage or data loss, but may become damaged, when
the allowed number of writing cycles is exceeded!
Note: Modbus-RTU serial communication mode is 8-N-1 – startbit 1, 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stopbit.
Address space
The object address space is separated into several areas as described in the table below. The actual mapping of
specific controller data objects to specific Modbus addresses, which depends on configuration, can be exported
into a text file from the appropriate controller archive using InteliConfig. There are several special registers with
fixed meaning (reserved registers) which are listed in a separate table in this chapter.
MODBUS MODICON object

Meaning Access MODBUS function
address type
0000 .. 0999 Binary objects Read only Discrete Inputs Read: 01, 02
1000 .. 2999 Values Read only Input Registers Read: 03, 04
Read: 03, 04
3000 .. 3999 Setpoints Read/Write Holding Registers
Write: 06, 16
Reserved Read/Write, depends on Input Registers Read: 03, 04
4200 .. 7167
registers each specific register Holding Registers Write: 06, 16
Mapping data types to registers

As there are multiple data types in the controller but only one data type in MODBUS (the register, which is 2
byte long), a mapping table is necessary to compose and decompose the MODBUS messages correctly.
Number of
Data type Meaning Data maping
registers
MSB = sign extension
Integer8 1-byte signed integer 1
LSB = value
MSB = 0
Unsigned8 1-byte unsigned integer 1
LSB = value
MSB = value, MSB
LSB = value, LSB
MSB = value, MSB
LSB = value, LSB
MSB1 = value, byte 3 (MSB)
LSB1 = value, byte 2
MSB2 = value, byte 1
LSB2 = value, byte 0 (LSB)
MSB1 = value, byte 3 (MSB)
LSB1 = value, byte 2

Number of
registers
MSB2 = value, byte 1
LSB2 = value, byte 0 (LSB)
MSB = 0
Binary8 8-bit binary value 1
LSB = value, bits 0-7
MSB = value, bits 8-15
LSB = value, bits 0-7
MSB1 = value, bits 24-31
LSB1 = value, bits 16-23
MSB2 = value, bits 8-15
LSB2 = value, bits 0-7
MSB = 0
Char 1-byte ASCII character 1
LSB = ASCII value of the character
MSB = 0
StrList Index into a list of strings 1
LSB = index into the list
MSB1 = ASCII value of the 1. character
LSB1 = ASCII value of the 2. character
Zero-terminated string of
ShortStr 8 MSB2 = ASCII value of the 3. character
max 15 ASCII characters.
…
MSB1 = ASCII value of the 1. character
Zero-terminated string of
LongStr 16 MSB2 = ASCII value of the 3. character
max 31 ASCII characters.
…

Number of
registers
MSB1 = BCD (dd)
LSB1 = BCD (mm)
Date Date (dd-mm-yy) 2
MSB2 = BCD (yy)
LSB2 = 0
MSB1 = BCD (hh)
LSB1 = BCD (mm)
Time Time (hh-mm-ss) 2
MSB2 = BCD (ss)
LSB2 = 0
MSB1 = reserved for future use
LSB1 = reserved for future use
MSB2 = Alarm level *)
LSB2 = Alarm status **)
Alarm An item of the Alarmlist 27 MSB3 = alarm string ***)
LSB3 = alarm string
MSB4 = alarm string
LSB5 = alarm string
…
Note:
*) 1 .. level 1 (yellow), 2 .. level 2 (red), 3 .. sensor fail
**) Bit0 – alarm is active, Bit1 – alarm is confirmed
***) String encoding is UTF-8
Error codes (exception codes)

Exception code is returned by the controller (server) if the query sent from the client could not be completed
successfully.
The controller responds with the error codes in as follows:
01 – Ilegal function is returned if an incompatible type of operation is applied for a specific object, e.g. if
function 03 is applied to a binary object.
02 – illegal address is returned if the client tries to perform an operation with a object address that is not
related to any existing object or that is located inside an object which is composed by multiple addresses
(registers).
04 – device error is returned in all other errorneous situations. More detailed specification of the problem can
be consequently obtained by reading the registers 4205 – 4206.
Reserved registers
There are several registers with specific meaning. These registers are available in all controllers regardless of
the configuration.

Register Number of
Access Data type Meaning
addresses registers
4200 - 4201 2 read/write Time RTC Time in BCD code
4202 - 4203 2 read/write Date RTC Date in BCD code
Index of the language that is used for text
4204 1 read/write Unsigned8 data provided by MODBUS (e.g.
alarmlist messages).
Last application error. To be read after
the device returns the exception code 04.
4205 - 4206 2 read Unsigned32
It contains specific information about the
error.
Writing:command argument
4207 - 4208 2 read/write Unsigned32
4209 1 write Unsigned16 Command code
4010 1 - - Not implemented
4211 1 write Unsigned16 Password
4212 - 4213 2 read Unsigned32 Communication status
4214 1 read Unsigned8 Number of items in the Alarmlist
4215 - 4241 27 read Alarm 1. record in alarm list
List of commands and arguments

"Commands" are used to invoke a specific action in the controller via the communication channel. The list of
available actions is in the table below. The general procedure of writing a command via Modbus is as follows:
1. Write the command argument into the registers 44208-44209 (register addresses 4207-4208). Use function
16.
2. Write the command code into the register 44210 (register address 4209). Use function 6.

3. (Optional) Read the command return value from the registers 44208-44209 (register addresses 4207-4208).
Use function 3.
4. If the command was executed the return value is as listed in the table. If the command was accepted but
there was an error during execution the return value indicates the reason:
a. 0x00000001 – invalid argument
b. 0x00000002 – command refused (e.g. controller not in MAN, breaker can not be closed in the specific
situation etc.)
Action Command code Argument Return value

Engine start *) 0x01 0x01FE0000 0x000001FF
Engine stop *) 0x01 0x02FD0000 0x000002FE
Fault reset *) 0x01 0x08F70000 0x000008F8
Horn reset *) 0x01 0x04FB0000 0x000004FC
GCB toggle *) 0x02 0x11EE0000 0x000011EF
GCB on 0x02 0x11EF0000 0x000011F0
GCB off 0x02 0x11F00000 0x000011F1
MCB toggle *) 0x02 0x12ED0000 0x000012EE
MCB on 0x02 0x12EE0000 0x000012EF
MCB off 0x02 0x12EF0000 0x000012F0
Note: *)
This action is an equivalent of pressing the front panel button

MODBUS examples
Modbus RTU examples
Reading of Battery voltage
Export table of values from InteliConfig
Table: Values
Allowed Modbus functions: 03, 04
Register
Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
(s)
Controller
01053 8213 BatteryVoltage V Integer 2 1 0 400
I/O
Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 1D 00 01 15 3C
Register address
Controller address Modbus function 041Dhex = Number of registers CRC
1053dec
Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 F0 B8 00
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function 02hex = 2 bytes 00F0hex = CRC
read 240dec
We read value 240 from register 01053. From table of Modbus registers we get dimension of read value and
"Dec". Dec=1 means shift one decimal place to the right. So battery voltage is 24.0 V.

Reading Nominal power
Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register
(s)
Nominal
01228 9018 kW Integer 2 0 0 32767 Generator
Power

01 03 04 CC 00 01 45 05
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
04CChex = 1228dec

01 03 02 00 C8 B9 D2
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function 02hex = 2 bytes 00C8hex = CRC
read 200dec
Read nominal power is 200 kW.

Reading all binary inputs as Modbus register
Table: Values
Register
(s)
Binary Controller
01068 8235 Binary#2 2 0 - -
Inputs I/O

01 03 04 2C 00 01 44 F3
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
042Chex = 1068dec

01 03 02 00 12 38 49
Data
Length of data
Controller address Modbus function 0012hex = CRC
02hex = 2 bytes read
00010010bin
Binary inputs is 00010010. It means Binary input 2 and binary input 5 are active.
Note: You can use Modbus function 4 instead of 3, rest of data remain same (CRC differs).

Reading binary inputs as coil status.
Table: Binaries
Addresses Source Bit Name
C.O.# Name of Value
Modbus Addr. = Value Bit # Activated by protection Group
State # Name of State
Prot. Addr. = State (s):
00000 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 1 GCB Feedback Controller I/O
00001 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 2 MCB Feedback Controller I/O
00002 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 3 Emergency Stop Controller I/O
We will read state of MCB Feedback binary input.

01 01 00 01 00 01 AC 0A
Register address
Controller address Modbus function 0001hex = Number of registers CRC
0001dec

01 01 01 01 90 48
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
01hex = 1 byte read 01hex = active
The read data is 01, it means this binary input is active.

Note: You can use Modbus function 2 instead of 1, rest of data remains same (CRC differs).

Starting the engine
Before starting engine you may need to write password. Depends on your settings in controller.
Table Reserved registers (page 171)
Number of
Register addresses Access Data type Meaning
registers
Writing:command argument
4207 - 4208 2 read/write Unsigned32
4209 1 write Unsigned16 Command code
Table List of commands and arguments (page 172)
Action Command code Argument Return value

Engine start 0x01 0x01FE0000 0x000001FF
Engine stop 0x01 0x02FD0000 0x000002FE
Request 1/2: (Numbers in Hex)

01 10 10 6F 00 03 06
Modbus function Register address
Controller address Number of registers Data length in bytes
10hex = 16dec 106Fhex = 4207dec
Request 2/2: (Numbers in Hex)

01 FE 00 00 00 01 68 0B
Argument Command code CRC
Note: Command and argument may be written as one "packet" (function 16) or you can split it and write
argument (function 16) and after that write command code (function 6).

Nominal Power – writing
Table: Setpoints
Allowed Modbus functions: 03, 04, 06, 16
Register
(s)
Nominal Basic
03008 8276 kW Unsigned 2 0 1 5000
Power Settings

01 06 0B C0 00 64 8A 39
Register address Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
0BC0hex = 3008dec 0064hex = 100dec

01 06 0B C0 00 00 8B D2
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Allways zero CRC
0BC0hex = 3008dec
Writen setpoint nominal power is 100 kW.

CRC calculation
The check field allows the receiver to check the validity of the message. The check field value is the Cyclical
16 15 2
Redundancy Check (CRC) based on the polynomial x +x +x +1. CRC is counted from all message bytes
preceding the check field.
Online CRC calculator: http://www.lammertbies.nl/comm/info/crc-calculation.html Use CRC-16 (Modbus)
Write LSB first.
For writing nominal power 100 kW the CRC is calculated from this data: 01060BC00064hex

Modbus TCP examples
Reading of Battery voltage
Table: Values
Register
(s)
Controller
01053 8213 BatteryVoltage V Integer 2 1 0 400
I/O

00 00 00 00 00 06 01 03 04 1D 00 01
Register
transaction protocol Length of
Controller Modbus address Number of
identifier identifier data bytes
address function 041Dhex = registers
(usually 0) (usually 0) following
1053dec

00 00 00 00 00 05 01 03 02 00 F0
transaction protocol Length of Length of data Data
Controller Modbus
identifier identifier data bytes 02hex = 2 00F0hex =
address function
(usually 0) (usually 0) following bytes read 240dec
We read value 240 from register 01053. From table of Modbus registers we get dimension of read value and
"Dec". Dec=1 means shift one decimal place to the right. So battery voltage is 24.0 V.
6 back to Communication

7 Technical data
Power supply E-Stop
Power supply range 8-36 VDC Dedicated terminal for safe E-Stop input.
Power consumption Physical supply for binary outputs 1 & 2.

2.5 W
(without modules) Binary inputs
RTC battery Replaceable (3 V)
Number 8
Fusing power 4 A w/o BOUT consumption
0-2 VDC close contact
10 A Close/Open indication
E-Stop fusing 6-36 VDC open contact
Max. Power Dissipation 7W
Binary outputs
Operating conditions Number 8
Protection degree (front Max. current BO1,2 = 5 A; BO3-8 = 0.5 A
IP 65
panel)
Switching to positive supply terminal
Operating temperature -20 ˚C to +70 ˚C
-30 ˚C to +80 ˚C
Analog inputs
Storage temperature
95 % non-condensing Number 3, switchable (R/U/I)
Operating humidity
(EN 60068-2-30) Range R = 0-2500 Ω; U = 0-10 V; I = 0-20 mA
5-25 Hz, ± 1.6 mm R: ±2 % from value ±5 Ω in range 0-250 Ω
Vibration
25-100 Hz, a = 4 g R: ±4 % from value in range 250 Ω-2500 Ω
Accuracy
Shocks a = 500 m/s2 U: 1 % from value ±100 mV
Surrounding air temperature rating 70 °C I: 1 % from value ±0.2 mA

Suitable for pollution degree 2
+5 V Power supply output
D+ Max. current 45 mA
Max. output current 250 mA
Magnetic pickup
Charging fail threshold Adjustable
4 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in range 4 Hz to 1
Voltage measurement kHz
Voltage input
Measurement inputs 3ph-n Gen voltage , 3ph-n Mains 6 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in range 1 to 5 kHz
range
10-277 V AC / 10-480 V AC (EU) 10 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in range 5 to 10
kHz
Measurement range 10-346 V AC / 10-600 V AC
(US/Canada) Frequency
4 Hz to 10 kHz
input range
Linear measurement 350 V AC Ph-N
and protection range 660 V AC Ph-Ph Frequency
measurement 0.2 % from measured value
Accuracy 1%
tolerance
Frequency range 30-70 Hz (accuracy 0.1 Hz)
Input impedance 0.72 MΩ ph-ph , 0.36 MΩ ph-n 6 back to Table of contents
Display
Type Build-in monochromatic 3.2"
Resolution 132 × 64 px
Communications
USB Device Non-isolated type B connector
Non-isolated, 250 / 50 kbps,
CAN 1
Terminator impedance 120 Ω
Current measurement
Measurement inputs 3ph Gen current
Measurement range 5A
Max. allowed current 10 A
Accuracy ±20 mA for 0-2 A; 1 % of value for 2-5 A
Input impedance <0.1 Ω

8 Appendix
8.1 Controller objects 182
8.2 Alarms 475
8.3 Modules 530
8.1 Controller objects

8.1.1 List of controller objects types
8.1.2 Setpoints 182
8.1.3 Values 353
8.1.4 Logical binary inputs 400
8.1.5 Logical binary outputs 419
8.1.6 Logical analog inputs 457
8.1.7 PLC 462
8.1.2 Setpoints
What setpoints are:
Setpoints are analog, binary or special data objects which are used for adjusting the controller to the specific
environment. Setpoints are organized into groups according to their meaning. Setpoints can be adjusted from
the controller front panel, PC, MODBUS, etc.
All setpoints can be protected by a password against unauthorized changes. Password protection can be
assigned to the setpoints during the configuration procedure.
IMPORTANT: Do not write setpoints repeatedly (e.g. power control from a PLC by repeated writing
of baseload setpoint via Modbus). The setpoints are stored in EEPROM memory, which can be
5
overwritten up to 10 times without risk of damage or data loss, but it may become damaged, when
the allowed number of writing cycles is exceeded.
For full list of setpoints go to the chapter List of setpoints (page 183).

List of setpoints
Group: Basic settings 189 Screen Filter 205

Subgroup: Name 189 Group: Communication Settings 205
Gen-Set Name 189 Subgroup: Controller Address 205
Subgroup: Power settings 189 Controller Address 205
Nominal Power 189 Group: Engine settings 206
Nominal Power Split Phase 190 Subgroup: Starting 206
Subgroup: Current settings 190 Fuel Solenoid 206
Nominal Current 190 Cranking Attempts 206
CT Ratio 191 Maximum Cranking Time 207
CT Location 191 Cranking Fail Pause 207
Subgroup: Voltage settings 192 Prestart Time 208
Connection type 192 Starting RPM 208
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 195 Starting Oil Pressure 209
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 195 Glow Plugs Time 209
Nominal Voltage 3Ph Low Y 196 Idle RPM 209
Nominal Voltage 3Ph High Y 196 Subgroup: Choke 210
Nominal Voltage High Leg D 196 Choke Function 210
Nominal Voltage SplitPhase 197 Choke Time 210
Nominal Voltage MonoPhase 197 Choke Start Temp 211
Gen VT Ratio 197 Choke Increment 212
Mains VT Ratio 198 Choke Voltage 213
Subgroup: Frequency settings 198 Choke Lead 214
Nominal Frequency 198 Subgroup: Starting Timers 215
Gear Teeth 199 Fuel Solenoid Lead 215
Nominal RPM 199 Idle Time 215
Subgroup: Controller settings 200 Minimal Stabilization Time 217
Controller Mode 200 Maximal Stabilization Time 218
Power On Mode 200 Run Only Block Delay 218
Default Application Select 201 Subgroup: Stopping 219
GCB Control Mode 201 Cooling Speed 219
Reset To Manual 202 Subgroup: Stopping Timers 219
Backlight Timeout 203 Cooling Time 219
Horn Timeout 203 Stop Time 219
Zero Power Mode 204 After Cooling Time 221
Run Hours Source 204 Subgroup: D+ Function 221
Subgroup: HMI Settings 205 D+ Function 221
D+ Threshold 223

D+ Delay 223 Overload BOC 237
D+ Alarm Type 223 Overload Wrn 237
Subgroup: Engine Protections 224 Overload Delay 237
Overspeed Sd 224 Subgroup: Current Protection 238
Starting Overspeed Sd 224 Short Circuit BOC 238
Starting Overspeed Time 225 Short Circuit BOC Delay 238
Starting Overspeed Protection 226 IDMT Overcurrent Delay 238
Underspeed Sd 226 Current Unbalance BOC 240
Subgroup: Fuel Theft Protection 227 Current Unbalance BOC Delay 240
Fuel Tank Volume 227 Subgroup: Voltage Protection 240
Maximal Fuel Drop 227 Generator Overvoltage Sd 240
Maximal Fuel Drop Delay 227 Generator Overvoltage Wrn 241
Subgroup: Fuel Pump 228 Generator Undervoltage Wrn 241
Fuel Pump On 228 Generator Undervoltage BOC 242
Fuel Pump Off 229 Generator <> Voltage Delay 242
Transfer Wrn Delay 230 Voltage Unbalance BOC 242
Subgroup: Battery Protections 230 Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay 243
Battery Undervoltage 230 Subgroup: Frequency Protection 243
Battery Overvoltage 230 Generator Overfrequency BOC 243
Battery <> Voltage Delay 231 Generator Overfrequency Wrn 243
Subgroup: Ventilation 231 Generator Underfrequency Wrn 244
Ventilation Pulse Time 231 Generator Underfrequency BOC 244
Subgroup: ECU Settings 232 Generator <> Frequency Delay 244
ECU Speed Adjustment 232 Subgroup: Reverse Power Protection 245
Group: Maintenance Timers 232 Reverse Power Level 245
Subgroup: Maintenance Timer 1 232 Reverse Power Delay 245
Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours 232 Group: Protections 246
Maintenance Timer 1 Interval 233 Subgroup: Reverse Power Protection 246
Maintenance Timer 1 Protection 233 Reverse Power Protection 246
Subgroup: Maintenance Timer 2 234 Group: Mains Settings 247
Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours 234 Subgroup: AMF Timers 247
Maintenance Timer 2 Interval 234 Emergency Start Delay 247
Maintenance Timer 2 Protection 235 Mains Return Delay 247
Subgroup: Maintenance Timer 3 235 MCB Close Delay 248
Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours 235 Transfer Delay 248
Maintenance Timer 3 Interval 236 Subgroup: Mains Voltage Limits 250
Maintenance Timer 3 Protection 236 Mains Overvoltage 250
Group: Generator settings 237 Mains Overvoltage Hys 251

Subgroup: Overload Protection 237 Mains Undervoltage 252

Mains Undervoltage Hys 253 Time 270
Mains <> Voltage Delay 253 Date 271
Mains Voltage Unbalance 254 Time Stamp Period 271
Mains Voltage Unbalance Delay 254 Summer Time Mode 272
Subgroup: Mains Frequency Limits 254 Subgroup: Timer 1 273
Mains Overfrequency 254 Timer 1 Function 273
Mains Overfrequency Hys 255 Timer 1 Setup 274
Mains Underfrequency 255 Timer 1 First Occur. Date 274
Mains Underfrequency Hys 256 Timer 1 First Occur. Time 275
Mains < > Frequency Delay 256 Timer 1 Duration 275
Subgroup: AMF Settings 257 Timer 1 Repetition 275
Return From Island 257 Timer 1 Repeated 276
MCB Logic 257 Timer 1 Repeat Day 276
MCB Opens On 259 Timer 1 Day 277
Group: Dual operation 259 Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week 277
Subgroup: Dual Operation 259 Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month 277
Running Hours Max Difference 259 Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month 278
Running Hours Base 260 Timer 1 Refresh Period 279
Swap Gen-sets 260 Timer 1 Weekends 280
Master Error Protection 261 Subgroup: Timer 2 281
Slave Error Protection 261 Timer 2 Function 281
Transfer Delay 261 Timer 2 Setup 282
Group: Load Shedding 264 Timer 2 First Occur. Date 282
Subgroup: Load Shedding 264 Timer 2 First Occur. Time 283
Load Shedding Active 264 Timer 2 Duration 283
Load Shedding Level 264 Timer 2 Repetition 283
Load Shedding Delay 265 Timer 2 Repeated 284
Subgroup: Load Reconnectino Settings 265 Timer 2 Repeat Day 284
Load Reconnection Level 265 Timer 2 Day 285
Load Reconnection Delay 265 Timer 2 Repeated Day In Week 285
Auto Load Reconnection 266 Timer 2 Repeat Day In Month 285
Group: Analog Switches 267 Timer 2 Repeat Week In Month 286
Subgroup: Analog Switches 1 267 Timer 2 Refresh Period 287
AIN Switch01 On 267 Timer 2 Weekends 288
AIN Switch01 Off 268
Group: Geo-Fencing 288
Subgroup: Analog Switches 2 269 Subgroup: Geo Fencing 288
AIN Switch02 On 269 Geo-Fencing 288
AIN Switch02 Off 270 Subgroup: Position 289
Group: Scheduler 270 Home Latitude 289
Subgroup: Time & Date 270

Home Longitude 289 Direct Connection Port 302
Subgroup: Fence 1 290 ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout 302
Fence 1 Protection 290 Subgroup: E-mail Settings 303
Fence Radius 1 290 SMTP Server Address 303
Fence 1 Delay 291 SMTP Sender Address 303
Subgroup: Fence 2 291 SMTP User Name 304
Fence 2 Protection 291 SMTP User Password 304
Fence Radius 2 292 SMTP Encryption 305
Fence 2 Delay 292 Email Address 1 305
Group: Plug-In Modules 292 Email Address 2 306
Subgroup: Slot A 292 Email Address 3 306
Slot A 292 Email Address 4 306
Group: CM-RS232-485 293 Subgroup: Message Settings 307
Subgroup: COM1 Setting 293 E-mail/SMS Language 307
COM1 Mode 293 Event Message 307
COM1 Communication Speed 293 Wrn Message 308
COM1 MODBUS Communication Speed 294 BOC Message 308
Subgroup: COM2 Setting 294 Sd Messages 309
COM2 Mode 294 Telephone Number 1 309
COM2 Communication Speed 294 Telephone Number 2 310
COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed 295 Telephone Number 3 310
Group: CM-4G-GPS 295 Telephone Number 4 311
Subgroup: Cellular Interface 295 Subgroup: GPS Settings 311
Internet Connection 295 GPS Tracking 311
Network Mode 296 Subgroup: RTC Synchronization 312
Access Point Name 296 NTP Clock Sync 312
Connection Check IP1 297 NTP Server 312
Connection Check IP2 297 GPS Clock Sync 312
Connection Check IP3 298 Time Zone 313
Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings 298
Group: CM-Ethernet 314
DNS Mode 298 Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings 314
DNS IP Address 1 299 IP Address Mode 314
DNS IP Address 2 299 IP Address 315
IP Firewall 300 Subnet Mask 315
Subgroup: AirGate Settings 300 Gateway IP 316
AirGate Connection 300 DNS Mode 316
AirGate Address 301 DNS IP Address 1 317
Airgate Port 301 DNS IP Address 2 317
Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings 302 IP Firewall 318
Direct Connection 302

Subgroup: AirGate Settings 318 Subgroup: EFCP Settings 331
AirGate Connection 318 Earth Fault Current Protection 331
AirGate Address 319 Earth Fault Delay 332
AirGate Port 319 Earth Fault CT Input Range 332
Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings 320 Earth Fault CT Ratio 332
Direct Connection 320 Group: CU AIN Calibration 333
Direct Connection Port 320 Subgroup: Analog Input 1 333
ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout 320 CU AIN1 Calibration 333
Subgroup: MODBUS Settings 321 Subgroup: Analog Input 2 334
MODBUS Server 321 CU AIN2 Calibration 334
MODBUS Client Inactivity Timeout 321 Subgroup: Analog Input 3 334
Subgroup: SNMP Settings 321 CU AIN3 Calibration 334
SNMP Agent 321 Group: Alternate Config 335
SNMP Trap Format 322 Subgroup: Configuration 1 335
SNMP Traps IP Address 1 322 Nominal RPM 1 335
SNMP Traps IP Address 2 322 Nominal Frequency 1 335
SNMP RD Community String 323 Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 336
SNMP WR Community String 323 Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1 336
Subgroup: E-mail Settings 324 Nominal Current 1 336
SMTP Server Address 324 Connection Type 1 337
SMTP Sender Address 324 ECU Speed Adjustment 1 340
SMTP UserName 325 Nominal Power 1 340
SMTP User Password 325 Nominal Power Split Phase 1 341
SMTP Encryption 326 Subgroup: Configuration 2 341
Email Address 1 326 Nominal RPM 2 341
Email Address 2 327 Nominal Frequency 2 342
Email Address 3 327 Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 342
Email Address 4 327 Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 342
Subgroup: Messages Settings 328 Nominal Current 2 343
BOC Message 328 Connection type 2 343
E-mail/SMS Language 328 ECU Speed Adjustment 2 346
Event Message 329 Nominal Power 2 346
Sd Messages 329 Nominal Power Split Phase 2 347
Wrn Message 330 Subgroup: Configuration 3 347
Subgroup: NTP Settings 330 Nominal RPM 3 347
NTP Clock Synchronization 330 Nominal Frequency 3 348
NTP Server 330 Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 348
Time Zone 331 Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 348
Group: EM-BIO8-EFCP 331 Nominal Current 3 349

Connection type 3 349
ECU Speed Adjustment 3 352
Nominal Power 3 352
Nominal Power Split Phase 3 353
6 back to Controller objects

Group: Basic settings
Subgroup: Name
Gen-Set Name
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 15 characters [-]
Default value InteliLite Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8637 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User defined name, used for the controller identification at remote phone or mobile connection. Gen-set
Name is maximally 15 characters long and can be entered using InteliConfig or from controller's
configuration menu.
Note: If the Gen-set Name is "TurboRunHours", the running hours will be counted faster – 1 minute in
real will represent 1 hour.
6 back to List of setpoints
Subgroup: Power settings
Nominal Power
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config YES
Step 1 kW
Description
Nominal power of the gen-set. Generator Overload BOC (page 237) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 192) is adjusted to Monophase or
Splitphase or 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect detects connection type as
3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Power 1 (page 340),
Nominal Power 2 (page 346) and Nominal Power 3 (page 352).

Nominal Power Split Phase
Step 1 kW
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 192)
Description
Nominal power of the Gen-set for detected split-phase or mono phase connection. Generator Overload
BOC (page 237) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 192) is adjusted to Autodetect and
Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or Splitphase.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Power Split Phase
1 (page 341), Nominal Power Split Phase 2 (page 347) and Nominal Power Split Phase 3 (page
353).
Subgroup: Current settings
Nominal Current
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 192).
Description
It is current limit for mains current protections and means maximal continuous mains current. Nominal
Current can be different from mains rated current value.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Current 1 (page
336), Nominal Current 2 (page 343) and Nominal Current 3 (page 349).

CT Ratio
Range [units] 1 .. 10000 [A/5A]
Default value 2000 A/5A Alternative config NO
Step 1 A/5A
Description
Current transformers ratio of Gen-set .
Note: Generator currents and power measurement is suppressed if current level is below 1% of CT
range.
CT Location
Range [units] Load / Gen-set / None [-]
Default value Gen-set Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Config level Advanced
Description
This setpoint adjusts position of current measurement.
Load Current CT's are physically placed on Load (typically between GCB and MCB).
Gen-set Current CT's are physically placed on Gen-set (typically before GCB).
None There are no current CT's.
When option None is selected, following objects are hidden/changed:

Current screen is hidden
Generator Power screen is hidden
Statistics screens – values Gen-set kWh, Gen-set kVArh, Mains kWh and Mains kWArh are hidden
Main screen – kW meter is replaced by generator voltage meter
Generator L1-N voltage is displayed for Monopahse, Splitphase L1L2, Splitphase L1L3 and High
Leg delta connection types
Generator L1-L2 voltage is displayed for 3ph3w and 3ph4w connection types
Group Load is hidden
Group Statistics – values Gen-set kWh, Gen-set kVArh, Mains kWh and Mains kWArh are hidden

Subgroup: Voltage settings
Connection type
Mono Phase / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3 / 3Ph3Wire / 3Ph4Wire / High Leg D /
Range [units]
Autodetect [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]

Description
Connection type:
Mono Phase Single phase voltage measurement L1-N

1x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L2 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
Split Phase
3Ph3Wire Ungrounded Delta connection
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Corner-Grounded Delta
Split Phase Delta
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
No neutral is available 3x CT (Current Transformer)

3Ph4Wire Grounded Star (Grounded Wye) connection – 3PY
High Leg D High Leg Delta connection
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3
Autodetect
L1 >=100 V; L1 <=140 V
High Leg Delta L2 >=140 V
L3 >=100 V; L3 <=140 V
L1 >=100 V
3Ph3Wire or 3Ph4Wire L2 >=100 V
L3 >=100 V
L1 >=100 V
SplPhL1L3 L2 <= 20 V
L3 >=100 V
L1 >=100 V
SplPhL1L2 L2 >= 100 V
L3 <= 20 V
L1 >=100 V
Mono Phase L2 <= 20 V
L3 <= 20 V
Voltage Autodetect shutdown
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Connection Type 1 (page
337), Connection type 2 (page 343) and Connection type 3 (page 349).

Nominal Voltage Ph-N
Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 231 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Description
Nominal voltage (phase to neutral).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1
(page 336), Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 (page 342) and Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 (page 348).
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph

Range [units] 80 .. 40 000 [V]
Step 1V
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to phase).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1
(page 336), Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 (page 342) and Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 (page 348).

Nominal Voltage 3Ph Low Y
Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Step 1V
Setpoint visibility Visible if one of the three Connection type (page 192) Setpoints is set to Autodetect.
Description
This setting is used as phase-neutral Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 195) by the voltage autodetect
function, if detected Connection type (page 192) is 3Ph Low Y (controller can not distinguish between the 4
wire and 3 wire connection), detected phase-phase voltage is lower than 300 V in all three phases and
phase-neutral voltage is lower than or equal to 160 V in all three phases.
Nominal Voltage 3Ph High Y

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Step 1V
Description
function, if detected Connection type (page 192) is 3Ph High Y, detected phase-phase voltage is higher
than or equal to 300 V in all three phases and phase-neutral voltage is higher than 160 V in all three phases.
Nominal Voltage High Leg D

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Step 1V
Description
function, if detected Connection type (page 192) is High Leg D. Set this setpoint to 120 V with high leg
delta system, which works with the high leg voltage 208 V (L2-N).

Nominal Voltage SplitPhase
Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Step 1V
Description
function, if detected Connection type (page 192) is SplPhL1L2 or SplPhL1L3.
Nominal Voltage MonoPhase

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Step 1V
Description
function, if detected Connection type (page 192) is MonoPhase.
Gen VT Ratio
Range [units] 0.1 .. 500.0 [V/V]
Default value 1.0 V/V Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 V/V
Description
Generator voltage potential transformers ratio. If no VTs are used, adjust this setpoint to 1.

Mains VT Ratio
Range [units] 0.1 .. 500.0 [V/V]
Default value 1.0 V/V Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 V/V
Comm object 9580 Related applications AMF
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 201)
Description
Mains voltage potential transformers ratio. If no VTs are used, adjust the setpoint to 1.
Subgroup: Frequency settings
Nominal Frequency
Range [units] 30 .. 65 [Hz]
Default value 50 Hz Alternative config YES
Step 1 Hz
Description
Nominal system frequency (usually 50 or 60 Hz).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Frequency 1 (page
335), Nominal Frequency 2 (page 342) and Nominal Frequency 3 (page 348).

Gear Teeth
Range [units] FGen->RPM / 1 .. 500 [-]
Default value FGen->RPM Alternative config NO
Step 1
Description
Number of teeth on the engine flywheel where the pick-up is installed. Set to zero if no pick-up is used and
the Engine speed will be counted from the generator frequency.
Note: If no pickup is used, the D+ or W terminal should be used to prevent possible overcranking, which
can occur if at least 25% of nominal generator voltage is not present immediately after exceeding firing
speed.
Nominal RPM
Range [units] 100 .. 4 000 [RPM]
Default value 1 500 RPM Alternative config YES
Step 1 RPM
Description
Nominal engine speed (RPM - revolutions per minute).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal RPM 1 (page 335),
Nominal RPM 2 (page 341) and Nominal RPM 3 (page 347).

Subgroup: Controller settings
Controller Mode
Range [units] OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST [-]
Default value OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint can be used for changing the Controller mode remotely, e.g. via Modbus. Use the mode
selector on the main screen for changing the mode from the front panel. Use mode selector in the control
window for changing the mode from InteliConfig.
Power On Mode
Range [units] Previous / OFF [-]
Default value Previous Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts controller mode after power on of controller.
Previous When controller is power on, controller is switched to last mode before power off.
OFF When controller is power on, controller is switched to OFF Mode.
Note: Remote modes – In case that some LBI remote mode is activated during power on of controller
than this LBI has higher priority than this setpoint – controller mode is forced into mode selected via LBI.
After deactivation of LBI, controller is switched into value selected via setpoint Power On Mode

Default Application Select
Range [units] AMF / MRS [-]
Default value AMF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint defines the controller application.
AMF Normal AMF operation

MRS When MRS mode is selected the controller will not perform AMF functions anymore. MCB
button will be inactive and also mains measurement and protections will be disabled.
The controller will keep TEST mode and the Gen-set in AUTO mode will be able to start by
REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 416) binary input.
GCB Control Mode

Range [units] Internal / External / No Button [-]
Default value Internal Alternative config YES
Step [-]

Description
Mode of Generator Circuit Breaker behavior.
The breaker is controlled only from controller. Any unexpected change of GCB
feedback causes Sd GCB fail immediately.
Internal Incorrect reaction of the GCB feedback on internal GCB Open command causes
Sd GCB fail (within 5 s).
Note: For more info see Breaker control on page 108.
Controller does not control the GCB at all. The GCB is controller Externally, when
the GCB feedback get changed, then the event "GCB Opened" or "GCB Closed" is
recorded in the history log.
Controller always accept the GCB feadback position, do not issue any alarm.
External The Controller does not care about the GCB position even the engine is stopped or
running. Gen-set with closed GCB is not blocked against starting.
When the Sd protection shut down the engine, the GCB stays closed. The BOC
protection do not open the GCB, controller goes to cooling when the BOC
protection was tripped (GCB stays closed until opened externally).
GCB button and LBI GCB button are deactivated.
When selected in AMF mode, there is active warning Wrn Wrong GCB
Control Mode (page 506)
The behavior of the controller is the same as GCB Control Mode would be
No Button
switched to Internal
When selected in MRS mode and MAN mode the GCB is closed
automatically the same way as in Auto mode – no manual command
needed.
Reset To Manual
Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
If this function is enabled, the controller will switch automatically to MAN mode when there is a red alarm in
the alarm list and fault reset button is pressed. This is a safety function that prevents the Gen-set starting
again automatically in specific cases when fault reset button is pressed.

Backlight Timeout
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 255 [min]
Step 1 min
Description
The display backlight is switched off when this timer exceed. When setpoint is adjusted to disabled then the
display will be backlighted all the time.
Horn Timeout
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 599 s / Horn Reset [-]
Default value 10 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Description
Setting of horn behavior.
Disabled Disabling the Horn sounding function
Timeout for HORN (PAGE 440) binary output. The HORN (PAGE 440) output is active
1 .. 599 [s]
when this timeout elapsed.
Horn reset LBO HORN (PAGE 440) is deactivated by Fault reset button or by Horn reset button.
Note: Horn timeout starts again from the beginning if a new alarm appears before previous Horn timeout
has elapsed.

Zero Power Mode
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 360 [min]
Step 1 min
Description
The controller is switched to Zero Power Mode when there is no user interaction with the controller for the
preset time period. For the controller wake up press button Start or activate Binary Input 1. The controller will
not switch to Zero Power Mode if generator is running. In Zero Power Mode binary outputs go to high
impedance
Note: Power consumption of controller in Zero Power Mode is 0 mA. Controller is internally
disconnected from power supply.
Note: While there is USB power present (USB cable plagued) the controller is able to turn off when there
is no user interaction but wake up is not possible. USB power has to be cut off (USB cable un-plugged).
Run Hours Source

Range [units] AUTO / ECU / INTERNAL [-]
Default value AUTO Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint selects source of running hours.
AUTO If there is some ECU which send valid running hours, then this value is used.
Otherwise value from internal counter is used.
ECU Running hours are taken from ECU if ECU send valid data. It is not possible to set
and reset this value in statistics.
INTERNAL Running hours are taken from internal counter. It is possible to set and reset this
value in statistics.
Note: It is not necessary to restart controller when this setpoint is changed. Change of this setpoint is
applied immediately.

Subgroup: HMI Settings
Screen Filter
Range [units] Enable / Disabled [-]
Step [-]
Description
Every analog value showed on CU screen is filtered when setpoint is enabled.
Group: Communication Settings
Subgroup: Controller Address
Controller Address
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Settings
Range [units] 1 .. 32 [-]
Default value 1 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Description
Controller identification number. It is possible to set controller address different from the default value (1) so
that more controllers can be interconnected (via RS485 ) and accessed e.g. from Modbus terminal.
Note: When opening connection to the controller it's address has to correspond with the setting in PC
tool.

Group: Engine settings
Subgroup: Starting
Fuel Solenoid
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Diesel / Gas [-]
Default value Diesel Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Determines behavior of the Binary output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 432)
Diesel: Output is activated before binary output STARTER (PAGE 453). Lead of output is
adjusted via setpoint Fuel Solenoid Lead (page 215). The output is deactivated if
Emergency Stop comes or Gen-set is stopped and in pause between repeated starts.
Gas: Output is activated together with binary output IGNITION (PAGE 441) if RPM is over the
30 RPM (fixed value). Output is deactivated after stop command or in pause between
repeated start.
Cranking Attempts
Range [units] 1 .. 10 [-]
Step 1
Description
Maximal number of cranking attempts.

Maximum Cranking Time
Range [units] 1 .. 255 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Description
Maximum time limit of cranking time.
Cranking Fail Pause

DefaultFixed
8s Alternative config NO
value
Step 1s
Description
Pause between Cranking Attempts (page 206). PRESTART (PAGE 449) output is active in this pause until
Cranking Fail Pause elapses.

Prestart Time
Step 1s
Description
Time of closing of the PRESTART (PAGE 449) output prior to the engine start. Set to zero if you want to leave
the output PRESTART (PAGE 449) open.
Image 8.1 Prestart Time
Starting RPM
Range [units] 5 .. 50 [%]
Default value 25% Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal RPM (page 199)
Description
This setpoint defines the "firing" speed level as percent value of the Nominal RPM (page 199). If this level
is exceeded the engine is considered as started.

Starting Oil Pressure
Range [units] Disabled / 0,1 .. 10,0 [bar]
Default value 4,5 bar Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 bar
Description
Oil pressure limit for starting. The controller will stop cranking (STARTER (PAGE 453) goes OFF) if the oil
pressure rises above this limit.
Option Disabled – when this option is selected, Oil Pressure value (value from CU analog Oil Pressure,
value from ECU analog Oil pressure and state of binary input Oil Pressure) is not used for disengagement of
starter and for engine running evaluation.
IMPORTANT: Value from analog input has higher priority than value from ECU.
Glow Plugs Time

Range [units] 0.0 .. Prestart Time (page 208) [s]
Default value 0.1 s Alternative config NO
Step 1.0 s
Description
This setpoint defines the time before starting when logical binary output GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 438) will be
active.
Idle RPM
Range [units] 100 .. 4000 [RPM]
Default value 900 RPM Alternative config NO
Step 1 RPM
Description
This setpoint adjusts idle speed of engine.

Subgroup: Choke
Choke Function
Range [units] Disabled /Fixed Time / Temp Based [-]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility Only when LBO CHOKE (PAGE 427) is configured.
Description
This setpoint defines choke function behavior.
Disabled Choke function is disabled and logical binary output CHOKE (PAGE 427) is
activated under no circumstances.
Fixed Time Choke time is fixedly defined by Choke Time (page 210) setpoint.
Temp Based Choke time is calculated using actual engine (coolant) temperature. Setpoints
Choke Start Temp (page 211) and Choke Increment (page 212) are taken into
consideration.
Choke Time
Range [units] 0–3600 [s]
Step 1s
Only when LBO CHOKE (PAGE 427) is configured and setpoint Choke Function (page
Setpoint visibility
210) = Fixed Time.
Description
Defines time logical binary output CHOKE (PAGE 427) is activated for when fixed time is used. When setpoint
Choke Function (page 210) is set to Temp Based value, Choke Time value have no effect.
Note: If setpoint Choke Lead (page 214) is set to nonzero value, total time the CHOKE output is
activated still matches value set by Choke Time setpoint. This mean Choke Timeshould be longer than
Choke Leadto ensure expected Choke behavior.

Choke Start Temp
Range [units] -20,0 .. 80,0 [°C]
Default value 0,0 °C Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 °C
Only when LBO CHOKE (PAGE 427) is configured and setpoint Choke Function
Setpoint visibility
(page 210) = Temp Based.
Description
This setpoint adjust the base temperature for Choke function. When temperature will be higher than this
setpoint, Choke Time will be always 0. When temperature will be lower than this setpoint, Choke Time will
be calculated by curve adjusted via setpoint Choke Increment (page 212). When setpoint Choke
Function (page 210) is set to Fixed Time value, setpoint Choke Start Temp has no effect.

Choke Increment
Range [units] 0,00 .. 20,00 [s/°C]
Default value 0,00 s/°C Alternative config NO
Step 0,01 s/°C
Only when LBO CHOKE (PAGE 427) is configured and setpoint Choke Function
Setpoint visibility
(page 210) = Temp Based.
Description
This setpoint adjust the maximal time of activation of binary output CHOKE (PAGE 427). Calculated time
depends on engine (coolant) temperature. Setpoint adjust curve which is used for calculating actual Choke
Time. When setpoint Choke Function (page 210) is set to Fixed Time value, setpoint Choke Increment has
no effect.
Note: If setpoint Choke Lead (page 214) is set to nonzero value, total time the CHOKE output is
activated still matches calculated value (based on actual temperature and setpoints Choke Increment
and Choke Start Temp (page 211)) This mean that adjusted parameters should ensure that calculated
Choke Time will be longer than Choke Leadto ensure expected Choke behavior.

Choke Voltage
Range [units] Disabled / 1–100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint adjust threshold level for deactivation of CHOKE (PAGE 427) binary output. When generator
voltage is higher than this level, then logical binary output CHOKE is deactivated. In multiphase system it is
sufficient to deactivate CHOKE LBO when at least one voltage crosses this threshold. In case setpoint
Choke Voltage is set to Disabled value, no voltage is taken into account and CHOKE LBO isn't deactivated
on the voltage basis.

Choke Lead
Range [units] 0 .. Prestart Time [s]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint adjust the lead of logical binary output CHOKE. CHOKE (PAGE 427) is activated before logical
binary output STARTER (PAGE 453).
Note: In case Choke Lead is longer than 8 s (cranking fail pause), Choke Lead will be limited to 8 s
(cranking fail pause time). This limitation is applied only for cranking fail pause, Choke Lead in Prestart
stays unchanged.

Subgroup: Starting Timers
Fuel Solenoid Lead

Range [units] 0,0 .. 25,0 [s]
Default value 0,5 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay between FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 432) and STARTER (PAGE 453) logical binary outputs.FUEL SOLENOID
(PAGE 432) is active before STARTER (PAGE 453). Lead time is adjusted via this setpoint.
Image 8.2 Fuel Solenoid Lead
Note: LBO PRESTART (PAGE 449) goes to logical zero when Fuel Solenoid Lead goes to logical one.
Note: This setpoint is used only for diesel Fuel Solenoid (page 206)
Idle Time
Step 1s

Description
Idle Time delay starts when RPM exceeds Starting RPM (page 208). Start fail is detected when during Idle
state RPM decreases below 2 RPM.
The output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 441) remains inactive during the idle period. Binary output Idle/Nominal
opens during Cooling period again. This output can be used for switching the governor between idle and
nominal speed.
Note: When controller is in the MAN mode, it is possible to finish the Idle Time count down by pushing
the Start button.
Image 8.3 Idle Time 1
Image 8.4 Idle Time 2

Minimal Stabilization Time
Range [units] 1 .. Maximal Stabilization Time (page 218) [s]
Step 1s
Description
When the gen-set has been started and the idle timer has elapsed, the controller will wait for a period
adjusted by this setpoint before closing GCB, even if the generator voltage and frequency are already in
limits.
Image 8.5 Minimal Stabilization Time

Maximal Stabilization Time
Range [units] Minimal Stabilization Time (page 217) .. 300 [s]
Step 1s
Description
When the gen-set has been started and the idle timer has elapsed, the generator voltage and frequency must
get within limits within this period of time, otherwise an appropriate shutdown alarm (generator voltage and/or
frequency) is issued.
Image 8.6 Maximal Stabilization Time
Run Only Block Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
If any protection is configured with blocking condition "Run Only Block" this setpoint influences the blocking
condition. The protection blocking is based on the operating state of the engine automat. Once the engine
automat reaches the state "Running" the protection with this blocking condition gets unblocked after delay
Run Only Block Delay.

Subgroup: Stopping
Cooling Speed
Range [units] Idle / Nominal [-]
Default value Nominal Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Selects the function of the binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 441) during engine cooling state.
Idle Cooling is executed at Idle speed and generator protections are switched off.
Nominal Cooling is executed at Nominal speed and generator protections are active.
Note: When ECU is connected the predefined value 900 RPM for Idle speed is requested.
Note: Binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 441) must be configured and connected to speed governor.
Engine Idle speed must be adjusted on speed governor.
Subgroup: Stopping Timers
Cooling Time
Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Step 1s
Description
Runtime of the unloaded gen-set to cool the engine before stop.
Stop Time
Step 1s

Description
Under normal conditions the engine must certainly stop within this period after the FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE
432) has been de-energized and the STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 454) energized. The Stop Solenoid output is
deactivated 12 s after last running engine indication went off.
Image 8.7 Stop Time 1
Image 8.8 Stop Time 2

After Cooling Time
Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Step 1s
Description
Runtime of engine after cooling pump. Binary output COOLING PUMP (PAGE 428) is active when the engine
starts deactivates after timer set in this setpoint elapses (timer starts counting down as soon as engine
switches to stop phase).
Subgroup: D+ Function
D+ Function
Range [units] Enabled / ChargeFail / Disabled [-]
Step [-]

Description
Behavior of D+ terminal.
Enabled The D+ terminal is used for both functions – “running engine” detection and
charge fail detection.
ChargeFail The D+ terminal is used for charge fail detection only
Disabled The D+ terminal is not used.
Image 8.9 D+ Function 1
Image 8.10 D+ Function 2
Note: Delay of this function is adjusted via D+ Delay (page 223) setpoint, threshold of this function is
adjusted via D+ Level setpoint.

D+ Threshold
Range [units] 0..100 [%]
Default value 80 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Setpoint visibility Only if setpoint D+ Function (page 221) is not set to Disabled value.
Description
This setpoint adjusts threshold level for D+ Function (page 221).
D+ Delay
Range [units] 1..255 [s]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint adjusts delay for D+ Function (page 221). This delay is used for:
Alarm Wrn Charging Alternator Fail (page 491).
For engine running condition – disengagement of starter
D+ Alarm Type
Range [units] No Protec/Wrn/Sd [-]
Default value Wrn Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts type of alarm Wrn Charging Alternator Fail (page 491).

Subgroup: Engine Protections
Overspeed Sd
Range [units] Underspeed Sd (page 226)50 .. 200 [%]
Description
Threshold for over speed protection. Relative to the nominal speed.
Starting Overspeed Sd
Range [units] 100 ..200 [%]
Step 1%

Description
The rise up threshold for overspeed protection. The time for which this level is accepted is defined as
Starting Overspeed Time (page 225). This period starts to be counted once the RPM exceeds the value
Starting RPM (page 208). The threshold Overspeed Sd (page 224) starts to be valid once this period
elapsed.
The type of reaction of the overspeed protection within the Starting Overspeed Time (page 225) is defined
by the setpoint Starting Overspeed Protection (page 226), so it is either considered as Sd Overspeed or
unsuccessful start attempt. Then the next start attempt is enabled once the engine was stopped. History
record Starting Overspeed should be written in this case.
Image 8.11 Staring speed overshoot › Ovespeed Sd
Image 8.12 Staring speed overshoot ‹ Ovespeed Sd
Starting Overspeed Time

Setpoint group Engine protection Related FW 1.0.0
Step 1s

Description
Time when Starting Overspeed Sd (page 224) level is used for overspeed protection. This time starts
countdown when starting RPM are reached.
Starting Overspeed Protection

Range [units] OverSpd Sd / NextStartAt [-]
Default value OverSpd Sd Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
The setpoint allows user to chose which kind of protection will be triggered if speed limit is reached during
Starting Overspeed Time (page 225).
Sd overspeed option will result in controller shutting down the engine and displaying Sd Starting Overspeed
alarm and NextStartAt option will result in controller stopping the engine and trying to start again. The
number of attempts is defined by Cranking Attempts (page 206).
Underspeed Sd
Range [units] 0 .. Overspeed Sd (page 224) [%]
Description
Threshold for underspeed protection. Relative to the nominal speed.

Subgroup: Fuel Theft Protection
Fuel Tank Volume

Range [units] 0 .. 10 000 [l]
Default value 200 l Alternative config YES
Step 1l
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 460) is or ECU is configured
Description
Define a capacity of Gen-set fuel tank.
Maximal Fuel Drop

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 50 [%/h]
Default value 25 %/h Alternative config NO
Step 1%/h
Description
Setpoint indicates the maximum allowable drop of fuel in fuel tank per running hour. When the engine is not
running the maximal allowed fuel drop-off is preset to 5% of total tank volume per hour.
Maximal Fuel Drop Delay

Step s
Description
When the value of fuel drop per hour is higher than Maximal Fuel Drop (page 227) this delay starts count
down. After count down of this delay alarm Wrn Fuel Theft (page 507) is activated.

Subgroup: Fuel Pump
Fuel Pump On
Range [units] 0 .. Fuel Pump Off (page 229) [%]
Default value 20 % Alternative config YES
Step 1%
Setpoint visibility All the time
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 432) on.
Image 8.13 Fuel Pump On
IMPORTANT: When binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 407) is configured then binary
output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 432) is control by this binary input. Setpoints Fuel Pump On and
Fuel Pump Off (page 229) are not evaluated!
Note: Value from analog input has higher priority than ECU.
Note: This setpoint is visible only if the logical binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 432) is configured.

Fuel Pump Off
Range [units] Fuel Pump On (page 228) .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 432) off.
Image 8.14 Fuel Pump Off
output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 432) is control by this binary input. Setpoints Fuel Pump On (page
228) and Fuel Pump Off are not evaluated!
Note: Value from analog input has higher priority than ECU.
Note: This setpoint is visible only if the logical binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 432) is configured.

Transfer Wrn Delay
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 600 [s]
Default value 30 s Alternative config YES
Step 1s
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 432) is configured
Description
If the controller does not see the fuel increase during fuel transfer within this time alarm AL Fuel Transfer
Failed (page 491) will be displayed and the FUEL PUMP (PAGE 432) will be turned off. Alarm AL Fuel
Transfer Failed (page 491) will be displayed but this alarm becomes immediately inactive and it will be
possible to delete this message by the Fault reset button. If the fault is deleted the controller will initiate the
transfer again.
Subgroup: Battery Protections
Battery Undervoltage
Range [units] 8.0 V .. Battery Overvoltage (page 230) [V]
Default value 18.0 V Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 V
Description
Warning threshold for low battery voltage.
Battery Overvoltage
Range [units] Battery Undervoltage (page 230) .. 40.0 [V]
Default value 36.0 V Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 V
Description
Warning threshold for high battery voltage.

Battery <> Voltage Delay
DefaultFixed
5s Alternative config NO
value
Step 1s
Description
Delay for Battery Undervoltage (page 230) and Battery Overvoltage (page 230) protection.
IMPORTANT: This is a fixed parameter, it isn't possible to adjust it in any manner. This
parameter isn't visible either in controller or in PC tools.
Subgroup: Ventilation
Ventilation Pulse Time

Range [units] 0–3600 [s]
Step 1s
Only when logical binary output VENTILATION ON PULSE (PAGE 456) or VENTILATION
Setpoint visibility
OFF PULSE (PAGE 456) is configured.
Description
This setpoint defines duration of pulse generated on logical binary outputs VENTILATION ON PULSE (PAGE
456) or VENTILATION OFF PULSE (PAGE 456) at the moment when logical binary output VENTILATION (PAGE
455) is activated or deactivated respectively.

Subgroup: ECU Settings
ECU Speed Adjustment

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50 %. This setpoint
should be used only for Volvo Penta and Scania engines. It has no effect on other engine brands.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment 1
(page 340), ECU Speed Adjustment 2 (page 346) and ECU Speed Adjustment 3 (page 352).
Group: Maintenance Timers
Subgroup: Maintenance Timer 1
Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours

Setpoint group Maintenance Timers Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] -10 000 ... 9 999 [h] / Disabled
Default value 1 000 h Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Description
Maintenance timer counts down when engine is running. If it reaches zero, an alarm appears, but the timer
still counts down to negative values. When the value 10 000 (Disabled) is set, the Maintenance function is
disabled and the counter value disappears from controllers statistics.
Reset of the timer can be done by adjusting this setpoint again.

Maintenance Timer 1 Interval
Range [units] 1 .. 36 [month] / Disabled
Default value 1 month Alternative config NO
Step 12 h
Description
Maintenance timer counts down all the time, setting is done in months, but actual Maintenance Timer 1
Interval (page 376) value is displayed and counted in days. If it reaches zero, an alarm appears, but the
timer still counts down to negative values. When the value 37 (Disabled) is set, then the maintenance
function is disabled and counter does not count and the counter value disappears from controllers statistics.
Reset of the timer can be done by adjusting this setpoint again. Setting of the setpoint does not change when
the reset is done, only the Maintenance Timer 1 Interval (page 376) value changes to reflect reset of the
maintenance timer.
Maintenance Timer 1 Protection

Range [units] Warning / BOC [-]
Default value Warning Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Type of the maintenance alarm of both Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours (page 232) and Maintenance
Timer 1 Interval (page 233).


Step 1h
Description

Step 12 h
Description
Reset of the timer can be by adjusting this setpoint again. Setting of the setpoint does not change when the
reset is done, only the Maintenance Timer 2 Interval (page 376) value changes to reflect reset of the
maintenance timer.

Step [-]
Description

Step 1h
Description

Step 12 h
Description
Reset of the timer can be done by adjusting this setpoint again. Setting of the setpoint does not change when
the reset is done, only the Maintenance Timer 3 Interval (page 377) value changes to reflect reset of the
maintenance timer.

Step [-]
Description

Group: Generator settings
Subgroup: Overload Protection
Overload BOC
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Overload Wrn (page 237) .. 200 [%]
Step 1 % of Nominal Power (page 189)
Description
Threshold level for overload of generator (in % of Nominal power) protection. Protection is BOC (Breaker
Open and Gen-set Cooldown).
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.
Overload Wrn
Range [units] 0 .. Overload BOC (page 237) [%]
Description
Threshold level for overload of generator (in % of Nominal Power (page 189)) protection. This is only
warning.
Overload Delay
Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay for protections Overload BOC (page 237) and Overload Wrn (page 237).

Subgroup: Current Protection
Short Circuit BOC

Range [units] 100 .. 500 [%]
Step 1 % of Nominal Current (page 190)
Description
Protection occurs when generator current reaches this preset threshold. Type of the protection is BOC.
Short Circuit BOC Delay

Range [units] 0.00 .. 10.00 [s]
Default value 0.04 s Alternative config YES
Step 0.01 s
Description
Delay for Short Circuit BOC (page 238) protection.
IDMT Overcurrent Delay

Range [units] 1.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s

Description
IDMT curve shape selection. IDMT is "very inverse" over current protection. Reaction time is not constant
but depends on over current level according to the following formula:
Note: Reaction time is limited to 3600 s = 60 minutes. IDMT protection is not active for Reaction time
values longer than 60 minutes.
Igen is maximal value of all measured phases of generator current.

Table 8.1 EXAMPLE of Reaction time for different over current levels
Overcurrent
Overcurrent IDMT Delay
≤ 100 % 101 % 110 %
0.2 s No action 20 s 2s
Reaction time 2s No action 200 s 20 s
20 s No action 2000 s 200 s
Image 8.15 IDMT Overcurrent Delay


Current Unbalance BOC
Range [units] 1 .. 200 [%] of Nominal Current (page 190)
Step 1 % of Nominal Current (page 190)
Description
Threshold for generator current asymmetry (unbalance).
Protection is BOC (Breaker Open and Gen-set Cooldown).
Current Unbalance BOC Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay for Current Unbalance BOC (page 240) protection.
Subgroup: Voltage Protection
Generator Overvoltage Sd
Range [units] Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 241) .. 200 [%]
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 195) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 195)
Description
Threshold for generator overvoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is used.
Note: Phase to phase and phase to neutral voltages are used for this protection.

Generator Overvoltage Wrn
Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 241) .. Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 240)
Range [units]
[%]
Description
Threshold for generator overvoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is used.
Generator Undervoltage Wrn

Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 242) .. Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page
Range [units]
241) [%]
Description
Threshold for generator undervoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Minimum out of three is used.

Generator Undervoltage BOC
Range [units] 0 .. Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 241) [%]
Description
Threshold for generator undervoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Minimum out of three is used.
Generator <> Voltage Delay

Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 240), Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 241), Generator
Undervoltage BOC (page 242) and Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 241) protection.
Voltage Unbalance BOC

1 .. 200 [%] of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 195) or Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page
Range [units]
195)
Step 1%
Description
Threshold for generator voltage unbalance alarm.

Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay
Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 242) protection.
Subgroup: Frequency Protection
Generator Overfrequency BOC

Range [units] Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 243) .. 200,0 [%]
Default value 110,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 198)
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 overfrequency.
Generator Overfrequency Wrn

Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 244) .. Generator Overfrequency BOC
Range [units]
(page 243) [%]
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 overfrequency.

Generator Underfrequency Wrn
Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 244) .. Generator Overfrequency Wrn
Range [units]
(page 243) [%]
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 underfrequency.
Generator Underfrequency BOC

Range [units] 0,0 .. Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 244) [%]
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 underfrequency.
Generator <> Frequency Delay

Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Generator Overfrequency BOC (page 243), Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 243),
Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 244) and Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 244)
protection.

Subgroup: Reverse Power Protection
Reverse Power Level

Range [units] 0 .. 50 [%]
Description
Level for generator Reverse Power Protection.
Reverse Power Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay for generator Reverse Power Protection.

Group: Protections
Subgroup: Reverse Power Protection
Reverse Power Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Enabled / Disabled / ExtDisable [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
The protection of the generator against the reverse (negative) active power. Protection gets active when the
level of active power [kW] gets under limit given by setpoint Reverse Power Level (page 245) for time
longer than the value of setpoint Reverse Power Delay (page 245).
This setpoint adjusts behavior of generator Reverse power protection.
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Reverse

Enabled:
Power Level (page 245), Reverse Power Delay (page 245)
Disabled: Protection is disabled.
Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 413).

Group: Mains Settings
Subgroup: AMF Timers
Emergency Start Delay

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 6 000 [s]
Step 1s
Description
Delay after the mains failure to the start command of the Gen-set.
Image 8.16 Emergency Start Delay
Mains Return Delay

Range [units] 1 .. 3 600 [s]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint adjust the delay, how long mains has to be returned after mains fail to start load transfer to
mains.

MCB Close Delay
Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay after mains returns to MCB closing, if the Gen-set is not running (e.g. is in start-up procedure).
Transfer Delay
Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s

Description
Transition Delay between power sources.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is used in 2 functions:
Delay after GCB opening to MCB closing
Delay used in dual operation function
Delay after GCB opening to MCB closing during the return procedure. Delay after MCB opening to GCB
closing if the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 259) is set to GENRUN.
The time charts bellow show recommended setting of Transfer Delay setpoint.
If the Transfer Delay setpoint is set shorter than the time required for opening of the circuit breaker, the
controller closes GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 434) output straight away (100 ms) after the MCB FEEDBACK
(PAGE 411) input deactivates.
Image 8.17 Transfer Delay 1
If some delay between MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 411) deactivation and closing of GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE
434) output is required, then the Transfer Delay must be set to sum of "MCB opening" + "Delay" time.
Delay used in dual operation function. This delay is used when load from first Gen-set is transferred to
second Gen-set. Delay starts to countdown when GCB of first Gen-set is open. When this delay countdown,
GCB of second Gen-set is closed. This delay is important for correct function of external interlock.

This delay is also used in dual operation function. This delay is used when load from first Gen-set is
transferred to second Gen-set. Delay starts to countdown when GCB of first Gen-set is open. When this
delay countdown, GCB of second Gen-set is closed. This delay is important for correct function of external
interlock.
Subgroup: Mains Voltage Limits
Mains Overvoltage
Range [units] Mains Undervoltage (page 252) .. 150 [%]
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 195)
Description
Threshold for Mains overvoltage. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is used.

Mains Overvoltage Hys
Range [units] 100 .. Mains Overvoltage (page 250) [%]
Step 1%
Description
Threshold defines the level of turning off Mains overvoltage protection.
Image 8.19 Mains Overvoltage Hys

Mains Undervoltage
Range [units] 50 .. Mains Overvoltage (page 250) [%]
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 195)
Description
Threshold for Mains undervoltage. All three phases are checked. Minimum voltage out of three phases is
used.

Mains Undervoltage Hys
Range [units] Mains Undervoltage (page 252) .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
Threshold defines the level of turning off Mains undervoltage protection.
Image 8.20 Mains Undervoltage Hys
Mains <> Voltage Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 2.0 s Alternative config YES
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay for Mains Undervoltage (page 252) and Mains Overvoltage (page 250) protection.

Mains Voltage Unbalance
1 .. 150 [%] of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 195) or Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page
Range [units]
195)
Step 1%
Description
Threshold for Mains voltage unbalance.
Mains Voltage Unbalance Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay for Mains Voltage Unbalance (page 254) protection.
Subgroup: Mains Frequency Limits
Mains Overfrequency
Range [units] Mains Underfrequency (page 255) .. 150 [%]
Default value 102.0 % Alternative config NO
Step 1.0 % of Nominal Frequency (page 198)
Description
Threshold for Mains overfrequency.

Mains Overfrequency Hys
Range [units] 100 .. Mains Overfrequency (page 254) [%]
Step 0.1 %
Description
Threshold defines the level of turning off Mains overfrequency protection.
Image 8.21 Mains Overfrequency Hys
Mains Underfrequency
Range [units] 50 .. Mains Overfrequency (page 254) [%]
Step 1.0 % of Nominal Frequency (page 198)
Description
Threshold for Mains underfrequency.

Mains Underfrequency Hys
Range [units] Mains Underfrequency (page 255) .. 100 [%]
Step 0.1 %
Description
Threshold defines the level of turning off Mains underfrequency protection.
Image 8.22 Mains Underfrequency Hys
Mains < > Frequency Delay

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s
Description
Delay for Mains Underfrequency (page 255) and Mains Overfrequency (page 254) protection.

Subgroup: AMF Settings
Return From Island

Range [units] Manual / Auto [-]
DefaultFixed
Auto Alternative config NO
value
Step [-]
Description
Setpoint adjust the behavior of closing MCB when the mains returns.
Controller remains in AUT mode and the manual return to Mains is done via MCB
button. Manual Restore (page 499) message is displayed in alarmlist to notify
Manual operator – it will disappear automatically after MCB close button is pushed.
Note: Select MANUAL in case you need to manually control the moment
when the load is transferred back to the mains.
MCB is closed automatically after the timer Mains Return Delay (page 247)
Auto
elapses.
MCB Logic
Range [units] Close On / Close Off [-]
Default value Close Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]

Description
The setpoint influences the behavior of the output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 444).
Close On When the output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 444) is active – MCB should be closed.
Close Off When the output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 444) is active – MCB should be opened.
Image 8.23 MCB Logic 1
Image 8.24 MCB Logic 2

MCB Opens On
Range [units] Mains Fail / Gen Run [-]
Default value Gen Run Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Setpoint adjust the behavior of opening MCB in AUTO mode when there is mains fail.
Mains The command to open the MCB is given immediately after mains fail condition is
Fail evaluated.
If the mains will return into parameters after MCB was opened and before GCB is closed,
timer MCB Close Delay (page 248) is applied before MCB closing.
Gen Run MCB will be opened when engine will be running and it will be possible to transfer load
from Mains to Gen-set (after stabilization phase).
Note: This option should be used for MCBs using 230V control and not equipped with
the undervoltage coil.
Group: Dual operation
Subgroup: Dual Operation
Running Hours Max Difference

Setpoint group Dual operation Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0,1 .. 1000,0 [h]
Default value 10 h Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 h
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
293) and COM2 Mode (page 294)
Description
This setpoint adjusts the maximal allowed difference of dual operation running hours between Master and
Slave. When difference is higher, swap of load between controllers is done.

Running Hours Base
Range [units] -10 000,0 .. 10 000,0 [h]
Default value 0h Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 h
Setpoint visibility
Description
This setpoint modifies the running hours of controller used in dual operation function. Negative value is
decrement from running hours, positive value is increment to running hours.
Example:
Master controller has 1000 h.
Slave controller has 100 h.
Adjust setpoint of slave controller to 900 h to have both controllers on "0" running hours in dual
operation.
Swap Gen-sets
Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled h Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
This setpoint enables or disables swapping of gen-sets on load in dual operation.
Enabled Master and Slave are swapped based on their actual running hours.
Master and Slave are not swapped. Controller with lower running hours starts and then
Disabled
runs until mains returns or until controller shutdown – then second controller starts.

Master Error Protection
Range [units] Monitoring / AL Indic / Wrn [-]
Default value AL Indic Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
This setpoint adjust the type of protection for Wrn Dual Operation Master Fail (page 489) alarm.
Slave Error Protection

Range [units] Monitoring / AL Indic / Wrn [-]
Default value AL Indic Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
This setpoint adjust the type of protection for Wrn Dual Operation Slave Fail (page 490) alarm.
Transfer Delay
Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 0.1 s

Description
Transition Delay between power sources.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is used in 2 functions:
Delay after GCB opening to MCB closing
Delay used in dual operation function
Delay after GCB opening to MCB closing during the return procedure. Delay after MCB opening to GCB
closing if the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 259) is set to GENRUN.
The time charts bellow show recommended setting of Transfer Delay setpoint.
If the Transfer Delay setpoint is set shorter than the time required for opening of the circuit breaker, the
controller closes GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 434) output straight away (100 ms) after the MCB FEEDBACK
(PAGE 411) input deactivates.
If some delay between MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 411) deactivation and closing of GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE
434) output is required, then the Transfer Delay must be set to sum of "MCB opening" + "Delay" time.
Delay used in dual operation function. This delay is used when load from first Gen-set is transferred to
second Gen-set. Delay starts to countdown when GCB of first Gen-set is open. When this delay countdown,
GCB of second Gen-set is closed. This delay is important for correct function of external interlock.

This delay is also used in dual operation function. This delay is used when load from first Gen-set is
transferred to second Gen-set. Delay starts to countdown when GCB of first Gen-set is open. When this
delay countdown, GCB of second Gen-set is closed. This delay is important for correct function of external
interlock.

Group: Load Shedding
Subgroup: Load Shedding
Load Shedding Active

Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Disabled / Gen only [-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used for adjustment when the load shedding function is active.
Disabled The Load shedding function is disabled. All the outputs are open.
Gen only The function is active when Breaker State (page 380) = IsOper.
Load shedding outputs are activated / deactivated one by one in island
operation
All Loadshedding outputs are tripped once the Gen-set comes into the island
operation from "NO LOAD" operation (MCB and GCB were opened -> Gen-
set started and GCB closed).
Load Shedding Level

Range [units] Load Reconnection Level .. 200 [%] of Nominal Power (page 189)
Step 1%
Setpoint visibility Visible only if Load Shedding Active (page 264) is enabled
Description
This setpoint is used to activates the next Load shedding stage.When Gen-set load exceeds this level for
more than Load Shedding Delay (page 265) time

Load Shedding Delay
Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint is used to proceeds the next Load shedding stage. When Gen-set load exceeds Load
Shedding Level (page 264) for more than this delay's time, the controller proceeds to the next Load
shedding stage – the next binary output Load Shedding Stage 1-2 is active.
Subgroup: Load Reconnectino Settings
Load Reconnection Level

Range [units] 0 .. Load Shedding Level (page 264) [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint is used to proceeds the next Load shedding stage.When Gen-set load exceeds this level for
more than Load Shedding Delay (page 265) time.
Load Reconnection Delay

Step 1s
Description
This setpoint is used to proceeds the lower Load shedding stage. When Gen-set load drops under Load
Reconnection Level (page 265) for more than this delay time, the binary output for higher stage is opened.
Automatic load reconnection works only when Auto Load Reconnection (page 266) = Enabled

Auto Load Reconnection
Step [-]
Description
Switch between manual and automatic reconnection of shedded load..
Rising edge on binary input MANUAL LOAD RECONNECTION (PAGE 410) resets controller
Disabled to the lower stage, but only if the load is under the Load Reconnection Level (page
265). Load Reconnection Delay (page 265) is not taken into account in this case.
Load reconnection is automatic depend on setpoints Load Reconnection Level (page
Enabled 265) and Load Reconnection Delay (page 265). Binary input MANUAL LOAD
RECONNECTION (PAGE 410) has no function.

Group: Analog Switches
Subgroup: Analog Switches 1
AIN Switch01 On
Setpoint group Analog Switches Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] the range is defined by an analog sensor curve
the value is defined by an
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by an analog sensor curve
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 421) is configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 421) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 459) analog input.
Image 8.27 General analog input 1 switch

AIN Switch01 Off
analog sensor curve
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 421) off. The value is measured from

Subgroup: Analog Switches 2
AIN Switch02 On
analog sensor curve
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH02 (PAGE 421) on. The value is measured from

AIN Switch02 Off
analog sensor curve
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH02 (PAGE 421) off. The value is measured from
Group: Scheduler
Subgroup: Time & Date
Time
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] HH:MM:SS [-]
Default value 00:00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Real time clock adjustment.
Note: RTC has backup battery.

Date
Range [units] DD/MM/YYYY [-]
Default value 1.1.2015 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Actual date adjustment.
Time Stamp Period

Range [units] 0 .. 240 [min]
Default value 60 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Description
Time interval for periodic history records.
Note: History record is made only when engine is running.

Summer Time Mode
Range [units] Disabled / Winter / Summer / Winter - S / Summer - S [-]
Step [-]
Description
Behavior of switching between winter and summer time.
Disable Automatic switching between summer and wintertime is disabled.

Winter Automatic switching between summer and wintertime is enabled and it is set to
(Summer) winter (summer) season.
Winter - S
Modification for southern hemisphere.
(Summer - S)

Subgroup: Timer 1
Timer 1 Function
Range [units] Disable / No Func / TEST / Test OnLd / MFail Blk / /Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
It is possible to choose from following timer functions. Binary output EXERCISE TIMER 1 (PAGE 431) is
always activated when Timer is active regardless of chosen timer function. Timer functions require controller
running in AUTO mode.
Timer 1 has higher priority over Timer 2. So if Timer 1 Function (page 273) is configured for OFF mode and
Timer 2 Function (page 281) is over the same time configured for AUTO mode, controller will work in OFF
mode.
Controller activates timer whenever it is powered up even in period, where timer should be already running.
Disable The Timer is disabled.

No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the Remote OFF binary input.
TEST When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the binary input Remote TEST.
TEST OnLd When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the Remote TEST On Load binary input.
MFail Blk When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the Mains Fail Block binary input.

Timer 1 Setup
Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 276)
Timer 1 First Occur. Date

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 273)
Description
Date of first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 273).

Timer 1 First Occur. Time
Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 273).
Timer 1 Duration
Step [-]
Description
Timer 1 Function (page 273) duration time.
Timer 1 Repetition
Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 1 Function (page 273).
Off Timer 1 Function (page 273) will not be activated.

Once Timer 1 Function (page 273) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 1 Function (page 273) will be repeatedly activated.

Timer 1 Repeated
Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 1 Function (page 273).
Daily Timer 1 Function (page 273) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 1 Function (page 273) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 1 Function (page 273) is repeated in chosen day every month or in chosen
days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 1 Function (page 273) is repeated in adjusted period.
Timer 1 Repeat Day

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 1 Function (page 273).
Chose one day in month when Timer 1 Function (page 273) will be
Repeated Day
activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 1 Function (page 273) will be
Repeated Day In Week
activated.

Timer 1 Day
Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down buttons.
To change the value of day use Enter button.
Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week

Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.
Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 1 Function (page 273) will be activated.

Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month
Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 1 Function (page 273) will be activated.

Timer 1 Refresh Period
Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
Refresh period of Timer 1 Function (page 273). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 1 Repeated (page 276).
Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer will
be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 273), the
Timer 1 Function (page 273) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 273),
the Timer 1 Function (page 273) will be activated in selected days adjusted
by Timer 1 Day (page 277).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 273),
Monthly
the Timer 1 Function (page 273) will be activated in selected day of month
adjusted by Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 277) or in selected days
of week of month adjusted by Timer 1 Day (page 277) and Timer 1 Repeat
Week In Month (page 278).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 2,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page
273), the Timer 1 Function (page 273) will be activated.

Timer 1 Weekends
Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Behavior of Timer 1 Function (page 273) on weekends.
Timer 1 Function (page 273) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 1
Including
Function (page 273) can be active.
Timer 1 Function (page 273) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 1
Skip
Function (page 273) isn’t active.
Timer 1 Function (page 273) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 1
Function (page 273) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

Subgroup: Timer 2
Timer 2 Function
Range [units] Disable / No Func / TEST / Test OnLd / MFail Blk / /Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value No Func Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Note: It is possible to choose from following Timer functions. Binary output EXERCISE TIMER 2 (PAGE
431) is always activated when Timer is active regardless of chosen timer function. Timer functions
require controller running in AUTO mode.
Timer 1 has higher priority over Timer 2. So if Timer 1 Function (page 273) is configured for OFF mode and
Timer 2 Function (page 281) is over the same time configured for AUTO mode, controller will work in OFF
mode.
Controller activates timer whenever it is powered up even in period, where timer should be already running.
Disable The Timer is disabled.

No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the Remote OFF binary input.
TEST When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the binary input Remote TEST.
TEST OnLd When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the Remote TEST On Load binary input.
MFail Blk When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the Mains Fail Block binary input.

Timer 2 Setup
Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
Timer 2 Repeat Day (page 284)
Timer 2 First Occur. Date

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 2 Function (page 281).

Timer 2 First Occur. Time
Step [-]
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 281).
Timer 2 Duration
Step [-]
Description
Timer 2 Function (page 281) duration time.
Timer 2 Repetition
Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 2 Function (page 281).
Off Timer 2 Function (page 281) will not be activated.

Once Timer 2 Function (page 281) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 2 Function (page 281) will be repeatedly activated.

Timer 2 Repeated
Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 2 Function (page 281).
Daily Timer 2 Function (page 281) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 2 Function (page 281) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 2 Function (page 281) is repeated in chosen day every month or in chosen
days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 2 Function (page 281) is repeated in adjusted period.
Timer 2 Repeat Day

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 2 Function (page 281).
Chose one day in month when Timer 2 Function (page 281) will be
Repeated Day
activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 2 Function (page 281) will be
Repeated Day In Week
activated.

Timer 2 Day
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down buttons.
To change the value of day use Enter button.
Timer 2 Repeated Day In Week

Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.
Timer 2 Repeat Day In Month

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 2 Function (page 281) will be activated.

Timer 2 Repeat Week In Month
Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 2 Function (page 281) will be activated.

Timer 2 Refresh Period
Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
Refresh period of Timer 2 Function (page 281). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 2 Repeated (page 284).
Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer will
be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 281), the
Timer 2 Function (page 281) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 281),
the Timer 2 Function (page 281) will be activated in selected days adjusted
by Timer 2 Day (page 285).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 281),
Monthly
the Timer 2 Function (page 281) will be activated in selected day of month
adjusted by Timer 2 Repeat Day In Month (page 285) or in selected days
of week of month adjusted by Timer 2 Day (page 285) and Timer 2 Repeat
Week In Month (page 286).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 2,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page
281), the Timer 2 Function (page 281) will be activated.

Timer 2 Weekends
Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Behavior of Timer 2 Function (page 281) on weekends.
Timer 2 Function (page 281) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 2
Including
Function (page 281) can be active.
Timer 2 Function (page 281) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 2
Skip
Function (page 281) isn’t active.
Timer 2 Function (page 281) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 2
Function (page 281) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.
Group: Geo-Fencing
Subgroup: Geo Fencing
Geo-Fencing
Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Disabled / Enabled / LBI Enable [-]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables geo-fencing function.
Fence 1 Protection (page 290) and Fence 2 Protection (page 291) are
Disabled
disabled.
Fence 1 Protection (page 290) and Fence 2 Protection (page 291) are
Enabled
enabled.
Fence 1 Protection (page 290) and Fence 2 Protection (page 291) are enabled
LBI Enable
only when logical binary input .GEO-FENCING ENABLE (PAGE 409) is active.

Subgroup: Position
Home Latitude
Range [units] -90,0000..90,0000 [°]
Default value 0,0000 ° Alternative config NO
Step 0,0001 °
Description
This setpoint adjust latitude of "home" position. Home is position where gen-set should runs. Positions on
north hemisphere have positive value, position on south hemisphere have negative value.
Note: This value with Home Longitude (page 289) are used for counting Fence Radius 1 (page 290)
and Fence Radius 2 (page 292).
Note: This value can be also obtained automatically via logical binary input GEO HOME POSITION (PAGE
409). In case of activation of this binary input for at least 2 seconds, setpoint will be adjusted
automatically from actual coordinates from GPS signal.
Home Longitude
Range [units] -180,0000..180,0000 [°]
Default value 0,0000 ° Alternative config NO
Step 0,0001 °
Description
This setpoint adjust longitude of "home" position. Home is position where gen-set should runs. Positions on
east hemisphere have positive value, position on west hemisphere have negative value.
Note: This value with Home Latitude (page 289) are used for counting Fence Radius 1 (page 290)
and Fence Radius 2 (page 292).
Note: This value can be also obtained automatically via logical binary input GEO HOME POSITION (PAGE
409). In case of activation of this binary input for at least 2 seconds, setpoint will be adjusted
automatically from actual coordinates from GPS signal.

Subgroup: Fence 1
Fence 1 Protection
Range [units] HistRecOnl / Wrn / Sd / BOC[-]
Default value HistRecOnl Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Protection type for geo-fencing 1 protection. Fence of circle area is adjusted by setpoint Fence Radius 1
(page 290). Delay for protection is adjusted by setpoint Fence 1 Delay (page 291).
Protection types
HistRecOnl Position of gen-set is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used
for protection. History record is made if position is out of Fence Radius 1 (page
290).
Wrn Position of gen-set is used for warning protection only. Protection is activated when
position of the gen-set is out of Fence Radius 1 (page 290).
Sd Position of gen-set is used for shutdown protection. Protection is activated when
BOC Position of gen-set is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Protection is activated when position of the gen-set is out of Fence Radius 1 (page
290).
Note: Protection is activated also when GPS signal is lost for Fence 1 Delay (page 291).
Fence Radius 1
Range [units] 0,0..99,9 [km]
Default value 0,0 km Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 km
Description
Radius for circle area 1. When the Gen-set leaves this area, Fence 1 Protection (page 290) is activated
after Fence 1 Delay (page 291).
Note: The center of this circle area is defined by "Home" position – setpoints Home Longitude (page
289) and Home Latitude (page 289).

Fence 1 Delay
Step 1s
Description
Delay for Fence 1 Protection (page 290).
Subgroup: Fence 2
Fence 2 Protection
Range [units] HistRecOnl / Wrn / Sd / BOC[-]
Default value HistRecOnl Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Protection type for geo-fencing 2 protection. Fence of circle area is adjusted by setpoint Fence Radius 2
(page 292). Delay for protection is adjusted by setpoint Fence 2 Delay (page 292).
Protection types
HistRecOnl Position of gen-set is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used
for protection. History record is made if position is out of Fence Radius 2 (page
292).
Wrn Position of gen-set is used for warning protection only. Protection is activated when
Sd Position of gen-set is used for shutdown protection. Protection is activated when
BOC Position of gen-set is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Protection is activated when position of the gen-set is out of Fence Radius 2 (page
292).
Note: Protection is activated also when GPS signal is lost for Fence 2 Delay (page 292).

Fence Radius 2
Range [units] 0,0..99,9 [km]
Default value 0,0 km Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 km
Description
Radius for circle area 2. When the gen-set leaves this area, Fence 2 Protection (page 291) is activated
after Fence 2 Delay (page 292).
Note: The center of this circle area is defined by "Home" position - setpoints Home Longitude (page
289) and Home Latitude (page 289).
Fence 2 Delay
Step 1s
Description
Delay for Fence 2 Protection (page 291).
Group: Plug-In Modules
Subgroup: Slot A
Slot A
Setpoint group Plug-In Modules Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] ENABLED / DISABLED [-]
Default value ENABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enable or disable module in slot A.

Group: CM-RS232-485
Subgroup: COM1 Setting
COM1 Mode
Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Direct / MODBUS / DualSlave / Dual Master [-]
Default value Direct Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Communication protocol switch for the COM1 channel.
Direct InteliConfig communication protocol via serial cable.

MODBUS MODBUS protocol.
DualSlave Dual operation protocol – slave function
DualMaster Dual operation protocol – master function
COM1 Communication Speed

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200[bps]
Default value 57600 bps Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
293)
Description
If the direct mode is selected on COM1 channel, the direct communication speed of controller part of line can
be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.

COM1 MODBUS Communication Speed
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
293)
Description
If the MODBUS mode is selected on COM1 channel, the MODBUS communication speed can be adjusted
here.
Subgroup: COM2 Setting
COM2 Mode
Range [units] Direct / MODBUS / DualSlave / Dual Master [-]
Default value Direct Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Communication protocol switch for the COM2 channel.
Direct InteliConfig communication protocol via serial cable.

MODBUS MODBUS protocol.
DualSlave Dual operation protocol – slave function
DualMaster Dual operation protocol – master function
COM2 Communication Speed

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200[bps]
Step [-]

Setpoint visibility
294)
Description
If the direct mode is selected on COM2 channel, the direct communication speed of controller part of line can
be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.
COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
294)
Description
If the MODBUS mode is selected on COM2 channel, the MODBUS communication speed can be adjusted
here.
Group: CM-4G-GPS
Subgroup: Cellular Interface
Internet Connection
Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjust the communication mode of module.

Network Mode
Range [units] 2G / 3G / 4G / Automatic [-]
Default value Automatic Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts preferred connection type of CM2-4G-GPS module.
Access Point Name

Default value internet Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet Connection
Setpoint visibility
(page 295)
Description
APN (Access Point Name) of the network, provided by GSM operator.

Connection Check IP1
Range [units] [-]
Default value "empty" Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(page 295)
Description
IP address of reliable server in the internet.
To provide maximal reliability of wireless cellular connection the module is equipped with function that
periodically checks the data connection over the cellular network is working.
This function is based on periodical sending of ICMP messages (known as "ping") to reliable servers in the
internet and checking of their responses. If there is not any response received from any of the servers (at
least one setpoint Connection Check IP1, IP2, IP3 is filled with IP address) for certain time period, the
cellular connection is considered as non-working and the module will close and reestablish the connection.
If all three servers are not defined (setpoints Connection Check IP1, IP2, IP3 have empty addresses) then
the cellular connection check is disabled

Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(page 295)
Description

Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(page 295)
Description
Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings
DNS Mode
Range [units] Automatic / Manual [-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables to enter DNS server addresses manually, even with the Internet Connection (page
295) set to Automatic.
Automatic DNS server addresses automatically obtained from a DHCP server are used
DNS IP Address 1 (page 299) and DNS IP Address 2 (page 299) can be
adjusted manually. Use this option to resolve e.g. internet access policy related
Manual
issue, if local DNS server addresses automatically obtained from a DHCP server
do not work

DNS IP Address 1
Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 8.8.8.8 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 1 is adjusted.
If DNS Mode (page 298) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS), which
is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
If DNS Mode (page 298) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is assigned
by the DHCP server.
DNS IP Address 2
Step [-]
Description
If DNS Mode (page 298) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS), which is
needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
If DNS Mode (page 298) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is assigned
by the DHCP server.

IP Firewall
Default value DISABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoints enables to switch on the built-in Firewall functionality.
DISABLED The firewall function is switched off

The firewall function is switched on, use InteliConfig to setup the firewall rules
ENABLED
(configuration card Others – Firewall)
Subgroup: AirGate Settings
AirGate Connection
Range [units] Disabled/ Enabled [-]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(page 295)
Description
This setpoint enable or disable AirGate connection via CM2-4G-GPS.
DISABLED: Only SMS are sent. Internet-enabled SIM card is not required. AirGate is not used.
ENABLED This mode uses the "AirGate" service. Internet-enabled SIM card must be used.
The AirGate server address is adjusted by the setpoint AirGate Address (page
301).
IMPORTANT: When this setpoint is changed the controller has to be restarted to apply
changes.

AirGate Address
CM-4G-GPS; CM-
Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Default value global.airgate.link Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(page 295)
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name or IP address of the AirGate server. Use the free AirGate
server provided by ComAp at global.airgate.link.
Airgate Port
Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Step 1
Setpoint visibility
(page 295)
Description
This port is used for TCP communication with the AirGate server.
Note: Use port 54440 for standard ComAp AirGate service.

Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings
Direct Connection
Step [-]
Description
Use this to enable/disable direct connection of a ComAp client (e.g. InteliConfig) to the IP address of the
controller.
Note: For Direct connection the controller IP address must be reachable from the client IP address.
Direct Connection Port

Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Step [-]
Description
This port is used to listen for an incoming TCP connection if Direct Connection is ENABLED.
ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout

CM-Ethernet
CM-4G-GPS
Step 1s
Description
Connection (TCP socket) is closed by controller, if a client (e.g. InteliConfig) does not communicate for this
time. This timeout applies to both direct and AirGate connection.

Subgroup: E-mail Settings
SMTP Server Address

Default value global.airgate.link:9925 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name (e.g. smtp.yourprovider.com) or IP address (e.g.
74.125.39.109) or number of port (with colon like a first mark) of the SMTP server. Ask your internet provider
or IT manager for this information.
Note: You may use also any public SMTP server which does not require connection over SSL/TLS
channels. If the device is connected to AirGate the AirGate SMTP server at "global.airgate.link" may be
used. Ports 25 and 9925 are supported. After controller connects to AirGate for the first time (or with new
public IP address), it may not be able to send emails for first 5-10 minutes.
SMTP Sender Address

Step [-]
Description
Enter an existing email address into this setpoint. This address will be used as sender address in active e-
mails that will be sent from the controller.
Note: It is not needed to enter an existing email address, nevertheless valid email format needs to be
followed.
IMPORTANT: This item is obligatory when emails are configured.

SMTP User Name
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the username for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.
SMTP User Password

Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server

SMTP Encryption
Range [units] None / SSL-TLS / STARTTLS [-]
Default value None Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(page 295)
Description
Encryption settings of SMTP communication.
NONE E-SMTP protocol without encryption is used.

Communication is started without encryption and then is switched to TLS
STARTTLS
encryption.
TLS Communication runs in TLS encryption.
Email Address 1
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Step [-]
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.

Email Address 2
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Email Address 3
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Email Address 4
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description

Subgroup: Message Settings
E-mail/SMS Language
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] Depends on CU languages [-]
Default value English Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to set the language of SMS and e-mail.
Note: See the chapter Language selection (page 84) for more information.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.
Event Message
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Event Messages.

Wrn Message
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Wrn Messages.
BOC Message
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables BOC Messages.

Sd Messages
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Sd Messages.
Telephone Number 1
Step [-]
Description
Enter in this setpoint either a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call) or
the full international format beginning with a “+” character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

Telephone Number 2
Step [-]
Description
Telephone Number 3
Step [-]
Description

Telephone Number 4
Step [-]
Description
Subgroup: GPS Settings
GPS Tracking
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(page 295)
Description
If GPS tracking is enabled the module sends position/speed data to the controller with period 10 s.

Subgroup: RTC Synchronization
NTP Clock Sync

Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used to enable/disable controller time synchronization with exact time from an NTP server.
NTP Server
Range [units] [-]
Default value pool.ntp.org Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
NTP server address.
GPS Clock Sync

Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(page 295)
Description
This setpoint is used to enable/disable synchronization of the controller's time with the exact time from GPS.
The module sends UTC timestamp to the controller after reset/power on and then in period of 60 minutes.

Time Zone
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 hour Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information about
sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.

Group: CM-Ethernet
Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings
IP Address Mode
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] MANUAL / AUTOMATIC / DISABLED [-]
Default value AUTOMATIC Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the ethernet connection is adjusted.
MANUAL The Ethernet connection is fixed by means of the setpoints IP Addr, NetMask,
GateIP, DNS IP Address.
This method should be used for a classic Ethernet or internet connection. When
this type of connection opens, the controller is specified by its IP address. This
means that it would be inconvenient if the IP address were not fixed (static).
AUTOMATIC The Ethernet connection setting is obtained automatically from the DHCP
server. The obtained settings are then copied to the related setpoints. If the
process of obtaining the settings from the DHCP server is not successful, the
value 000.000.000.000 is copied to the setpoint IP address and the module
continues to try to obtain the settings.
DISABLED The Ethernet terminal is disabled.

IP Address
Step [-]
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint IP Address Mode
Setpoint visibility
(page 314)
Description
The setpoint is used to set the address when you are in static mode.
If IP Address Mode (page 314) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the IP address of the ethernet
interface of the controller. Ask your IT specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 314) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The IP address is assigned by the
DHCP server.
If IP Address Mode (page 314) is DISABLED Ethernet terminal is disabled.
Note: Only valid IP address can be inserted.
Subnet Mask
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(page 314)
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the Subnet Mask is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 314) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the Subnet Mask. Ask your IT
specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 314) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The Subnet Mask is assigned by
the DHCP server.

Gateway IP
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(page 314)
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the Gateway IP is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 314) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the Subnet Mask. Ask your IT
specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 314) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The Subnet Mask is assigned by
the DHCP server.
A gateway is a device which connects the respective segment with the other segments and/or Internet.
DNS Mode
Range [units] Automatic / Manual [-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables to enter DNS server addresses manually, even with the IP Address Mode (page
314) set to Automatic.
Automatic DNS server addresses automatically obtained from a DHCP server are used
DNS IP Address 1 (page 317) and DNS IP Address 2 (page 317) can be
adjusted manually. Use this option to resolve e.g. internet access policy related
Manual
issue, if local DNS server addresses automatically obtained from a DHCP server
do not work

DNS IP Address 1
Step [-]
Description
If IP Address Mode (page 314) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS),
which is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
If IP Address Mode (page 314) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is
assigned by the DHCP server.
DNS IP Address 2
Step [-]
Description
If IP Address Mode (page 314) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS),
which is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
If IP Address Mode (page 314) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is
assigned by the DHCP server.

IP Firewall
Step [-]
Description
This setpoints enables to switch on the built-in Firewall functionality.
DISABLED The firewall function is switched off

The firewall function is switched on, use InteliConfig to setup the firewall rules
ENABLED
(configuration card Others – Firewall)
Subgroup: AirGate Settings
AirGate Connection
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint selects the AirGate connection mode.
DISABLED: This is a standard mode in which the controller listens to the incoming traffic and
answers the TCP/IP queries addressed to it. This mode requires the controller to be
accessible from the remote device (PC), i.e. it must be accessible at a public and
static IP address if you want to connect to it from the internet.
ENABLED This mode enables the AirGate service. The AirGate server address is adjusted by
the setpoint AirGate Address (page 319). Also the standard TCP/IP is enabled.

AirGate Address
CM-Ethernet
CM-4G-GPS
Range [units] [-]
Default value global.airgate.link Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name or IP address of the AirGate server. Use the free AirGate
server provided by ComAp at global.airgate.link.
AirGate Port
Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Step 1
Description
This port is used for TCP data communication with the AirGate server.
Note: Use port 21, 23 or 6127 for standard ComAp AirGate service.

Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings
Direct Connection
Step [-]
Description
Use this to enable/disable direct connection of a ComAp client (e.g. InteliConfig) to the IP address of the
controller.
Note: For Direct connection the controller IP address must be reachable from the client IP address.
Direct Connection Port

Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Step [-]
Description
This port is used to listen for an incoming TCP connection if Direct Connection is ENABLED.
ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout

CM-Ethernet
CM-4G-GPS
Step 1s
Description
Connection (TCP socket) is closed by controller, if a client (e.g. InteliConfig) does not communicate for this
time. This timeout applies to both direct and AirGate connection.

Subgroup: MODBUS Settings
MODBUS Server
Step [-]
Description
Enable or disable Modbus communication via ethernet interface.
MODBUS Client Inactivity Timeout

Step 1s
Description
Modbus connection (TCP socket) is closed by controller, if a Modbus client does not communicate for this
time.
Subgroup: SNMP Settings
SNMP Agent
Step [-]
Description
Enable or disable SNMP Agent.

SNMP Trap Format
Range [units] v1Trap / v2Notif / v2Inform [-]
Default value v1Trap Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts type of SNMP traps.
SNMP Traps IP Address 1

Step [-]
Description
IP address 1 for receiving SNMP Traps. Leave this setpoint blank if SNMP traps should not be send.
SNMP Traps IP Address 2

Step [-]
Description
IP address 2 for receiving SNMP Traps. Leave this setpoint blank if SNMP traps should not be send.

SNMP RD Community String
Default value public Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint SNMP Agent (page
Setpoint visibility
321)
Description
SNMP Community String only for reading.
SNMP WR Community String

Default value private Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint SNMP Agent (page
Setpoint visibility
321)
Description
SNMP Community String for writing and reading.

Subgroup: E-mail Settings
SMTP Server Address

Default value global.airgate.link:9925 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name (e.g. smtp.yourprovider.com) or IP address (e.g.
74.125.39.109) or number of port (with colon like a first mark) of the SMTP server. Ask your internet provider
or IT manager for this information.
Note: You may use also any public SMTP server which does not require connection over SSL/TLS
channels. If the device is connected to AirGate the AirGate SMTP server at "global.airgate.link" may be
used. Ports 25 and 9925 are supported. After controller connects to AirGate for the first time (or with new
public IP address), it may not be able to send emails for first 5-10 minutes.
SMTP Sender Address

Step [-]
Description
Enter an existing email address into this setpoint. This address will be used as sender address in active e-
mails that will be sent from the controller.
Note: It is not needed to enter an existing email address, nevertheless valid email format needs to be
followed.
IMPORTANT: This item is obligatory when emails are configured.

SMTP UserName
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the username for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
SMTP User Password

Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server

SMTP Encryption
Range [units] None / SSL-TLS / STARTTLS [-]
Default value None Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(page 295)
Description
Encryption settings of SMTP communication.
NONE E-SMTP protocol without encryption is used.

Communication is started without encryption and then is switched to TLS
STARTTLS
encryption.
TLS Communication runs in TLS encryption.
Email Address 1
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description

Email Address 2
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Email Address 3
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Email Address 4
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description

Subgroup: Messages Settings
BOC Message
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables BOC Messages.
E-mail/SMS Language
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] Depends on CU languages [-]
Default value English Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to set the language of SMS and e-mail.
Note: See the chapter Language selection (page 84) for more information.

Event Message
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Event Messages.
Sd Messages
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Sd Messages.

Wrn Message
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Wrn Messages.
Subgroup: NTP Settings
NTP Clock Synchronization

Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used to enable/disable controller time synchronization with exact time from an NTP server.
NTP Server
Range [units] [-]
Default value pool.ntp.org Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
NTP server address.

Time Zone
CM-4G-GPS
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 hour Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information about
sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.
Group: EM-BIO8-EFCP
Subgroup: EFCP Settings
Earth Fault Current Protection

Setpoint group EM-BIO8-EFCP Related FW 1.0.0
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint can block or allow Earth fault Current protection.
DISABLED Earth fault current protection is blocked.

ENABLED Earth fault current protection is allowed. Behavior of Earth fault current protection is
set by these setpoints: Earth Fault CT Input Range (page 332), Earth Fault CT
Ratio (page 332), Earth Fault Delay (page 332) and Earth Fault Sd (page 333).

Earth Fault Delay
Range [units] 0,03 .. 5,00 [s]
Step 0,01 s
Description
Delay for Earth Fault Current protection.
Earth Fault CT Input Range

Range [units] 1 [A] / 5 [A]
Default value 5A Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
There are 2 physical inputs for Earth Fault Current Protection (page 331). Value of this setpoint has to be
set on value of physical input which is presently in use.
Earth Fault CT Ratio

Range [units] 1 .. 2000 [1/(1or5) A]
Default value 500 1/(1or5)A Alternative config NO
Step 1 A/ 1A; 1 A/5 A
Description
Earth Fault current transformer ratio.
Note: Type of units depends on setpoint Earth Fault CT Input Range (page 332) which have to be set
before this setpoint.

Earth Fault Sd
Range [units] 0,03 .. 5,00 [A]
Default value 0,30 A Alternative config NO
Step 0,01 [A]
Description
Limit value for Earth Fault Current protection.
Group: CU AIN Calibration
Subgroup: Analog Input 1
CU AIN1 Calibration
Setpoint group CU AIN Calibration Related FW 1.0.0
0 (number of decimal is
given by sensor curve)
Description
Calibrating constant to adjust the measured value of controller analog inputs. Physical dimension of
calibrating constant is corresponding to Analog input.
Note: Unit is adjusted via InteliConfig in configuration of analog input 1.

CU AIN2 Calibration
Description
CU AIN3 Calibration
Description

Group: Alternate Config
Subgroup: Configuration 1
Nominal RPM 1
Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Step 1 RPM
Description
Nominal engine speed (RPM revolutions per minute).
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.
Nominal Frequency 1
Step 1 Hz
Description

Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1
Range [units] 80 .. 20000 [V]
Step 1V
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to neutral).
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1

Range [units] 80 .. 40000 [V]
Step 1V
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection Type 1 (page 337).
Description
Nominal Current 1
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Step 1A
Description
It is current limit for generator current protections and means maximal continuous generator current. Nominal
Current can be different from generator rated current value.

Connection Type 1
Range [units]
Autodetect [-]
Step [-]

Description
Connection type:

Split Phase
Split Phase

Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Split Phase Delta
Autodetect High Leg Delta
L1 >=100V; L1 <=140V
L2 >=140V
or
L3 >=100V; L3 <=140V
3PH3Wire or 3Ph4Wire
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 >=100V
SplPhL1L2
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 <= 20V
SplPhL1L3
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 >=100V
Mono Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 <= 20V
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 402) is active.

ECU Speed Adjustment 1
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50%. This setpoint
Nominal Power 1
Step 1 kW
Description
Nominal power of the Gen-set. Generator Overload BOC (page 237) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 192) is adjusted to Monophase or
SplitphaseL1L2 or SplitphaseL1L3 or 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect detects
connection type as 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire.

Nominal Power Split Phase 1
Step 1 kW
Description
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 192) is adjusted to Autodetect and
Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or SplitphaseL1L2 or SplitphaseL1L3.
Nominal RPM 2
Step 1 RPM
Description

Nominal Frequency 2
Step 1 Hz
Description

Range [units] 80 .. 20000 [V]
Step 1V
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 2 (page 343).
Description

Range [units] 80 .. 40000 [V]
Step 1V
Description

Nominal Current 2
Range [units] 1 .. 10000 [A]
Step 1A
Description
Connection type 2
Range [units]
Autodetect [-]
Step [-]

Description
Connection type:

Split Phase
Split Phase

Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Split Phase Delta
Autodetect
High Leg Delta
L1 >=100V; L1 <=140V
L2 >=140V
or
L3 >=100V; L3 <=140V
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 >=100V
SplPhL1L2
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 <= 20V
SplPhL1L3
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 >=100V
Mono Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 <= 20V

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
Nominal Power 2
Step 1 kW
Description
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type 2 (page 343) is adjusted to Monophase or

Step 1 kW
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 2 (page 343)
Description
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type 2 (page 343) is adjusted to Autodetect and
Nominal RPM 3
Range [units] 100 .. 4 000 [RPM]
Step 1 RPM
Description

Nominal Frequency 3
Step 1 Hz
Description

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Step 1V
Description

Range [units] 80 .. 40 000 [V]
Step 1V
Description

Nominal Current 3
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Step 1A
Description
Connection type 3
Range [units]
Autodetect [-]
Step [-]

Description
Connection type:

Split Phase
Split Phase

Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Split Phase Delta
Autodetect High Leg Delta
L1 >=100V; L1 <=140V
L2 >=140V
or
L3 >=100V; L3 <=140V
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 >=100V
SplPhL1L2
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 <= 20V
SplPhL1L3
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 >=100V
Mono Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 <= 20V

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
Nominal Power 3
Step 1 kW
Description
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type 3 (page 349) is adjusted to Monophase or

Step 1 kW
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 3 (page 349)
Description
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type 3 (page 349) is adjusted to Autodetect and
8.1.3 Values
What values are:
Values (or quantities) are analog or binary data objects, measured or computed by the controller, that are
intended for reading from the controller screen, PC, MODBUS, etc. Values are organized into groups according
to their meaning.
For full list of values go to the chapter List of values (page 354).
Invalid flag
If valid data is not available for a particular value, the invalid flag is set to it. This situation may be due to the
following:
The value is not being evaluated in the scope of the current application and configuration.
Sensor fail has been detected on an analog input.
The configured ECU or extension module does not provide the particular value.
The communication with the ECU or extension module is interrupted.
A value containing the invalid flag is displayed as “####” in InteliConfig and on the controller screen. If such a
value is read out via MODBUS, it will contain the data 32768 in the case of signed values and 65535 in the case
of unsigned values.

List of values
Group: Engine 356 Generator Voltage L2-N 365 Mains Voltage L3-L1 372
RPM 356 Generator Voltage L3-L1 365 Group: Dual operation 372
ECU State 356 Generator Voltage L3-N 365 Master Running Hours 372
ECU Frequency Select 356 Nominal Current 365 Running Hours To Swap 373
ECU AIN 1 357 Nominal Power 366 Slave Running Hours 373
ECU AIN 2 357 Nominal Voltage 366 Group: Controler I/O 373
ECU AIN 3 357 Group: Load 366 Battery Volts 373
ECU AIN 4 357 Load kW 366 D+ 373
ECU AIN 5 358 Load kW L1 366 Analog Input 1 374
ECU AIN 8 358 Load kVAr 367 Binary Inputs 374
ECU AIN 9 359 Load kVAr L1 367 E-Stop 374
ECU AIN 10 359 Load kVAr L2 367 Binary Outputs 375
ECU AIN 11 359 Load kVAr L3 368 Group: Statistics 375
ECU AIN 12 359 Load kVA 368 Genset kWh 375
ECU AIN 13 360 Load kVA L1 368 Genset kVArh 375
ECU AIN 14 360 Load kVA L2 368 Mains kWh 375
ECU AIN 15 360 Load kVA L3 368 Mains kVArh 376
ECU AIN 16 360 Load Power Factor 369 Maintenance Timer 1

RunHours 376
ECU AIN 17 361 Load Character 369
Maintenance Timer 1
ECU AIN 18 361 Load Power Factor L1 369
Interval 376
ECU AIN 19 361 Load Character L1 369
Maintenance Timer 2
ECU AIN 20 361 Load Power Factor L2 369
RunHours 376
ECU-AIN-EXT-1 362 Load Character L2 370
Maintenance Timer 2
ECU-AIN-EXT-2 362 Load Power Factor L3 370 Interval 376
Speed Request 362 Load Character L3 370 Maintenance Timer 3
Requested RPM 363 Load Current L1 370 RunHours 377
DPF Soot Load 363 Load Current L2 370 Maintenance Timer 3
DPF Ash Load 363 Load Current L3 371 Interval 377
DEF Level 363 Group: Mains 371 Num E-Stops 377
Group: Generator 364 Mains Frequency 371 Shutdowns 377

Earth Fault Current 364 Mains Voltage L1-N 371 Total Fuel Consumption 378
Generator Frequency 364 Mains Voltage L2-N 371 Time Till Empty 1 378
Generator Voltage L1-L2 364 Mains Voltage L3-N 371 Time Till Empty 2 378
Generator Voltage L1-N 364 Mains Voltage L1-L2 372 Time Till Empty 3 379
Generator Voltage L2-L3 364 Mains Voltage L2-L3 372 Num Starts 379

Running Hours 379 GPS Status 387 PLC Resource 2 398
Group: Info 379 Latitude 387 PLC Resource 3 398
Active Application 379 Longitude 388 PLC Resource 4 399
Application 380 Active Satellites 388 PLC Resource 5 399
Breaker State 380 Speed 388 PLC Resource 6 399
Connection Type 380 HomePosDist 388 PLC Resource 7 399
Engine State 380 AirGate Status 389 PLC Resource 8 399
FW Branch 380 AirGate ID 389 6 back to Controller
FW Version 381 AirGate Servicing Node 389 objects
ID String 381 IP Address 390
Load Shedding Status 381 Primary DNS 390
SPI Module A 381 Secondary DNS 390
Timer Text 381 Modem Status 390
Timer Value 382 Group: CM-Ethernet 392
Group: Log Bout 382 ETH Interface Status 392
Log Bout 1 382 Current IP Address 392
Log Bout 2 382 Current Subnet Mask 392
Log Bout 3 382 Current Gateway 392
Log Bout 4 382 Primary DNS 393
Log Bout 5 383 Secondary DNS 393
Log Bout 6 383 AirGate ID 393
Log Bout 7 383 AirGate Servicing Node 393
Log Bout 8 383 AirGate Status 394
Log Bout 9 383 Last Email Results 395
Group: Fixed Protection MAC Address 395
States 384 Ethernet PHY Mode 396
Fixed Protections States 1 384
Group: Date/Time 396
Fixed Protections States 2 384 Date 396
Fixed Protections States 3 384 Time 396
Fixed Protections States 4 384
Group: Plug-In I/O 396
Fixed Protections States 5 385 EM BIO A 396
Group: User Protection Group: PLC 397
States 385 PLC-BOUT 1 397
User Protections States 1 385
PLC-BOUT 2 397
Group: CM-4G-GPS 385
PLC-BOUT 3 397
Signal Strength 385
PLC-BOUT 4 397
Network Status 385
PLC-BOUT 5 397
Last Email Result 386
PLC-BOUT 6 398
Network Name 387
PLC-BOUT 7 398
Network Mode 387
PLC Resource 1 398

Group: Engine
RPM
Value group Engine Related FW 1.0.0

Units RPM
Description
This value contains the current engine speed. The value is obtained from one of the following sources:
ECU, if an ECU is configured
Pickup input
Generator frequency
6 back to List of values
ECU State

Units -
Description
Shows binary status (0 or 1) of ECU:
ECU Yellow Lamp
ECU Red Lamp
Wait To Start
ECU Frequency Select

Units -
Description
Shows selected frequency of ECU. The value is calculated from setpoint Nominal Frequency (page 198)
If is Nominal Frequency (page 198) in range from 45 Hz to 54 Hz, is considered as 50 Hz
application. The value is set to 0.
If is Nominal Frequency (page 198) in range from 55 Hz to 65 Hz, is considered as 60 Hz
application. The value is set to 1.

ECU AIN 1

Units Depends on ECU value
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.
ECU AIN 2

Description
ECU AIN 3

Description
ECU AIN 4

Description

ECU AIN 5

Description
ECU AIN 6

Description
ECU AIN 7

Description
ECU AIN 8

Description

ECU AIN 9

Description
ECU AIN 10

Description
ECU AIN 11

Description
ECU AIN 12

Description

ECU AIN 13

Description
ECU AIN 14

Description
ECU AIN 15

Description
ECU AIN 16

Description

ECU AIN 17

Description
ECU AIN 18

Description
ECU AIN 19

Description
ECU AIN 20

Description

ECU-AIN-EXT-1

Description
ECU-AIN-EXT-2

Description
Speed Request

Units %
Description
This value contains the speed control signal expressed in %.
Speed request Requested speed Accelerator pedal position

0% 1350 RPM 0%
50% 1500 RPM 50%
100% 1650 RPM 100%
Note: Accelerator pedal position will be 0 if the engine is not running or loaded.

Requested RPM

Units RPM
Description
This value contains the speed which is currently requested by the controller from the attached ECU.
This value is used for digital interfacing (via a communication bus) with ECUs that require the requested
speed directly in RPM.
DPF Soot Load

Units %
Description
Indicates the soot load percentage of diesel particulate filter (DPF).
DPF Ash Load

Units %
Description
Indicates the ash load percentage of diesel particulate filter (DPF).
DEF Level

Units %
Description
The level of diesel exhaust fluid tank.

Group: Generator
Earth Fault Current
Value group Generator Related FW 1.0.0

Units A
Description
Measured value of fault for evaluation of earth fault protection.
Generator Frequency

Units Hz
Description
Frequency of generator.
Generator Voltage L1-L2

Units V
Description
Generator phase to phase voltage between L1 and L2 phases.
Generator Voltage L1-N

Units V
Description
Generator voltage on phase 1.

Units V
Description


Units V
Description

Units V
Description

Units V
Description
Nominal Current

Units A
Description
Generator nominal current.
Note: Visible only when Connection type (page 192) = Autodetect.

Nominal Power

Units V
Description
Generator nominal power.
Nominal Voltage

Units V
Description
Generator nominal voltage.
Group: Load
Load kW
Value group Load Related FW 1.0.0

Units kW
Description
Load active power.
Load kW L1

Units kW
Description
Load active power in phase L1.

Load kW L2

Units kW
Description
Load kW L3

Units kW
Description
Load kVAr

Units kVAr
Description
Load reactive power.
Load kVAr L1

Units kVAr
Description
Load reactive power in phase L1.
Load kVAr L2

Units kVAr
Description

Load kVAr L3

Units kVAr
Description
Load kVA

Units kVA
Description
Load apparent power.
Load kVA L1

Units kVA
Description
Load apparent power L1.
Load kVA L2

Units kVA
Description
Load kVA L3

Units kVA
Description

Load Power Factor
Load Load Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Description
Generator power factor.
Load Character

Units [-]
Description
Character of the load. "L" means inductive load, "C" is capacitive and "R" is resistive load (power factor = 1).
Load Power Factor L1

Units [-]
Description
Generator power factor in phase L1.
Load Character L1

Units [-]
Description
Character of the generator load in the L1 phase. "L" means inductive load, "C" is capacitive and "R" is
resistive load (power factor = 1).

Units [-]
Description

Load Character L2

Units [-]
Description

Units [-]
Description
Load Character L3

Units [-]
Description
Load Current L1

Units A
Description
Load current phase L1.
Load Current L2

Units A
Description

Load Current L3

Units A
Description
Group: Mains
Mains Frequency
Value group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units Hz
Description
Frequency of Mains.
Mains Voltage L1-N

Units V
Description
Mains voltage on phase 1.
Mains Voltage L2-N

Units V
Description
Mains Voltage L3-N

Units V
Description

Mains Voltage L1-L2

Units V
Description
Mains phase to phase voltage between L1 and L2 phases.
Mains Voltage L2-L3

Units V
Description
Mains Voltage L3-L1

Units V
Description
Group: Dual operation
Master Running Hours
Value group Dual operation Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Description
This is actual value of running hours of Master controller used in dual operation function (Running Hours
(page 379) + Running Hours Base (page 260)).

Running Hours To Swap

Units
Description
This value shows how long it will take until the swap between gen-sets will be made.
Slave Running Hours

Units
Description
This is actual value of running hours of Slave controller used in dual operation function (Running Hours
(page 379) + Running Hours Base (page 260)).
Group: Controler I/O
Battery Volts
Value group Controler I/O Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Description
Controller supply voltage.
D+

Units V
Description
D+ terminal voltage.

Analog Input 1

Units Configurable
Description
This is the value of the analog input 1 of the controller.
Analog Input 2

Units Configurable
Description
Analog Input 3

Units Configurable
Description
Binary Inputs

Units [-]
Description
State of the binary inputs of the controller.
E-Stop

Units %
Description
Shows number of E-STOP input – the same principle of visualization like binary inputs.
Principle of value (principle of normally close binary input):
1 – E-STOP has voltage – state is OK
0 – E-STOP has no voltage – protection is active

Binary Outputs

Units [-]
Description
State of the binary outputs of the controller.
Group: Statistics
Genset kWh
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.0.0

Units kWh
Description
Counter of Gen-set active power.
Genset kVArh

Units kVArh
Description
Counter of Gen-set reactive power.
Mains kWh

Units kWh
Description
Counter of mains active power.

Mains kVArh

Units kVArh
Description
Counter of mains reactive power.

Units hours
Description
Statistic value for Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours (page 232).

Units hours
Description
Statistic value for Maintenance Timer 1 Interval (page 233).

Units hours
Description

Units hours
Description


Units hours
Description

Units hours
Description
Num E-Stops

Units [-]
Description
Emergency stop alarms counter.
Note: This value counts only in case that Gen-set was stopped due to E-Stop or Emergency Stop.
Shutdowns

Units [-]
Description
Shutdown alarms counter. This counter counts all occurrences of a shutdown alarm, not only real shutdowns
of the Gen-set, i.e. the counter is increased by 2 if two shutdown alarms appear simultaneously.

Total Fuel Consumption

Units L
Description
Value containing total amount of consumed fuel by engine. The controller automatically updates this value
every 30 s. The controller can calculate it in three ways:
Direct reading from ECU
Calculation based on actual fuel consumption reading from ECU
Calculation from fuel level drop in tank (using Fuel Level Analog Input + Fuel Tank Volume (page
227) setpoint)
Note: The accuracy of Total Fuel Consumption depends on the precision of ECU values or precision of
Fuel Tank Volume (page 227) and fuel level sensor.
Time Till Empty 1

Units days
Description
Assessment in days when the fuel tank will be empty.
Note: This value is based on setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 227) and value from ECU Fuel Rate.
For correct calculation of this value is necessary to have configured ECU which send Fuel Rate value,
otherwise this value can’t be calculated.
Time Till Empty 2

Units hours
Description
Assessment in hours when the fuel tank will be empty.

Time Till Empty 3

Units minutes
Description
Assessment in minutes when the fuel tank will be empty.
Num Starts

Units [-]
Description
Engine start commands counter. The counter is increased by 1 even if the particular start command will take
more than one attempt.
Running Hours

Units hours
Description
Engine operation hours counter. The engine hours are incremented in the controller while the engine is
running.
Note: If an ECU is configured and it provides engine hours value, the value is taken from the ECU.
Group: Info
Active Application
Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Description
This Value mirrors the active application in the controller.
Example: AMF or MRS.

Application

Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual application in controller.
Example: AMF25, AMF20, AMF9, AMF8 or MRS16.
Breaker State

Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual "breaker state" message which is shown on the main screen of the controller.
Connection Type

Units [-]
Description
The text of this value represents the connection type which is adjusted in setpoint Connection type (page
192).
Engine State

Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual "engine state" message which is shown on the main screen of the controller.
FW Branch

Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual branch of firmware in controller.

FW Version

Units [-]
Description
Major and minor firmware version number.
ID String

Units [-]
Description
Name of controller which is used in InteliConfig in command bar.
Load Shedding Status

Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual "load shedding stage". The Value can get the values of the range 0 to 2, where 0
means no load shedding stage is active and 1, 2 means that the corresponding load shedding stage is active.
SPI Module A

Units [-]
Description
The name of plug-in module which is inserted in slot A.
Timer Text

Units [-]
Description
The value contains the "Current process timer" text which is shown on the main screen of the controller.

Timer Value

Units [HH:MM:SS]
Description
The value contains the "Current process timer" value which is shown on the main screen of the controller.
Group: Log Bout
Log Bout 1
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Description
State of binary outputs.
Log Bout 2

Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 3

Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 4

Units [-]
Description

Log Bout 5

Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 6

Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 7

Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 8

Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 9

Units [-]
Description

Group: Fixed Protection States
Fixed Protections States 1
Fixed Protection
Value group Related FW 1.0.0
States
Units [-]
Description
Values of LBO Fixed Protections State.
Fixed Protection
States
Units [-]
Description
Fixed Protection
States
Units [-]
Description
Fixed Protection
States
Units [-]
Description

Fixed Protection
States
Units [-]
Description
Group: User Protection States
User Protections States 1
Value group User Protection States Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Description
Values of LBO User Protections State.
Group: CM-4G-GPS
Signal Strength
Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units %
Description
This value contains information about relative strength of the cellular signal received by the CM2-4G-GPS
module. It is a relative value helping to find the best signal and for troubleshooting cases.
Network Status

Units [-]
Description
The text of this value represents the status of the GSM modem.
Code Description
Not availab Not available
Available Available
Attached Attached

Last Email Result

Units [-]
Description
Result of last email, which was sent by controller.
Code Description
0 Email was successfully sent.
2 It is not possible to establish connection with SMTP server.
3 SMTP server is not ready for communication.
4 Maximum length of data can’t be read.
5 No appeal to send command.
6 Command can’t be send.
7 Command can’t be send.
8 HELO command was refused.
11 AUTH LOGIN command was refused.
12 Wrong user name.
13 Wrong password.
14 MAIL FROM command was refused.
15 RCPT TO command was refused.
16 DATA command was refused.
17 Sending of email failed.
18 SMTP server refused the data of email.
19 SMTP server refused the data of email.
20 QUIT command was refused.
21 Lost of connection.
23 Error during closing the connection.
24 No answer from server.
25 It is impossible to create data for command DATA.
26 It is impossible to read data for command DATA.
28 Error of encoding.
29 There was no attempt to send email.

Network Name

Units [-]
Description
The name of operator which to SIM card is connected.
Note: If roaming service is used then prefix "R" is added before the name of operator.
Network Mode

Units [-]
Description
The type of data connection.
GPS Status

Units [-]
Description
Value describing the GPS signal.
Code Description
Undefined GPS signal is not available. Check antenna connection.
Searching Looking up for signal from available satellites.
Fixed GPS signal available.
Latitude

Units [-]
Description
Actual GPS latitude. Positions on north hemisphere have positive value, position on south hemisphere have
negative value.

Longitude

Units [-]
Description
Actual GPS longitude. Positions on east hemisphere have positive value, position on west hemisphere have
negative value.
Active Satellites

Units [-]
Description
Number of available satellites for GPS location.
Speed

Units [-]
Description
Actual speed of the controller calculated from the GPS coordinates.
HomePosDist

Units km
Description
Actual distance from home position. Home position is adjusted via setpoints Home Latitude (page 289)
and Home Longitude (page 289) or by binary input GEO HOME POSITION (PAGE 409).

AirGate Status

Units [-]
Description
Diagnostic code for AirGate connection. Helps in troubleshooting.
AirGate Status
Code Description
Not defined Setpoint AirGate Connection is Disabled
Wait to connect Waiting to connect
Resolving Resolving
Connecting Connecting
Creat sec chan Creating secure channel
Registering Registering
Conn inoperable Connected, inoperable
Conn operable Connected, operable
Susp AGkeyEmpty AirGate is not set in the controller
AirGate ID

Units [-]
Description
Identification string generated by AirGate server for the purpose of establishing communication via
InteliConfig or any other supported PC tool.
AirGate Servicing Node

Units [-]
Description
IP address of AirGate 2 node to which the module is currently attached.

IP Address

Units [-]
Description
IP address of the controller.
Primary DNS
CM-Ethernet
CM-4G-GPS
Units [-]
Description
Current domain name server of the Ethernet interface.
Secondary DNS

Units [-]
Description
Backup domain name server of the Ethernet interface.
Modem Status

Units [-]

Description
The text of this value represents the status of the modem.
Modem Status
Code Description
OK Module successfully initialized and connected to the cellular network
E01 Unsuccessful restore to the factory settings
E02 Modem configuration error
SIM not inserted or locked by PIN.
E SIM Use another device (e.g. mobile phone) to disable the option for SIM
to be locked by PIN
It is not possible to set manually chosen network mode
E04
2G/3G/4G/Automatic
It is not possible to register into cellular network. Possible reasons:
E registration No signal (no coverage, broken or unconnected antenna)
Manually chosen network mode 2G/3G/4G is not available
It is not possible to set PDP (Packet Data Protocol) context for defined
APN (Access Point Name). Possible reasons:
E context
Setpoint Access Point Name is not correctly set (format)
Wrong PDP context number
It is not possible to connect to cellular network (ATD*99***context) Possible
E connect reasons:
Setpoint Access Point Name is not correctly set (wrong text)
E09 It is not possible to get signal strength
E10 It is not possible to get operator name
E11 Loss of registration into cellular network was detected
E12 Data error
E13 Data error
E14 Modem was restarted
It is not possible to send SMS. Possible reasons:
E SMS send Wrong number
SIM doesn’t support SMS
E18 Modem hardware configuration error
E conn lost Loss of connection with cellular network
Restart-config Modem was restarted due to the change of controller setpoint
Restart-app Modem was restarted due to the performed cellular connection check

Group: CM-Ethernet
ETH Interface Status
Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Description
Current status of ethernet communication.
Current IP Address

Units [-]
Description
Current IP address of the controller.
Current Subnet Mask

Units [-]
Description
Current subnet mask.
Current Gateway

Units [-]
Description
Current gateway address.

Primary DNS
CM-Ethernet
CM-4G-GPS
Units [-]
Description
Current domain name server of the Ethernet interface.
Secondary DNS

Units [-]
Description
Backup domain name server.
AirGate ID

Units [-]
Description
Identification string generated by AirGate server for the purpose of establishing communication via
InteliConfig or any other supported PC tool.
AirGate Servicing Node

Units [-]
Description
IP address of AirGate 2 node to which the module is currently attached.

AirGate Status

Units [-]
Description
Diagnostic code for AirGate connection. Helps in troubleshooting.
Code Description
Resolving Resolving

Last Email Results

Units [-]
Description
Result of last email, which was sent by controller.
Code Description
0 Email was successfully sent.
2 It is not possible to establish connection with SMTP server.
3 SMTP server is not ready for communication.
8 HELO command was refused.
9 EHLO command was refused.
11 AUTH LOGIN command was refused.
12 Wrong user name.
13 Wrong password.
14 MAIL FROM command was refused.
15 RCPT TO command was refused.
16 DATA command was refused.
17 Sending of email failed.
20 QUIT command was refused.
25 It is impossible to create data for command DATA.
26 It is impossible to read data for command DATA.
27 Email address can’t be read.
30 SMTP server address translation error (from DNS server).
31 Error reading email content data (24327).
MAC Address

Units [-]
Description
Current MAC address of the controller ethernet interface.

Ethernet PHY Mode

Units [-]
Description
Ethernet interface mode:
10- HD 10 Mbit Half-Duplex

10- FD 10 Mbit Full-Duplex
100- HD 100 Mbit Half-Duplex
10- FD 100 Mbit Full-Duplex
Group: Date/Time
Date
Value group Date/Time Related FW 1.0.0

Units DD.MM.YYYY
Description
Shows setup date.
Time
Value group Date/Time Related FW 1.0.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Description
Shows setup time.
Group: Plug-In I/O
EM BIO A
Value group Plug-In I/O Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Description
Binary inputs from extension module in slot A.

Group: PLC
PLC-BOUT 1
Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.
PLC-BOUT 2

Units [-]
Description
PLC-BOUT 3

Units [-]
Description
PLC-BOUT 4

Units [-]
Description
PLC-BOUT 5

Units [-]
Description

PLC-BOUT 6

Units [-]
Description
PLC-BOUT 7

Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 1

Units [-]
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).
PLC Resource 2

Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 3

Units [-]
Description

PLC Resource 4

Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 5

Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 6

Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 7

Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 8

Units [-]
Description

8.1.4 Logical binary inputs
What Logical binary inputs are:
Logical binary inputs are inputs for binary values and functions.
Alphabetical groups of Logical binary inputs

LBI: A 402
LBI: C 404
LBI: D 405
LBI: E 406
LBI: F 407
LBI: G 408
LBI: H 409
LBI: I 409
LBI: M 410
LBI: O 412
LBI: P 412
LBI: R 413
LBI: S 417
For full list of Logical binary inputs go to the chapter Logical binary inputs alphabetically (page 401).

Logical binary inputs alphabetically
Access Lock 402 Remote OFF 415

Alternate Config 2 402 Remote Start/Stop 416
Alternate Config 3 402 Remote TEST 417
AMF Start Block 402 Sd Override 417
Application AMF 403 Start Button 417
Application MRS 403 Stop Button 418
ATT Force Regen 403
6 back to Controller
ATT Inhibit Regen 403 objects
ATT Interlock 404
Choke Inhibit 404
Dark Mode 405
Dual Swap Gen-sets 405
Dual Top Priority 405
ECU Speed Down 406
ECU Speed Up 406
Emergency MAN 406
Emergency Stop 407
Fault Reset Button 407
Fuel Pump On/Off 407
GCB Button 408
GCB Feedback 408
Geo Home Position 409
Geo-Fencing Enable 409
Horn Reset Button 409
Idle Speed 409
Mains Fail Block 410
Manual Load
Reconnection 410
MCB Button 410
MCB Feedback 411
Oil Pressure 412
Prestart Bypass 412
Protection Force Disable 413
Rem TEST On Load 413
Remote AUTO 414
Remote Ctrl Lock 414
Remote MAN 414

LBI: A
Access Lock
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1
Description
When this input is active, no setpoints can be adjusted from controller's front panel and controller mode (OFF
/ MAN / AUTO / TEST) cannot be changed. The front panel buttons can not be used as well.
Note: Access Lock does not protect setpoints and mode changing from InteliConfig. To avoid
unqualified changes the selected setpoints have to be password protected.
Also the buttons Fault Reset and Horn Reset are not blocked at all and buttons Start and Stop
in MAN mode are not blocked.
6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Alternate Config 2
Comm object 859
Description
This binary input can switch between configuration sets. When this binary input is active, setpoints in
Alternate Config group are switched to the second set (setpoints with number 2).
IMPORTANT: If LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 429) is used, change of alternate configuration
can be made only in prestart phase. So prestart has to be set up for enough long time.

Alternate Config 3
Comm object 860
Description
This binary input can switch between configuration sets. When this binary input is active, setpoints in
Alternate Config group are switched to the third set (setpoints with number 3).
IMPORTANT: If LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 429) is used, change of alternate configuration
can be made only in prestart phase. So prestart has to be set up for enough long time.

AMF Start Block
Comm object 211
Description
This binary input can allow or block the AMF start. In case of running Gen-set in AUTO mode Gen-set goes
to cooling procedure and stops.

Application AMF
Comm object 1008
Description
LBI is used to select AMF mode. It has higher priority than the setpoint Default Application Select (page
201).

Application MRS
Comm object 1009
Description
LBI is used to select MRS mode. It has higher priority than the setpoint Default Application Select (page
201).

ATT Force Regen
Comm object 680
Description
Aftertreatment Regeneration Force Switch
User manually activates regeneration function
Push-button control – function activated by pulse (signals longer than 5 seconds will be carried as
long as the input is active)

ATT Inhibit Regen
Comm object 679
Description
Aftertreatment Regeneration Inhibit Switch
User blocks automatic regeneration function
2 state switch control – function activated by still signal

ATT Interlock
Comm object 956
Description
ATT Regeneration Interlock
User manually allows the regeneration (not same as Regen Force)
2-state switch control – function activated by still signal
Interlock activates Regeneration State after set of conditions is met, only after that the signal is
activated
LBI: C
Choke Inhibit
Comm object 946
Description
Logical binary input CHOKE INHIBIT prevent Choke functionality when logical binary output CHOKE (PAGE
427) is activated. If CHOKE INHIBIT is activated when CHOKE LBO is active, CHOKE LBO is deactivated
immediately and vice versa if LBI CHOKE INHIBIT is deactivated and LBO CHOKE should be active then is
activated.

LBI: D
Dark Mode
Comm object 930
Description
This binary input activates function of dark mode. It means that backlight of display is turn off (information on
controller screens are not affected) and LEDs (Mains, Generator, Load, Breakers, etc.) are turn off (LEDs
don’t react on normal condition of their activation and deactivation).
Note: After deactivation of dark mode, backlight of display is turned on and then behaves normally.
Note: After deactivation of dark mode, Front Face status LEDs are turned on due to current situation of
gen-set.

Dual Swap Gen-sets
Comm object 947
Description
This LBI enables or disables swapping of gen-sets on load in dual operation. This LBI has higher priority then
setpoint Swap Gen-sets (page 260). This LBI is accepted only in Master controller.

Dual Top Priority
Comm object 954
Description
This LBI defines, which gen-set has higher priority in dual operation mode. If this LBI is active on one gen-
set, this gen-set is used in dual operation function (running hours values are not used to decide, which gen-
set should start).
Setpoint Swap Gen-sets (page 260) or LBI DUAL SWAP GEN-SETS (PAGE 405) has higher priority than this
LBI.
Example: Engine 1 is running. LBI Top Priority is activated on engine 2. If swapping of gen-sets is
disabled, nothing happens. If swapping of gen-sets is enabled, engine 2 is started and engine 1 is
stopped.
Note: If this LBI is active on both gen-sets, the behavior is not changed. Decision is based on running
hours values.

LBI: E
ECU Speed Down
Comm object 164
Description
This binary input is used to set the setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment (page 232) by binary inputs. When the
LBI is activated the setpoint is decreased by 2%.

ECU Speed Up
Comm object 165
Description
This binary input is used to set the setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment (page 232) by binary inputs. When the
LBI is activated the setpoint is increase by 2%.

Emergency MAN
Comm object 45
Description
This input is designed to allow the Gen-set system or breakers to be controlled externally, not by the
controller. This feature can be useful in case of some failure, which disables the Gen-set or breakers to be
controlled by the controller, but the gen-set itself is operational.
The controller behaves in the following way:
Shows the text EmergMan in the engine status on the main screen.
Stops all functions regarding the Gen-set or breaker control, deactivates all outputs related to it.
Stop Fail alarm is not being evaluated and stop solenoid is not activated if nonzero speed is detected.
When the input is deactivated, the controller takes control according to the situation in the moment of
deactivation, i.e. the Gen-set remains running loaded if it was running and GCB was closed in the
moment the input was deactivated.

Emergency Stop
Comm object 40
Description
The shutdown procedure will start immediately when this input is activated.
Note: In case of controller hardware or software fail, safe stop of the engine doesn’t have to be ensured.
To back-up the Emergency Stop function it is recommended to connect separate circuit for
disconnection of Fuel Solenoid and Starter signals.
For more detail see chapter Recommended wiring.
LBI: F
Fault Reset Button
Comm object 191
Description
Binary input has the same function as Fault Reset button on the InteliLite 4 front panel.

Fuel Pump On/Off
Comm object 694
Description
This binary input is used for manual control of binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 432). The output is
deactivated automatically as soon as fuel level reaches 100 %.
Note: This binary input is basically designed for ON and OFF switch (switch with arrestment in these
positions) because controller reacts to rising and falling edge of signal in this input.
output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 432) is control by this binary input.
IMPORTANT: It is necessary to configure analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 460) for proper
function of this binary input.

LBI: G
GCB Button
Comm object 193
Description
Binary input has the same function as GCB button on the InteliLite 4 front panel. It is evaluated in MAN
mode only.

GCB Feedback
Comm object 63
Description
Use this input for indication whether the generator circuit breaker is open or closed.
Image 8.31 GCB Feedback 1
Image 8.32 GCB Feedback 2
Note: InteliLite 4 controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

Geo Home Position
Comm object 219
Description
This binary input can be used to adjust home position of gen-set. In case that binary input is active, setpoints
Home Latitude (page 289) and Home Longitude (page 289) are adjusted automatically from actual
coordinates from GPS signal.
Note: Input has to be activated for at least 2 seconds.

Geo-Fencing Enable
Comm object 218
Description
This binary input enables or disables Fence 1 Protection (page 290) and Fence 2 Protection (page 291) if
Group: Geo-Fencing (page 288) is adjusted to value "LBI Enable".
LBI: H
Horn Reset Button
Comm object 192
Description
Binary input has the same function as Horn reset button on the InteliLite 4 front panel.
LBI: I
Idle Speed
Comm object 624
Description
This binary input changes cooling speed from nominal to idle.

LBI: M
Mains Fail Block
Comm object 622
Description
If the input is active, the automatic start of the Gen-set at Mains failure is blocked. In case of running Gen-
set in AUTO mode, timer Mains Return Delay (page 247) is started and when it elapses GCB is opened,
Gen-set goes to cooling procedure and stops. When GCB is opened after Transfer Delay (page 261) the
MCB is closed.
Note: This input simulates healthy Mains.

Manual Load Reconnection
Comm object 60
Description
This input is used for manual reconnection of the last disconnected part of the load, if the load has dropped
below the setpoint Load Reconnection Level (page 265). This works only if automatic reconnection is
disabled, i.e. the setpoint Auto Load Reconnection (page 266) = Disabled.

MCB Button
Comm object 194
Description
This binary input has the same function as MCB button on the InteliLite 4 front panel. It is evaluated in
MAN mode only.

MCB Feedback
Comm object 65
Description
Use this input for indication whether the mainsbus circuit breaker is open or closed.
Image 8.33 MCB Feedback 1
Image 8.34 MCB Feedback 2
Note: InteliLite 4 controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the

LBI: O
Oil Pressure
Comm object 43
Description
Binary input for Oil Pressure indication.
IMPORTANT: This binary input is also used for evaluating engine running condition.
Example: Normally close connection – when LBI is active then oil pressure is OK and is higher than
starting oil pressure.
Note: In case that you want to use binary input Oil Pressure just for protection please create new binary
input with User protection.
LBI: P
Prestart Bypass
Comm object 42
Description
While this LBI is active, Gen-set skips prestart phase.

Protection Force Disable
Comm object 16
Description
Activation of this LBI disables selected protections.
Proper history record is written to the history log.
Protection Force Disable active
Protection Force Disable inactive
Note: Some of the fixed protections has possibility tu turn off. These protections has dedicated
setpoints located in setpoint group Protections. Setpoints have options: Enabled, Disabled (protection is
turned off), ExtDisabled (protection is turned off by LBI).
LBI: R
Rem TEST On Load
Comm object 61
Description
Closing of the GCB in MRS or transferring of the load from the mains to Gen-set in AMF.
Application TEST Remote TEST On Load

Active: Gen-set is put to TEST mode. On the top of it the GCB is
Gen-set started
closed. The same behavior like the REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE
and running until
MRS 416).
the TEST mode
Inactive: Gen-set comes back to the original mode and behaves
deactivated.
accordingly to this mode and other conditions.
Active: Gen-set is put to TEST mode. On the top of it the load is
Gen-set started transferred to the Gen-set.
and running until Inactive: Gen-set comes back to the original mode and behaves
AMF
the TEST mode accordingly to this mode and other conditions. (the load can be
deactivated. transferred back to the mains (OFF, AUTO) or stay on the Gen-set
(MAN).

Remote AUTO
Comm object 620
Description
The controller is switched to the AUTO mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
binary input is active. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.
This binary input has the lowest priority from Remote OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST binary inputs
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

Remote Ctrl Lock
Comm object 4
Description
If the input is active, the controller will not accept any actions regarding the system control – e.g. writing of
commands and setpoint changes via remote communication interfaces.

Remote MAN
Comm object 618
Description
The controller is switched to the MAN mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
Remote TEST
Remote MAN

Remote OFF
Comm object 617
Description
The controller is switched to the OFF mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
Remote TEST
Remote MAN

Remote Start/Stop
Comm object 38
Description
Use this input to start and stop the Gen-set in AUTO and TEST mode.
Note: If the binary input Remote Start/Stop is active and engine is running and mains failure occurs, the
MCB breaker opens, after Transfer Delay (page 261) the GCB breaker is closed. Once the mains is
OK, the Mains Return Delay (page 247) elapses and the GCB breaker is opened. Then after Transfer
Delay (page 261) is MCB breaker closed. Gen-set remains running as long as binary input Rem
Start/Stop is active. For more details see timing diagram below.
Image 8.35 Remote Start/Stop
Taken action in AMF application (AUTO Mode)

Start the Gen-set and stay running with opened GCB if Mains OK.
Active Go to Island if Mains fails (due to AMF function).
If Mains is not OK the AMF function starts the Gen-set to Island anyway.
Stop the Gen-set if Mains is OK
Inactive
If Mains not OK the Gen-set stays running due to AMF function anyway.
Taken action in MRS application (AUTO Mode)

Starts the Gen-set – No delay
Active
Close GCB
Open GCB
Inactive
Stop the Gen-set – No delay

Remote TEST
Comm object 621
Description
The controller is switched to the TEST mode (there are fourthree modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when
this binary input is active. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
LBI: S
Sd Override
Comm object 44
Description
If this input is active, all alarms except Emergency Stop and Overspeed are suppressed. The suppressed
alarms will be displayed in the alarm list, but they will not take effect regarding the Gen-set control.
Note: Sd Override (page 417) is indicated in the alarm list if Sd Override mode is active to inform the
operator that the engine is not protected.
IMPORTANT: MISUSE OF THIS INPUT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE GEN-SET!
Note: User protection Sd Override is not blocked

Start Button
Comm object 189
Description
Binary input has the same function as Start Button on the InteliLite 4 front panel. It is evaluated in MAN
mode only.

Stop Button
Comm object 190
Description
Binary input has the same function as Stop Button on the InteliLite 4 front panel. It is evaluated in MAN
Mode only.

8.1.5 Logical binary outputs
What Logical binary outputs are:
Logical binary outputs are outputs for binary values and functions.
Alphabetical groups of Logical binary outputs

LBO: A 421
LBO: C 427
LBO: D 428
LBO: E 428
LBO: F 431
LBO: G 434
LBO: H 440
LBO: I 441
LBO: L 443
LBO: M 443
LBO: N 448
LBO: P 449
LBO: R 450
LBO: S 452
LBO: V 455
For full list of Logical binary inputs go to the chapter Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 420).

Logical binary outputs alphabetically
AIN Switch01 421 Electrical Alarm 430 Ready To AMF 450

AIN Switch02 421 Exercise Timer 1 431 Ready To Load 451
Air Valves 422 Exercise Timer 2 431 Running 451
AL Common BOC 422 FltRes Button Echo 431 Sd Override 452
AL Common Fls 422 Frequency Select 431 Start Button Echo 452
AL Common Sd 423 Fuel Pump 432 Starter 453
AL Common Wrn 423 Fuel Solenoid 432 Stop Button Echo 453
AL Gen Freq Wrn 423 GCB Button Echo 434 Stop Pulse 454
AL Gen Frequency 423 GCB Close/Open 434 Stop Solenoid 454
AL Gen Voltage 423 GCB OFF Coil 435 Supplying Load 455
AL Gen Voltage Wrn 424 GCB ON Coil 436 Ventilation 455
AL Mains Fail 424 GCB UV Coil 436 Ventilation Off Pulse 456
AL Mains Frequency 424 Generator Healthy 438 Ventilation On Pulse 456
AL Mains Voltage 424 Glow Plugs 438
AL Maintenance 1 424 Heartbeat 440 objects
AL Maintenance 2 425 Horn 440
AL Maintenance 3 425 HornRes Button Echo 440
AL Overcurrent 425 Idle/Nominal 441
Alarm 425 Ignition 441
ATT DEF Level Lamp 425 Ignition On 442
ATT Filter Lamp 426 Load Shedding Stage 1 443
ATT HEST Lamp 426 Load Shedding Stage 2 443
ATT Inhibited Lamp 426 Mains Healthy 443
ATT Interlock Status 426 Manual Ready 443
ATT SCR Error Lamp 426 MCB Button Echo 444
ATT Regen ACK Lamp 426 MCB Close/Open 444
ATT PCD Lamp 427 MCB OFF Coil 445
Choke 427 MCB ON Coil 446
Cooling 427 MCB UV Coil 447
Cooling Pump 428 Mode AUTO 448
Dual Operation OK 428 Mode MAN 448
ECU Comm OK 428 Mode OFF 448
ECU Power Relay 429 Mode TEST 448
ECU Red Lamp 429 Not In AUTO 448
ECU Run Stop 430 Not Used 448
ECU Wait To Start 430 Prestart 449
ECU Yellow Lamp 430 Ready 450

LBO: A
AIN Switch01
Comm object 1400
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 1 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on the
adjustment of the setpoints AIN Switch01 On (page 267) and AIN Switch01 Off (page 268). The value is
measured from AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 459) analog input.
6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AIN Switch02
Comm object 1401
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 2 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on the
adjustment of the setpoints AIN Switch02 On (page 269) and AIN Switch02 Off (page 270). The value is
measured from AIN SWITCH 02 (PAGE 459) analog input.

Air Valves
Comm object 1247
Description
This output is activated together with binary output PRESTART (PAGE 449) and opens after the engine is
stopped or in case that engine is not ready.
Image 8.38 Air Valves

AL Common BOC
Comm object 9
Description
Output is activated when any BOC alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No BOC alarm is active and
Fault reset button is pressed

AL Common Fls
Comm object 6
Description
Output is activated when any sensor fail alarm appears.
No sensor fail alarm is active and

AL Common Sd
Comm object 4
Description
Output is activated when any shutdown alarm appears.
No shutdown alarm is active and

AL Common Wrn
Comm object 3
Description
Output is activated when any warning alarm appears.
No warning alarm is active and

AL Gen Freq Wrn
Comm object 1267
Description
This output is active generator frequency warning alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

AL Gen Frequency
Comm object 1266
Description
This output is active when at least one generator frequency alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

AL Gen Voltage
Comm object 1263
Description
This output is active when at least one generator voltage alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

AL Gen Voltage Wrn
Comm object 1289
Description
This output is active when at least one generator voltage warning alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

AL Mains Fail
Comm object 197
Description
Output for signaling Mains Failure. This output is active when at least one mains frequency BOC or Sd alarm
or at least one mains voltage BOC or Sd alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

AL Mains Frequency
Comm object 1271
Description
This output is active when at least one mains frequency BOC or Sd alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

AL Mains Voltage
Comm object 1270
Description
This output is active when at least one mains voltage BOC or Sd alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

AL Maintenance 1
Comm object 2211
Description
Alarm is active when Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours (page 492) or BOC Maintenance Timer 1
RunHours (page 527) or Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 Interval (page 492) or BOC Maintenance Timer 1
Interval (page 527) is active.

AL Maintenance 2
Comm object 2212
Description

AL Maintenance 3
Comm object 2213
Description

AL Overcurrent
Comm object 109
Description
This output is active when the BOC Overcurrent IDMT (page 526) or BOC Short Circuit (page 526)
alarm is present in alarmlist or isn't confirm.

Alarm
Comm object 2
Description
The output is designed to be used as external alarm indication such as a red bulb in the control room etc. The
output is active when at least one unconfirmed alarm is present in the alarmlist and remains active until
confirmation of alarm.

ATT DEF Level Lamp
Comm object 2154
Description
This output is active when ATT DEF Level Lamp is active.

ATT Filter Lamp
Comm object 2152
Description
This output is active when ATT Filter Lamp is active.

ATT HEST Lamp
Comm object 1373
Description
This output is closed if ECU send signal HEST Lamp. If ECU stop send HEST LAMP signal binary input will
be opened without no matter if alarms in alarmlist are confirmed or not.

ATT Inhibited Lamp
Comm object 2155
Description
This output is active when ATT Inhibited Lamp is active.

ATT Interlock Status
Comm object
Description
This output is active when ATT Interlock Status is active.

ATT SCR Error Lamp
Comm object 2153
Description
This output is active when ATT SCR Error Lamp is active.

ATT Regen ACK Lamp
Comm object 2231
Description
This LBO is active when the engine requires to confirm the start of aftertreatment regeneration.
Note: LBO is required in Yanmar engine types

ATT PCD Lamp
Comm object 2446
Description
This LBO is active when the engine Particulate Control Diagnostic System detects removal of DPF, loss of
DPF function or failure of PCD itself.
Note: LBO is required in Yanmar engine types
LBO: C
Choke
Comm object 2091
Description
Logical binary output for choke valve control. Output CHOKE is activated every time when logical binary
output STARTER (PAGE 453) is activated. Output is deactivated when one of these conditions is fulfilled:
Choke Time is elapsed
Generator voltage is higher than Choke Voltage
Logical binary input Choke Inhibit is activated
Or when some of these situations during start occurs:
Any second level alarm
Emergency stop
Stop command
Cranking pause

Cooling
Comm object 74
Description
The output is active when Gen-set is in Cooling state.

Cooling Pump
Comm object 40
Description
This output is dedicated for coolant pump control. It is activated in the moment the Gen-set is started and
remains active until the Gen-set is stopped and After Cooling Time (page 221) elapses or the cranking
pause or the Emergency Stop occurs or the controller is switched to OFF mode.
Image 8.39 Cooling Pump
LBO: D
Dual Operation OK
Comm object 2096
Description
This LBO is active when there is not AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 489) alarm in alarmlist.
LBO: E
ECU Comm OK
Comm object 347
Description
This output is active when an ECU is configured, connected and the communication with the ECU is
established.
Note: When ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 429) is not configured, output is evaluated all the time. If ECU
POWER RELAY (PAGE 429) is configured, output is evaluated only when engine is not stop (ECU POWER
RELAY (PAGE 429) is active).

ECU Power Relay
Comm object 116
Description
This output is to be used for control of "keyswitch" input of an ECU. If the particular ECU does not have
keyswitch or a similar input, it can be used for control of DC power for the ECU.
The output is activated together with PRESTART (PAGE 449) and remains active for the entire duration that
the engine is running. It is deactivated at the moment that the engine comes to a stop (i.e. together with the
FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 432)).
Image 8.40 ECU Power Relay
IMPORTANT: This LBO also affects evaluation of Sd ECU Communication Fail (page 512) or
Wrn ECU Communication Fail (page 485) alarms. With configured LBO ECU Power Relay,
these alarms are evaluated only when this LBO is active. Without configured LBO ECU
Power Relay, these alarm are evaluated all the time.

ECU Red Lamp
Comm object 350
Description
This output is active when the ECU sends an active “red lamp” flag, i.e. it has detected a critical malfunction
and the engine should not be operated until a service check is performed. This flag is taken from the DM1
frame on standard J1939 ECUs. Some ECUs provide this flag in their own proprietary frames and some do
not provide the flag at all.

ECU Run Stop
Comm object 958
Description
Signal for starting and stopping of ECU.

ECU Wait To Start
Comm object 959
Description
This output is active when ECU Wait To Start Lamp is active.

ECU Yellow Lamp
Comm object 349
Description
This output is active when the ECU sends an active “yellow lamp” flag, i.e. it has detected a non-critical
malfunction. This flag is taken from the DM1 frame on standard J1939 ECUs. Some ECUs provide this flag
in their own proprietary frames and some do not provide the flag at all.

Electrical Alarm
Comm object 2410
Description
LBO Electrical Alarm is active when any of generator protections of any alarm level type (Overload, Short
Circuit, IDMT Overcurrent, Current Unbalance, Overvoltage, Undervoltage, Voltage Unbalance,
Overfrequency, Underfrequency, Reverse Power) is active.
LBO Electrical Alarm is deactivated by confirmation of generator protection alarms in alarmlist and
simultaneously generator protections alarms has to be inactive.

Exercise Timer 1
Comm object 1250
Description
This is an output from the Exercise timer 1. This output makes it easy to make periodic tests of the Gen-set
and its activation depends on the setpoints in the Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 273) subgroup. This output is
active when Timer 1 is active.
Note: In the event that both Timers are active at the same time, Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 273) has a
higher priority than Subgroup: Timer 2 (page 281).

Exercise Timer 2
Comm object 1251
Description
This is an output from the Exercise timer 2. This output makes it easy to make periodic tests of the gen-set
and its activation depends on the setpoints in the Subgroup: Timer 2 (page 281) subgroup. This output is
active when Timer 2 is active.
Note: In the event that both Timers are active at the same time, Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 273) has a
higher priority than Subgroup: Timer 2 (page 281).
LBO: F
FltRes Button Echo
Comm object 592
Description
This output provides 1s pulse when:
Fault Reset button is pressed on the controller front facia or
Fault Reset button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Fault Reset command is received via communication line or
The input FAULT RESET BUTTON (PAGE 407) is activated.

Frequency Select
Comm object 1815
Description
The Frequency select output is active when Nominal Frequency (Frequency Settings) is equal to 50 Hz and
is deactivated when Nominal Frequency (Frequency Settings) is equal to 60 Hz.

Fuel Pump
Comm object 1253
Description
Output is activated when the value of Fuel Level lies under the value of setpoint Fuel Pump On (page 228)
and is deactivated when value of Fuel Pump Off (page 229) is reached.
This output also can be activated by binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 407). In this case the binary
output is active until the binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 407) is active or until the value of Fuel Level
reaches 100 % or the time set by setpoint Transfer Wrn Delay (page 230) elapsed.
Note: Setpoints and are invisible until configuration of this LBO.

Fuel Solenoid
Comm object 22
Description
This output controls the fuel solenoid valve. The Fuel Solenoid output has two different behaviors depending
on engine type – gas or diesel. This setting is done by Fuel Solenoid (page 206) setpoint in Engine Settings
group.
Diesel:
The output is activated before binary output STARTER (PAGE 453).The lead time is adjusted by setpoint Fuel
Solenoid Lead (page 215).
Image 8.41 Fuel Solenoid 1

The output is deactivated when:

Emergency Stop comes
Cooled Gen-set is stopped
In pause between repeated starts
Gas:
The output closes together with binary output IGNITION (PAGE 441) when engine RPM exceed 30 RPM (fix
value).
The output is deactivated when:

Emergency Stop comes
Cooled Gen-set is stopped
In pause between repeated starts

LBO: G
GCB Button Echo
Comm object 35
Description
GCB button is pressed on the controller front facia or
GCB button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
GCB command is received via communication line or
the input GCB BUTTON is activated.

GCB Close/Open
Comm object 41
Description
The output controls the generator circuit breaker. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm is
issued.
Note: InteliLite 4 controllers can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
Image 8.44 GCB Close command

Image 8.45 GCB Open command

GCB OFF Coil
Comm object 43
Description
The output is intended for control of open coil of generator circuit breaker. The output gives a pulse in the
moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until the feedback deactivates, but at least for 5
seconds.
Image 8.46 GCB OFF Coil command

GCB ON Coil
Comm object 42
Description
The output is intended for control of close coil of generator circuit breaker. The output gives at least 5 second
pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed.
Image 8.47 GCB ON Coil close command

GCB UV Coil
Comm object 44
Description
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coil of generator circuit breaker. The output is active the
whole time when the generator is running. The output is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the moment the
breaker has to be switched off.

Image 8.48 GCB UV Coil close command
Image 8.49 GCB UV Coil open command

Generator Healthy
Comm object 77
Description
This output is active when the generator voltage, frequency and voltage unbalance is within limits. It is
deactivated:
immediately when the voltage/frequency/voltage unbalance gets out of limits (when GCB is not
closed)
or
with an appropriate delay after the voltage/frequency/voltage unbalance has got out of limits (when
GCB is closed)

Glow Plugs
Comm object 1252
Description
This output is dedicated for diesel engine only. This output will be active for exact time pre-set by setpoint
Glow Plugs Time (page 209) before every starting attempt. The output is deactivated at the same time as
the STARTER (PAGE 453) output is activated (100 ms after PRESTART (PAGE 449) output is deactivated).
Image 8.50 Glow Plugs

When the Glow Plugs Time (page 209) is longer than Cranking Fail Pause (page 207) then the Glow
Plugs Time (page 209) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 207) is long as Cranking Fail Pause (page 207).
Image 8.51 Glow Plugs in Cranking Fail Pause 1
When the Glow Plugs Time (page 209) is shorter than Cranking Fail Pause (page 207) then the Glow
Plugs Time (page 209) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 207) is long as normal Glow Plugs Time (page
209).
Image 8.52 Glow Plugs in Cranking Fail Pause 2

LBO: H
Heartbeat
Comm object 81
Description
This output toggles on/off in a period of 500 ms whenever the controller is switched on and functional.

Horn
Comm object 1
Description
The output designed to be used for acoustic indication of a newly appeared alarm. The output is activated
each time a new alarm has appeared and remains active until one of the following events occurs:
Fault reset is pressed
Horn reset is pressed

Horn Timeout (page 203) has elapsed

HornRes Button Echo
Comm object 31
Description
Horn Reset button is pressed on the controller front facia or
Horn Reset button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Horn Reset command is received via communication line or
the input HORN RESET BUTTON is activated.

LBO: I
Idle/Nominal
Comm object 39
Description
This output is used for switching between idle speed and nominal speed of the engine during the startup
phase, if this feature (input) is available on the particular engine. In the case of some EFI engines, the
idle/nominal switching is performed over the communication bus.
The output Idle/Nominal is activated after the timer Idle Time (page 215) elapses. The Idle Time (page
215) starts to countdown when Starting RPM (page 208) reached. The underspeed protection is not
evaluated during fixed 5 seconds period after reaching Starting RPM (page 208). A Start Fail protection
occurs if the RPM drop below 2RPM during idle.
Image 8.53 Idle/Nominal
Note: Connect binary output Idle/Nominal to speed governor to switch the speed:
opened = Idle
closed = Nominal
(for normally open contact type)

Ignition
Comm object 37
Description
This output is dedicated to controlling the ignition at a gas engine. the output is active together with binary
output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 432) in the moment when the Gen-set reaches at least 30 RPM during
cranking. The output is deactivated 500 ms after all Additional running engine indications (page 107)
will be inactive. the output is deactivated when the Gen-set has to be stopped or in pause during repeated
starts.

Image 8.54 Ignition 1
Image 8.55 Ignition 2

Ignition On
Comm object 1257
Description
This input is on since start button is pressed till the unit is completely stopped (or the engine doesn’t start or
Sd or E-Stop is active)
Note: This function is the same as ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 429) . Ignition ON stays there from
historical reasons.

LBO: L
Load Shedding Stage 1
Comm object 51
Description
Particular instances of the load shedding functionality
The load shedding outputs are activated (load is beeing shedd) in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
The load shedding outputs are deactivated (load is beeing reconnected) in the order 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
The load disconnected by the LBO Nr.1 is the less essential load of these three possible loads instances.

Load Shedding Stage 2
Comm object 52
Description
Particular instances of the load shedding functionality
The load shedding outputs are activated (load is beeing shedd) in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
The load shedding outputs are deactivated (load is beeing reconnected) in the order 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
The load disconnected by the LBO Nr.1 is the less essential load of these three possible loads instances.
LBO: M
Mains Healthy
Comm object 78
Description
This output is active while Mains failure is not detected and Mains voltage and frequency is within limits.
The limits for under/overvoltage and under/overfrequency are the same as for mains voltage/frequency and
can be found in the Mains Settings setpoint group.

Manual Ready
Comm object 1258
Description
This output is active when controller is in MAN mode and the engine is stopped and it is possible to start it
i.e. no red alarm is activated or SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 417) is active (Output READY (PAGE 450) is active).

MCB Button Echo
Comm object 34
Description
MCB button is pressed on the controller front facia or
MCB button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
MCB command is received via communication line or
the input MCB BUTTON is activated.

MCB Close/Open
Comm object 45
Description
The output controls the mainsbus circuit breaker. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm is
issued.
Note: InteliLite 4 controllers can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
Image 8.56 MCB Close command
Image 8.57 MCB Close command

MCB OFF Coil
Comm object 47
Description
The output is intended for control of open coil of mainsbus circuit breaker. The output gives a pulse in the
moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until the feedback deactivates, but at least for
5 seconds.
Image 8.58 MCB OFF Coil command

MCB ON Coil
Comm object 46
Description
The output is intended for control of close coil of mainsbus circuit breaker. The output gives at least 5 second
pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed.
Image 8.59 MCB ON Coil close command

MCB UV Coil
Comm object 48
Description
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coil of mainsbus circuit breaker. The output is active the
whole time when the controller is switched on. The output is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the
moment the breaker has to be switched off.
Image 8.60 MCB UV Coil close command
Image 8.61 MCB UV Coil open command

Mode AUTO
Comm object 19
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in AUTO mode.

Mode MAN
Comm object 18
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in MAN mode.

Mode OFF
Comm object 17
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in OFF mode.

Mode TEST
Comm object 20
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in TEST mode.
LBO: N
Not In AUTO
Comm object 1248
Description
This output is active when controller isn’t in AUTO mode.

Not Used
Comm object 286
Description
Output has no function.

LBO: P
Prestart
Comm object 36
Description
This output can be used for control of any device, which has to be activated just before start. the output is
active for time period of Prestart Time (page 208). The output is deactivated 100 ms before the STARTER
(PAGE 453) output is activated.
Image 8.62 Engine start
When the Prestart Time (page 208) is longer than Cranking Fail Pause (page 207) then the Prestart
Time (page 208) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 207) is long as Cranking Fail Pause (page 207) minus
100 ms.
Image 8.63 Prestart in Cranking Fail Pause 1

When the Prestart Time (page 208) is shorter than Cranking Fail Pause (page 207) then the Prestart
Time (page 208) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 207) is long as normal Prestart Time (page 208).
Image 8.64 Prestart in Cranking Fail Pause 2
LBO: R
Ready
Comm object 62
Description
The binary output is active when the engine is stopped and it is possible to start it i.e. no red alarm is
activated or SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 417) is active.
The binary output is switch on when the Ready state occurs.
The binary output is switch off when the Prestart or the Not Ready or the Stop state occurs i.e. always
except Ready state.

Ready To AMF
Comm object 324
Description
the output is active if the Gen-set is ready to start automatically and take the load if the mains fails, i.e.:
the controller is in AMF operating mode
the controller is in AUTO controller mode and
no red alarm is present in the alarmlist
when the red alarm is confirmed during Stop Valve and other requirements are fulfilled then the LBO is
still inactive until the state ready

Ready To Load
Comm object 58
Description
the output is active whenever the GCB is closed or can be closed i.e. the stabilization phase is finished, the
Gen-set is running and the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 217) timer has elapsed and the Gen-set
voltage and frequency are within limits.
If GCB is open then Gen-set voltage and frequency must be in limits.
If GCB is close then Gen-set voltage and frequency can be out of limits, but protection delay can’t be count
down. If Gen-set voltage and frequency will return into limits until delay is count down then output is still
active.

Running
Comm object 67
Description
The output is designed to be used as an indication that the Gen-set is running. The output is activated if FUEL
SOLENOID (PAGE 432) is active and STARTER (PAGE 453) and PRESTART (PAGE 449) are deactivated. The
out remains active until engine stop and cooling period elapses.
Image 8.65 Running

LBO: S
Sd Override
Comm object 962
Description
The output is active if SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 417) input is active and open if SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 417) input is
inactive. This output is usually used to send information about SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 417) input into ECU.

Start Button Echo
Comm object 33
Description
Start button is pressed on the controller front facia or
Start button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Start command is received via communication line or
the input START BUTTON is activated.

Starter
Comm object 24
Description
This output is dedicated for starter motor control. The number of cranking attempts is adjusted by setpoint
Cranking Attempts (page 206) in Engine Settings group. Cranking fail pause is adjusted by setpoint
Cranking Fail Pause (page 207).
Image 8.66 Starter
The starter output opens when:

Starting RPM are reached
the "firing" speed is reached (gas engines only)
maximum time of cranking is exceeded
request to stop comes up
D+ value is higher than D+ Threshold (page 223)
Oil pressure value is higher than Starting Oil Pressure (page 209)
Generator voltage >25 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 195) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page
195) (any phase)

Stop Button Echo
Comm object 32
Description
Stop button is pressed on the controller front facia or
Stop button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Stop command is received via communication line or
the input STOP BUTTON is activated.

Stop Pulse
Comm object 25
Description
Output is active for 1 second after STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 454) output activation. This signal is sent to ECU
in case of engine stop request.
Image 8.67 Stop Pulse

Stop Solenoid
Comm object 23
Description
This output is dedicated to control the stop solenoid (valve). The output is activated when an engine stop
command is received and is deactivated 12 s after last running engine indication went off, i.e. engine is
stopped.
Image 8.68 Stop Solenoid 1

Image 8.69 Stop Solenoid 2
Note: If Additional running engine indications (page 107) went off during 5 s pause than Stop
Solenoid is not activated again otherwise stop solenoid is activated again.

Supplying Load
Comm object 1249
Description
The binary output depends on measured generator active power. Power is compared with generator nominal
active power with use of hysteresis and with delay of switch 1 s.
When the measured active power is equal to or bigger than 5 % of Nominal Power (page 189) for 1 s then
the binary output is active.
When the measured active power is equal to or lower than 3 % of Nominal Power (page 189) for 1 s then
the binary output is inactive.
LBO: V
Ventilation
Comm object 38
Description
This logical binary output is activated at the beginning of start procedure together with PRESTART (PAGE 449)
LBO. Ventilation output is deactivated when engine stops revolving.
Ventilation LBO is also deactivated immediately when EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 407) (or E-Stop) is
activated or when controller is switched to OFF mode.
Note: The output is intended for control of an engine room ventilation fan, engine container ventilation
fan, container louvres or similar running gen-set technology.

Ventilation Off Pulse
Comm object 2090
Description
This logical binary output is activated on falling edge of VENTILATION (PAGE 455) LBO (when engine stops).
The pulse duration is adjusted by Ventilation Pulse Time (page 231) setpoint.

Ventilation On Pulse
Comm object 2089
Description
This logical binary output is activated on rising edge of VENTILATION (PAGE 455) LBO (at the begining of
prestart period). The pulse duration is adjusted by Ventilation Pulse Time (page 231) setpoint.

8.1.6 Logical analog inputs
What Logical analog inputs are:
Logical analog inputs are inputs for analog values.
Alphabetical groups of Logical analog inputs

LAI: A 459
LAI: C 460
LAI: F 460
LAI: N 460
LAI: O 461
For full list of Logical analog inputs go to the chapter Logical analog inputs alphabetically (page 458).

Logical analog inputs alphabetically
AIN Switch 01 459

AIN Switch 02 459
Coolant Temp 460
Fuel Level 460
Not Used 460
Oil Pressure 461
Oil Temp 461
objects

LAI: A
AIN Switch 01
Comm object 209
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 48. This analog input controls logical binary output AIN
SWITCH01 (PAGE 421). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints AIN
Switch01 On (page 267) and AIN Switch01 Off (page 268).
Note: This function is not suitable for tristate or binary analog sensors.
6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 02
Comm object 210
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 48. This analog input controls logical binary output AIN
SWITCH02 (PAGE 421). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints AIN
Switch02 On (page 269) and AIN Switch02 Off (page 270).
Note: This function is not suitable for tristate or binary analog sensors.

LAI: C
Coolant Temp
Comm object 67
Description
Logical analog input designed for coolant temperature value received from analog sensor. For more
information about wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 48. For more information about wiring
of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 48. The analog value is the input for predefined user
protections Wrn Coolant Temp, BOC Coolant Temp and Wrn Coolant Temp Low.
LAI: F
Fuel Level
Comm object 78
Description
Logical analog input designed for fuel level value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 48. The analog value is the input for predefined analog
user protections Wrn Fuel Level, BOC Fuel Level.
IMPORTANT: For right behavior of this function, curve for analog input has to be in
percentage and setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 227) has to be adjusted correctly.
LAI: N
Not Used
Comm object 230
Description
Input has no function.

LAI: O
Oil Pressure
Comm object 9
Description
Logical analog input designed for oil pressure value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 48. The analog value is the input for predefined analog
user protections Wrn Oil Pressure, Sd Oil Pressure.
Note: This analog function can by also configured on binary input as binary function. In this case choose
OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 412) binary input in the list of binary inputs. Delay of this binary input is adjusted
via the same setpoint like for analog function.

Oil Temp
Comm object 77
Description
Logical analog input designed for oil temperature value received from analog sensor. For more information
about wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 48.

8.1.7 PLC
List of PLC groups
For full list of PLC blocks go to the chapter List of PLC blocks (page 462).
List of PLC blocks

Group: Basic logical functions
OR/AND 463
Group: Comparison of analog inputs

Comparator With Hysteresis 467
Comparator With Delay 469
Group: Time functions

Timer 470
Delay 472

Group: Basic Logical functions
OR/AND
PLC group Basic logical functions
Related FW 1.0.0
Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1
Inputs
Input Type Negation Range Function

Input 1..8 Binary Yes 0/1 Inputs 1..8
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function
Output Binary Yes 0/1 Result of the logical operation
Description
The block performs logical operation OR / AND of 2 - 8 binary operands. The inputs as well as the output can be
inverted.
Function OR
Input 1 Input 2 Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
Function AND
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
There have to be at least 2 inputs every time. There may be up to 8 inputs configured.
Image 8.70 Configuration of OR/AND block
6 back to List of PLC blocks

Ext. XOR/RS
PLC group Basic logical functions

Related FW 1.0.0
Comm object 39
Inputs

Input 1 .. 2 Binary Yes 0/1 Inputs 1 .. 2
Outputs

Output Binary Yes 0/1 Result of the logical operation

Description
The block provides logical function of two values - XOR or RS flip-flop. Both inputs and output can be
inverted.
Function XOR
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
The block contains a setting for RS dominance. This setting is available in the block dialog window (i.e. this
setting is constantly set by configuration and cannot be changed dynamically in operation).
Function RS
R-latch S-latch E-latch JK-latch
Input 1 (R) Input 2 (S)
Q
-1 -1 -1 -1
0 0 Q Q Q Q
0 1 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 1 1 1
-1 -1
1 1 0 1 Q NOT(Q )
Image 8.71 Configuration of XOR/RS block

Group: Comparison of analog inputs
Comparator With Hysteresis
PLC group Comparison of analog
inputs
Related FW 1.0.0
Comm object 3
Inputs

Input Analog No Any Compared value
Input ON Analog No Same as Input Comparative level for switching on
Input OFF Analog No Same as Input Comparative level for switching off
Outputs

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output
Description
The block compares the input value with the comparative levels. The behavior depends on whether the ON
level is higher than OFF level or vice versa.
Image 8.72 Different On and Off levels
Image 8.73 Configuration of Comp Hyst block
Note: Level On and Level Off can be constants or values from controller.
IMPORTANT: In case that values on inputs have different decimal numbers than the values
are converted and the name of block is red. It is strongly recommended to use values with
the same decimal numbers.

Comparator With Delay
PLC group Comparison of analog
inputs
Related FW 1.0.0
Comm object 4
Inputs

Input 1 Analog No Any Compared value
Input 2 Analog No Same as Input 1 Comparative level
Delay Analog No 0.0..3000,0 [s] Comparative delay
Outputs

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output
Description
The block works as an analog switch. It compares the input value with the comparative level. The output will
switch on if the input is equal or higher than the comparative level for time longer than the delay.
Image 8.74 Principle of delay
Image 8.75 Configuration of Comp Time block
Note: Input 2 and Delay can be constants or values from controller.

Group: Time functions
Timer
PLC group Time functions
Related FW 1.0.0
Comm object 14
Inputs

The timer runs only if this input is
Run Binary No 0/1
active or not connected
This input reloads the timer to the
Reload Binary No 0/1
initial value
Reload
Analog No 0,0..3276,7 [s] Initial value of the timer
value
Outputs

Output Binary No 0/1 Timer output
Description
The block works as a countdown timer which is decreased by 1 every PLC cycle. The timer initial value is
adjustable by the "Reload value" input. The timer is automatically reloaded with the initial value when it
reaches zero or it can be reloaded in any other moment using the "reload" input. The timer is held at reload
value until the reload input is deactivated. The timer output is inverted always when the timer is reloaded.
Image 8.76 Principle of timer
Image 8.77 Configuration of Timer block
Note: Input reload value can be constant or value from controller.
Note: If you want the output to start at logical 0, tick First down option. Otherwise the output will start at
logical 1.
IMPORTANT: In case that inputs are not connected and First down option isn´t tick, than
output is active.

Delay
PLC group Time functions
Related FW 1.0.0
Comm object 33
Inputs

Input Binary No 0/1 Input signal to be delayed
Delay of the rising edge resp. pulse
Input time -3200,0..3200,0
Analog No length generated by rising edge of the
up [s, m, h]
input
Delay of the falling edge resp. pulse
Input time -3200,0..3200,0
Analog No length generated by falling edge of
down [s, m, h]
the input
Resets the output to logical 0. The
output remains in logical 0 until new
Input reset Binary No 0/1
rising edge appears on Input (when
Input reset is deactivated already)
Outputs

Output Binary No 0/1 Output signal
Description
This block can work in two modes of operation:
Delay mode - the rising edge at the output is generated with delay of "input time up" when a rising
edge at the input is detected. The falling edge at the output is generated with delay of "input time
down" when a falling edge at the input is detected. If the delayed falling edge at the output came
earlier than the delayed rising edge, then no pulse would be generated at the output.
Pulse mode - a pulse of "input time up" length is generated at the output when a rising edge is
detected, a pulse of "input time down" length is generated at the output when a falling edge is
detected.
Image 8.78 Delay modes principles

Image 8.79 Configuration of Delay block
Note: If Input time up or Input time down value is <0, this input is internally set to zero.
Note: Input time up and Input time down values can be constants or values from controller.
Note: Use Pulse on edge option to choose between delay and pulse mode.

8.2 Alarms
What alarms are:
The controller evaluates two levels of alarms. For more information see Alarm management on page 122.
8.2.1 Alarm levels in the controller

8.2.2 Alarms level 1

What alarms level 1 are:
The level 1 alarm indicates that a value or parameter is out of normal limits, but has still not reached critical
level.
List of alarms level 1

Wrn Module: Slot 1 478
Wrn Module(slotA) - false module 479
Wrn Module(slotA) - unknown module 479
Wrn Module(slotA) - unattended 479
Wrn Module(slotA) - comm. outage 479
Wrn Module(slotA) - unexpected 479
Wrn EM(A) - a message lost 480
Wrn EM(A) - configuration mistake 480
Wrn EM(A) - insufficient 480
Wrn EM(A) - missing or damaged 480
Wrn Event Email 1 Fail 480
Wrn Event SMS 1 Fail 481
Wrn Alarm Email 1 Fail 482
Wrn Alarm SMS 1 Fail 483

Wrn SNMP TRAP 1 Fail 484
Wrn SNMP TRAP 2 Fail 484
Wrn ECUDiagBlocked 485
Wrn ECU Communication Fail 485
Wrn RTC Battery Flat 485
Wrn PasswEnterBlock 485
AHI ECU Yellow Lamp 486
AHI ECU Red Lamp 486
AHI ECU Wait To Start 486
AHI ATT Filter Lamp 486
AHI ATT HEST Lamp 487
AHI ATT SCR Error Lamp 487
AHI ATT DEF Level Lamp 487
AHI ATT Inhibited Lamp 487
AHI ATT Interlock Active 488
AHI ATT Force Regen Active 488
AHI ATT Inhib Regen Active 488
AHI Dual Operation Fail 489
ALI Dual Operation Different FW Version 489
Wrn Dual Operation Master Fail 489
Wrn Dual Operation Slave Fail 490
AHI Dual Operation Master Fail 490
AHI Dual Operation Slave Fail 490
AHI Dual Operation Different Mains 490
AL Transferring Fuel 491
Wrn Charging Alternator Fail 491
Wrn Stop Fail 491
Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours 492
Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 Interval 492
Wrn MCB Fail 494
Wrn Generator L1 Overvoltage 494
Wrn Generator L1L2 Overvoltage 495

Wrn Generator L1 Undervoltage 496
Wrn Generator L1L2 Undervoltage 497
Wrn Generator Overfrequency 498
Wrn Generator Uderfrequency 498
Wrn Overload 498
Wrn Battery Overvoltage 498
Wrn Battery Undervoltage 499
Wrn Password reset e-mail addr is not set 499
Manual Restore 499
Wrn Override All Sd 499
Wrn Production Mode 500
Wrn Brute Force Protection Active 500
Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 1 500
ALI Gen Ph L1 Inverted 503
ALI Gen Ph Rotation Opposite 504
ALI Mains Ph L1 Inverted 504

ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite 505
Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-n 505
Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-ph 505
Mains Overfrequency 505
Mains Underfrequency 506
Wrn Mains Voltage Detected 506
Wrn Wrong GCB Control Mode 506
Wrn Fence 1 Alarm 506
Wrn Fence 2 Alarm 507
Wrn Fuel Theft 507
6 back to Alarms
Wrn Module: Slot 1
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module: Slot 1
Alarm evaluated All the time
This alarm is issued if controller will not be able to communicate with preconfigured
Description
module 1.
6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Module: Slot 2
Alarm Type WRN
Description
module 2.

Wrn Module: Slot 3
Alarm Type WRN
Description
module 3.

Wrn Module(slotA) - false module
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - fake module
Description This alarm indicates that false module is inserted in slot.

Wrn Module(slotA) - unknown module
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unknown module
Description This alarm indicates that unknown module is inserted in slot.

Wrn Module(slotA) - unattended
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unattended
This alarm indicates that two same communication modules are inserted in slots
Description
and one of them will be inactive.

Wrn Module(slotA) - comm. outage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - comm. outage
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication between controller
Description
and module in slot.

Wrn Module(slotA) - unexpected
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unexpected
This alarm indicates that in slot is inserted different module than which is
Description configured or the module is unconfigured and has to be configured for proper
function.

Wrn EM(A) - a message lost
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(A) - a message lost
Description
and module in slot.

Wrn EM(A) - configuration mistake
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(A) - configuration mistake
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with configuration of binary input or
Description
output of module in slot.

Wrn EM(A) - insufficient
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(A) - insufficient
Description This alarm indicates that module does not support all required features.

Wrn EM(A) - missing or damaged
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(A) - missing or damaged
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication with module in slot
Description
(in first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in slot).

Wrn Event Email 1 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Event Email 1 Fail
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 1 (page 326) and email
wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
wasn't send.

Wrn Event SMS 1 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Event SMS 1 Fail
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 309) and SMS
wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
wasn't send.

Wrn Alarm Email 1 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm Email 1 Fail
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
wasn't send.

Alarm Type WRN
wasn't send.

Wrn Alarm SMS 1 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 1 Fail
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
wasn't sent.

Alarm Type WRN
wasn't sent.

Alarm Type WRN
wasn't sent.

Alarm Type WRN
wasn't sent.

Wrn SNMP TRAP 1 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message SNMP TRAP 1 Fail
Description This alarm is issued if TRAP will not be able to reach server.

Wrn SNMP TRAP 2 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message SNMP TRAP 2 Fail

This alarm is issued if TRAP will not be able to reach server, or in case there is no
Description
reply for the server
Wrn ECUDiagBlocked
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ECUDiagBlocked
LBO ALARM (PAGE 425) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp, alarm
Description
automatically disappears.

Wrn ECU Communication Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message ECU Communication Fail
With configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 429) – only when this LBO is
Alarm evaluated active
Without configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 429) – all the time
This alarm occurs when an ECU is configured, but the communication with the
Description ECU is not established or has dropped out. LBO ALARM (PAGE 425) is not
activated, after deactivation of lamp, alarm automatically disappears.

Wrn RTC Battery Flat
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message RTC Battery Flat
Description This alarm is issued if RTC battery is weak or flat and has to be changed.

Wrn PasswEnterBlock
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message PasswEnterBlock
This alarm is issued to indicate that user will not be able to type in password for set
Description amount of time.
Note: This is cause by too many invalid attempts.

AHI ECU Yellow Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message AHI ECU Yellow Lamp
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU Yellow lamp is
Description activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 425) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,
alarm automatically disappears.

AHI ECU Red Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message AHI ECU Red Lamp
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU Red lamp is
activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 425) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,
Description alarm automatically disappears.
Note: This lamp can be ignored during prestart phase. Use InteliConfig to
enable this function.

AHI ECU Wait To Start
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message AHI ECU Wait To Start
Alarm evaluated Only when ECU is connected
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU Wait To Start lamp
Description is activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 425) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,

AHI ATT Filter Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message AHI ATT Filter Lamp
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU ATT Filter Lamp is

AHI ATT HEST Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message AHI ATT HEST Lamp
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU ATT Hest Lamp is

AHI ATT SCR Error Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message AHI ATT SCR Error Lamp
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU ATT SCR Error
Description Lamp is activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 425) is not activated, after deactivation of
lamp, alarm automatically disappears.

AHI ATT DEF Level Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message AHI ATT DEF Level Lamp
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU ATT DEF Level
Description Lamp is activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 425) is not activated, after deactivation of
lamp, alarm automatically disappears.

AHI ATT Inhibited Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message AHI ATT Inhibited Lamp
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU ATT Inhibited Lamp
Description is activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 425) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,

AHI ATT Interlock Active
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message AHI ATT interlock Active
This message is written in the history when LBI ATT INTERLOCK (PAGE 404) is
Description active. LBO ALARM (PAGE 425) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp, alarm

AHI ATT Force Regen Active
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message AHI ATT Force Regen Active
This message is written in the history when LBI ATT FORCE REGEN (PAGE 403) is

AHI ATT Inhib Regen Active
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message AHI ATT Inhib Regen Active
This message is written in the history when LBI ATT INHIBIT REGEN (PAGE 403) is

AHI Dual Operation Fail
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Fail
Alarm evaluated Only during dual operation
This alarm is active when there is fail between controllers in dual operation
function.
Example:
No connection – disconnection of cable
No connection – incorrect settings of COM Modes
Description Controllers not in AUTO mode
Different Operation Modes (AMF controllers only)
Different FW versions in controllers
Different mains statuses in controllers (AMF controllers only)
Note: This alarm is also written to history.

ALI Dual Operation Different FW Version
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Different FW Version
This alarm is active when FW version (all numbers are checked) or Branch of
Description
Master and Slave is different.

Wrn Dual Operation Master Fail
Alarm Type AHI, WRN
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Master Fail
This alarm is active when Master is not able to take the load e.g. there is alarm of
Description 2nd level on Master and setpoint Master Error Protection (page 261) option: Wrn
is selected .

Wrn Dual Operation Slave Fail
Alarm Type AHI, WRN
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Slave Fail
This alarm is active when Slave is not able to take the load e.g. there is alarm of
Description 2nd level on Master and setpoint Slave Error Protection (page 261) option: Wrn
is selected.

AHI Dual Operation Master Fail
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Master Fail
This alarm is active when Master is not able to take the load e.g. there is alarm of
Description 2nd level on Master and setpoint Master Error Protection (page 261) option: AL
Indic is selected.

AHI Dual Operation Slave Fail
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Slave Fail
This alarm is active when Slave is not able to take the load e.g. there is alarm of
Description 2nd level on Master and setpoint Slave Error Protection (page 261) option: AL
Indic is selected.

AHI Dual Operation Different Mains
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Different Mains
This alarm is active when there are different states of mains on controllers. For
Description example Master see healthy mains and slave see mains fail.
Note: This alarm is also written to history.

AL Transferring Fuel
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message Transferring Fuel
Description This alarm is issued if FUEL PUMP (PAGE 432) is active.

AL Fuel Transfer Failed
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Fuel Transfer Failed
Alarm evaluated When FUEL PUMP (PAGE 432) is active
This alarm will occur when there is no increase of fuel level when FUEL PUMP
Description
(PAGE 432) is active.

Wrn Charging Alternator Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Charging Alternator Fail
Alarm evaluated Engine running only
This alarm is issued if the engine is running and the voltage on the D+ terminal is
lower than D+ Threshold (page 223) of the controller supply voltage. This alarm
Description
works similar to the red "battery" alarm indicator on a vehicle dashboard. The
setpoint has to be in Charge Fail or Enabled position to enable this alarm.

Wrn Stop Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Stop Fail
Alarm evaluated While the engine shall be stopped

Related
AMF, MRS
applications
This alarm occurs if the Gen-set shall be stopped, but some symptom indicates that it
is not stopped. The period when the Gen-set shall be stopped begins after the FUEL
SOLENOID (PAGE 432) has been switched off and time delay Stop Time (page 219)
has elapsed and lasts for the entire time the FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 432) or STARTER
(PAGE 453) are off.
Description
Image 8.80 Stop Fail
Note: Gen-set cannot be started until this alarm is inactive and reset.

Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours
The alarm is active when the value Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours (page 376)
reaches 0.
Description The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours (page 232)
(unit is hours-h) and it counts down in hours while engine is running. Setpoint
Maintenance Timer 1 Protection (page 233) has to be set to: Warning

Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 Interval
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 Interval
The alarm is active when the value Maintenance Timer 1 Interval (page 376)
Interval reaches 0.
The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 Interval (page 233)
Description
(unit is in months-m) and it counts down in days based on actual date (No matter if
engine is running or not). Setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 Protection (page 233)
has to be set to: Warning

Alarm Type WRN
reaches 0.

Alarm Type WRN
reaches 0.
Description

Alarm Type WRN
reaches 0.

Alarm Type WRN

reaches 0.
Description

Wrn MCB Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn MCB Fail
This alarm will occur when the MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 411) input does not match
the expected position given by the MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 444) output. It stays
active until the mismatch between the output and feedback disappears.
If there was no command issued by the controller and the breaker
(feedback) changes suddenly the position itself, the alarm will be issued
immediately.
Self-opening of the breaker is not considered a fault and if all mains values
are within limits, the command to reclose the breaker is issued after delay
Description
given by the setpoint Mains Return Delay (page 247) has elapsed.
The alarm will be also issued, if the breaker does not respond to the close
command within 5 seconds. After this period has elapsed the output MCB
Close/Open is deactivated again and the next attempt to close the breaker
will occur first after the alarm is reset.
The alarm will be also issued if the breaker does not respond to the open
command within 5 seconds. The output MCB Close/Open will stay
deactivated. Closing of GCB is blocked until this alarm becomes inactive.

Wrn Generator L1 Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 241)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 242)

Alarm Type WRN
Description

Alarm Type WRN
Description

Wrn Generator L1L2 Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L1L2 > Voltage
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1 and
2. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description

Alarm Type WRN
Description

Alarm Type WRN
Description

Wrn Generator L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L1 < Voltage
Description
Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 241)

Alarm Type WRN
Description

Alarm Type WRN

Description

Wrn Generator L1L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Description

Alarm Type WRN
Description

Alarm Type WRN
Description

Wrn Generator Overfrequency
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator > Frequency
This alarm evaluates the generator overfrequency in the phase L1. The following
Description
Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 243)
Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 244)

Wrn Generator Uderfrequency
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator < Frequency
This alarm evaluates the generator underfrequency in the phase L1. The following
Description
Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 244)

Wrn Overload
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Overload
The alarm is issued when the Gen-set power is over the limit for time period longer
than the delay. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Overload Wrn (page 237) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload BOC (page 237) Overload Del adjusts the delay.

Wrn Battery Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message All the time
Alarm evaluated Wrn Battery > Voltage
This alarm informs the operator that the controller supply voltage is too high. The
following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Battery Overvoltage (page 230)
Battery <> Voltage Delay (page 231)

Wrn Battery Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Battery < Voltage
This alarm informs the operator that the controller supply voltage is too low. The
following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Battery Undervoltage (page 230)
Battery <> Voltage Delay (page 231)

Wrn Password reset e-mail addr is not set
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Password reset e-mail addr is not set
This alarm is active when there is no email address set in the controller and
simultaneously controller administrator password is not the default password.
Description
Note: When default password is changed the Wrn Password reset e-mail addr
is not set will be active after the restart of the controller.

Manual Restore
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message Manual Restore
Alarm is activated when controller is in AUTO mode, Return From Island (page
Description
257) setpoint is set to manual, load is on Gen-set and mains has returned.

Wrn Override All Sd
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Override All Sd
Description This alarm occurs when binary input SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 417) is activated.

Wrn Production Mode
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Production Mode
Alarm is active when the controller has turned on Productiom mode. In turned on
Description
Production mode the user has the highest level 3 access without performing log in.

Wrn Brute Force Protection Active
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Brute Force Protection Active
This alarm is activated when account break protection detects possible attack and
Description at least one account is blocked according to Account break protection (page
154) rules.

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 1
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/Hist.msg. 1
Description This alarm is issued when history event 1 will trigger.

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 2
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 3
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 4
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 5
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 6
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 7
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 8
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 9
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 10
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 11
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 12
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 13
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 14
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 15
Alarm Type WRN

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 16
Alarm Type WRN

ALI Gen Ph L1 Inverted
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ALI Gen Ph L1 Inverted
Description This alarm is issued if generator phase L1 is inverted.

Alarm Type ALI

Alarm Type ALI

ALI Gen Ph Rotation Opposite
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ALI Gen Ph Rotation Opposite
Description This alarm is issued if generator phases are wired in wrong order.

ALI Mains Ph L1 Inverted
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ALI Mains Ph L1 Inverted
Description This alarm is issued if mains phase L1 is inverted.

Alarm Type ALI

Alarm Type ALI

ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite
Description This alarm is issued if mains phases are wired in wrong order.

Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-n
Alarm Type MP
Alarmlist message Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-n
This alarm is issued depending on evaluation of the unbalance of the phase
voltages, i.e. the difference between highest and lowest phase voltage at any
given time. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Mains Voltage Unbalance (page 254) adjusts the maximum allowed
difference between the highest and lowest phase voltage at any given time.
Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay (page 243) adjusts the alarm delay.

Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-ph
Alarm Type MP
Alarmlist message Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-ph
This alarm is issued depending on evaluation of the unbalance of the phase to
phase voltages, i.e. the difference between highest and lowest phase to phase
voltage at any given time. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Mains Voltage Unbalance (page 254) adjusts the maximum allowed

Mains Overfrequency
Alarm Type MP
Alarmlist message Mains Overfrequency
This alarm is active when Mains frequency is above the setpoint Mains
Description Overfrequency (page 254) for the period longer than Mains < > Frequency
Delay (page 256).

Alarm Type MP
Alarmlist message Mains Underfrequency
This alarm is active when Mains frequency is bellow the setpoint Mains
Description Underfrequency (page 255) for the period longer than Mains < > Frequency
Delay (page 256).

Wrn Mains Voltage Detected
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Mains Voltage Detected
Alarm evaluated Gen-set is running
This alarm occurs when setpoint Default Application Select (page 201) is
Description
adjusted to MRS and voltage is detected on mains.

Wrn Wrong GCB Control Mode
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Wrong GCB Control Mode
Alarm evaluated all the time
This alarm is issued when GCB Control Mode is selected to option No Button and
Description
simultaneously the controller is in AMF mode.

Wrn Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Fence 1 Alarm
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of Gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:
Description Geo-Fencing (page 288)
Fence 1 Protection (page 290)
Fence Radius 1 (page 290)

Wrn Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Fence 2 Alarm
related to it:

Wrn Fuel Theft
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Fuel Theft
This alarm occurs when the fuel level value measured at relevant AI (Fuel Level)
Description
drops faster than is the limit adjusted by setpoint Maximal Fuel Drop (page 227).
8.2.3 Alarms level 2

What alarms level 2 are:
The level 2 level alarm indicates that a critical level of the respective value or parameter has been reached.
List of alarms level 2

Sd Module: Slot 1 509
Sd Module(slotA) - false module 510
Sd Module(slotA) - unknown module 510
Sd Module(slotA) - unattended 510
Sd Module(slotA) - comm. outage 510
Sd Module(slotA) - unexpected 511
Sd EM(A) - a message lost 511
Sd EM(A) - configuration mistake 511
Sd EM(A) - insufficient 511
Sd EM(A) - missing or damaged 512
Sd ECU Communication Fail 512
Sd Emergency Stop 512
Sd E-Stop 512

Sd Charging Alternator Fail 513
Sd Overspeed 513
Sd Underspeed 513
Sd RPM Measurement Fail 513
Sd Battery Flat 514
Sd Start Fail 514
Sd GCB Fail 514
Sd Generator L1 Overvoltage 514
Sd Generator L1L2 Overvoltage 515
BOC Generator L1 Undervoltage 516
BOC Generator L1L2 Undervoltage 517
BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph 519
BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-N 520
BOC Generator Overfrequency 520
BOC Generator Underfrequency 520
Mains L1 Overvoltage 521
Mains L1 Undervoltage 521
Mains L2 Undervoltage 522
Mains L1L2 Overvoltage 523
Mains L1L2 Undervoltage 523

Mains Overfrequency 525
Mains Underfrequency 525
BOC Current Unbalance 525
BOC Overload 525
BOC Short Circuit 526
Sd Earth Fault Current 526
BOC Overcurrent IDMT 526
BOC Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours 527
BOC Maintenance Timer 1 Interval 527
Sd Fence 1 Alarm 528
BOC Fence 1 Alarm 528
Sd Fence 2 Alarm 529
BOC Fence 2 Alarm 529
Sd Parallel Work 529
6 back to Alarms
Sd Module: Slot 1
Alarm Type SD
Description
module 1.

Sd Module: Slot 2
Alarm Type SD
Description
module 2.

Sd Module: Slot 3
Alarm Type SD
Description
module 3.

Sd Module(slotA) - false module
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - fake module
Description This alarm indicates that false module is inserted in slot.

Sd Module(slotA) - unknown module
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unknown module
Description This alarm indicates that unknown module is inserted in slot.

Sd Module(slotA) - unattended
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unattended
This alarm indicates that two same communication modules are inserted in slots
Description
and one of them will be inactive.

Sd Module(slotA) - comm. outage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - comm. outage
Description
and module in slot.

Sd Module(slotA) - unexpected
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unexpected
This alarm indicates that in slot is inserted different module than which is
Description configured or the module is unconfigured and has to be configured for proper
function.

Sd EM(A) - a message lost
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(A) - a message lost
Description
and module in slot.

Sd EM(A) - configuration mistake
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(A) - configuration mistake
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with configuration of binary input or
Description
output of module in slot.

Sd EM(A) - insufficient
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(A) - insufficient
Description This alarm indicates that module does not support all required features.

Sd EM(A) - missing or damaged
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(A) - missing or damaged
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication with module in slot
Description
(in first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in slot).

Sd ECU Communication Fail
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd ECU Communication Fail
With configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 429) – only when this LBO is
Alarm evaluated active
Without configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 429) – all the time
This alarm occurs when an ECU is configured, but the communication with the
Description
ECU is not established or has dropped out.

Sd Emergency Stop
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Emergency Stop
Alarm is activated when binary input EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 407) is activated.
The Gen-set shuts down in the moment the input is activated and starting is
blocked until the input is deactivated and fault reset is pressed.
Description Note: Use red emergency button placed on the switchboard door and connect
it to a binary input of the controller. Then configure the function Emergency
Stop to this binary input. It is recommended to use NC contact of the button.
Note: The MCB control is not affected by this alarm.

Sd E-Stop
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Emergency Stop
Alarm is activated when dedicated E-Stop input is activated. The Gen-set shuts
Description down in the moment the input is activated and starting is blocked until the input is
deactivated and fault reset is pressed.

Sd Charging Alternator Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Wrn Charging Alternator Fail
This alarm is issued if the engine is running and the voltage on the D+ terminal is
lower than 80%D+ Threshold (page 223) of the controller supply voltage. This
Description
alarm works similar to the red “battery” alarm indicator on a vehicle dashboard.
The setpoint has to be in Charge Fail or Enabled position to enable this alarm.

Sd Overspeed
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Overspeed
This alarm occurs immediately when the engine speed has exceeded the limit. The
Description behavior of the overspeed alarm is adjusted by the following setpoints:
Overspeed Sd (page 224) adjust the overspeed limit

Sd Underspeed
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Underspeed
This alarm will be issued when the Gen-set is running and then stops by itself, i.e.
the RPM drops under the value of setpoint Underspeed Sd (page 226).
Description
The underspeed alarm starts to be evaluated after successful Gen-set start and is
being evaluated for the entire time that the fuel solenoid is on.

Sd RPM Measurement Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd RPM Measurement Fail
Alarm evaluated During cranking
The alarm is issued if the engine speed has not exceeded the Starting RPM (page
Description 208) within the Maximum Cranking Time (page 207), although some of
additional running engine indication sources indicate that the engine has started.

Sd Battery Flat
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Battery Flat
Alarm evaluated During cranking
This alarm will be issued if the controller was reset during cranking of the gen-set.
If this situation occurs, the controller supposes the starting battery is so exhausted
Description
that its voltage drops so low when starter motor is energized that it causes
controller reset.

Sd Start Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Start Fail
Alarm evaluated When the gen-set is being started
This alarm will be issued after all attempts to start the gen-set have run out but the
Description Gen-set did not start. The following setpoints are related to this alarm:
Cranking Attempts (page 206) adjust the number of attempts

Sd GCB Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd GCB Fail
This alarm will occur when the GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 408) input does not match
the expected position given by the GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 434) output. It stays
active until the mismatch between the output and feedback persists.
If there was no command issued by the controller and the breaker
Description
(feedback) changes suddenly the position itself, the alarm will be issued
immediately.
The alarm will be also issued if the breaker does not respond to an open or
close command within 5 seconds.

Sd Generator L1 Overvoltage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1 > Voltage

Description
Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 240)

Alarm Type SD
Description

Alarm Type SD
Description

Sd Generator L1L2 Overvoltage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1L2 > Voltage
Description

Alarm Type SD
Description

Alarm Type SD
Description

BOC Generator L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1 < Voltage
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 1. The following
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 242)

Alarm Type BOC
Description

Alarm Type BOC
Description

BOC Generator L1L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Description

Alarm Type BOC
Description

Alarm Type BOC

Description

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L1 < Voltage
Description

Alarm Type BOC
Description

Alarm Type BOC
Description

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Description

Alarm Type BOC
Description

Alarm Type BOC
Description

BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance ph-ph

This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase to phase voltages, i.e. the
difference between highest and lowest phase to phase voltage at any given time.
The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 242) adjusts the maximum allowed

BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-N
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance ph-n
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase voltages, i.e. the difference
between highest and lowest phase voltage at any given time. The following
Description
Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 242) adjusts the maximum allowed

BOC Generator Overfrequency
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator > Frequency
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
Description
Generator Overfrequency BOC (page 243)

BOC Generator Underfrequency
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator < Frequency
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
Description
Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 244)

Mains L1 Overvoltage
Alarm Type MP
Alarmlist message No
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases. The following setpoints
are related to it:
Mains Overvoltage (page 250)
Description
Mains <> Voltage Delay (page 253)
Note: Alarm is active only in case the setpoint Connection type (page 192) is
set to 3Ph4Wire or MonoPhase.

Mains L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type MP
are related to it:
Mains Undervoltage (page 252)
Description
set to 3Ph4Wire or MonoPhase.

Alarm Type MP
are related to it:
Description
set to 3Ph4Wire.

Mains L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type MP
are related to it:
Description
set to 3Ph4Wire.

Alarm Type MP
are related to it:
Description
set to 3Ph4Wire.

Alarm Type MP
are related to it:
Description
set to 3Ph4Wire.

Mains L1L2 Overvoltage
Alarm Type MP
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases L1 and L2. The following
Description
set to 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D.

Mains L1L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type MP
Description

Alarm Type MP
Description

Alarm Type MP
Description

Alarm Type MP
Description
set to 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or SplitPhase.

Alarm Type MP
Description
set to 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or SplitPhase.

Mains Overfrequency
Alarm Type MP
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases 1. The following setpoints
are related to it:
Description
Mains Overfrequency (page 254)
Mains < > Frequency Delay (page 256)

Alarm Type MP
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases 1. The following setpoints
are related to it:
Description
Mains Underfrequency (page 255)
Mains < > Frequency Delay (page 256)

BOC Current Unbalance
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Current Unbalance
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase currents, i.e. the difference
between highest and lowest phase current at any given time. The following
Description
Current Unbalance BOC (page 240) adjusts the maximum allowed
difference between the highest and lowest phase current at any given time.
Current Unbalance BOC Delay (page 240) adjusts the alarm delay.

BOC Overload
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Overload

The alarm is issued when the gen-set power is over the limit for time period longer
than the delay. The behavior of the overload alarm is adjusted by the following
Description setpoints:
Overload BOC (page 237) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload Delay (page 237) adjusts the delay

BOC Short Circuit
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Short Circuit
This is a fast overcurrent protection. The following setpoints are related to this
alarm:
Description
Short Circuit BOC (page 238) adjusts the short current limit
Short Circuit BOC Delay (page 238) adjusts the delay in fine steps

Sd Earth Fault Current
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Earth Fault Current
This alarm indicates that the value of earth fault current is higher than adjusted
limit. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description Earth Fault Sd (page 333) adjusts the maximum allowed earth fault
current.
Earth Fault Delay (page 332) adjusts the alarm delay.

BOC Overcurrent IDMT
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd + Name of binary input
This alarm is issued if IDMT protection is activated due to over-crossing the IDMT
curve set by setpoints IDMT Overcurrent Delay (page 238).
The behaviour of the overcurrent alarm is adjusted by the following setpoints:
Description IDMT Overcurrent Delay (page 238) defines the reaction time of the
protection when the current is twice the amount of nominal value.
Nominal Current (page 190) set the nominal current level, where the
alarm starts to be evaluated. The reaction time is infinite at this point.

BOC Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours
The alarm is active when the value Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours reaches 0.
The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenace Timer 1 RunHours (unit is hours-h)
Description
and it counts down while engine is running. Setpoint Maintenance Timer 1
Protection has to be set to: BOC

BOC Maintenance Timer 1 Interval
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Maintenance Timer 1 Interval
The alarm is active when the value Maintenance Timer 1 Interval reaches 0.
The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenace Timer 1 Interval (unit is in months-
Description
m) and it counts down in days based on actual date (No matter if engine is running
or not). Setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 Protection has to be set to: Warning

Alarm Type BOC
Description

Alarm Type BOC
The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenace Timer 2 Interval (unit is in months-
Description

Alarm Type BOC
Description

Alarm Type BOC
The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenance Timer 3 Interval (unit is in months-
Description

Sd Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Fence 1 Alarm
related to it:

BOC Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Fence 1 Alarm

related to it:

Sd Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Fence 2 Alarm
related to it:

BOC Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Fence 2 Alarm
related to it:

Sd Parallel Work
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Parallel Work
Description This alarm is active when GCB is closed externally while MCB is closed.

8.3 Modules
8.3.1 Plug-in modules
The available communication plug-in modules are:
CM-RS232-485 – communication module for connection via RS232 or RS485 line
CM2-4G-GPS – communication module for connection via 4G
CM3-Ethernet – communication module for internet connection via Ethernet
The available extension plug-in modules are:
EM-BIO8-EFCP – extension module with 8 binary inputs/outputs and with earth fault current protection
Note: Controller has 1 plug-in module slots.
Communication modules
CM-RS232-485 530
CM3-Ethernet 532
CM2-4G-GPS 534
CM-RS232-485
CM-RS232-485 is optional plug-in card to enable InteliLite 4 the RS232 and RS485 communication. This is
required for computer or Modbus connection. The CM-RS232-485 is a dual port module with RS232 and RS485
interfaces at independent COM channels. The RS232 is connected to COM1 and RS485 to COM2.
Image 8.81 CM-RS232-485 interface
IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

Image 8.82 Pinout of RS232 line
Image 8.83 Pinout of RS485 line
Image 8.84 Jumpers description
Note: Balancing resistors shall be both closed at only one device in whole RS485 network.
Maximal distance of line is 10 m for RS232 line and 1200 m for RS485 line.
Terminator 120 Ω
Balancing resistor +5 V

Technical data
40 mA / 8 VDC
26 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
14 mA / 24 VDC
10 mA / 36 VDC
Isolation Galvanic separation
Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Instal package to computer or open PSI to instal it into InteliConfig
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via InteliConfig
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate firmware
you want to program into the module (in InteliConfig).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.
The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is reestablished again automatically when the
update process is finished.
CM3-Ethernet
CM3-Ethernet is a plug-in card with Ethernet 10/100 Mbit interface in RJ45 connector. It provides an interface
for connecting a PC with through ethernet/internet network, for sending active e-mails and for integration of the
controller into a building management (MODBUS TCP and SNMP protocols). This card also enables to monitor
and control the gen-set over web browser from any location with internet access using appropriate security
measures.
Image 8.85 CM3-Ethernet interface
Use an Ethernet UTP cable with a RJ45 connector for linking the module with your Ethernet network. The
module can also be connected directly to a PC using cross-wired UTP cable.

Image 8.86 Cross-wired cable
Technical data
General
Width × Height × Depth 73.8 × 50.3 × 21
Weight ~30 g
Power supply 8-36 V DC
Power consumption 1 W
Peak power consumption 2 W
Storage temperature -40 ˚C to +80 ˚C
Ethernet port
100 Mbit/s, full duplex
RJ45 socket
Module setup
All settings related to the module are to be adjusted via the controller setpoints. The respective setpoints are
located in the setpoint Group: CM-Ethernet (page 314).
All actual operational values like actual IP address etc. are available in controller values in a specific group as
well.
Status LED
Blinking frequency Color
Green – everything is OK
Red – some of following errors occurred:
1 Hz unplugged Ethernet cable
module cannot connect to AirGate
module can not obtain IP address from DHCP
Green – firmware is currently being programmed
10 Hz
Red – no firmware present in the module

Firmware upgrade
CM2-4G-GPS
CM2-4G-GPS plug-in module containing a GPS receiver and GSM/WCDMA/LTE modem which can works in
two modes of operation based on the settings in the setpoint Internet Connection (page 295).
Image 8.87 CM2-4G-GPS module
IMPORTANT: Operating temperature of module is from -30 °C to +75 °C.
Note: Cellular data service must be enabled in your SIM card by your mobile operator for successful operation.
CM2-4G-GPS module works with:

WebSupervisor – internet-based remote monitoring solution
AirGate – powerful connection technology to make internet access as simple as possible
CM2-4G-GPS module also works like GPS locator. Geo-fencing function can be used with this module.

Technical data
General
Width × Height × Depth 73.8 × 50.3 × 15
Weight ~35 g
Power supply 8-36 V DC
Power consumption 1.7 W
Peak power consumption 10 W
Storage temperature -40 ˚C to +80 ˚C
GNSS
Antenna interface SMA female, 4 V / 50 mA
Antenna type Active
Cellular
2G (GSM/GPRS/EDGE) Quad band,
850/900/1800/1900 MHz
3G (UMTS/HSPA+) Seven band, 800
(BdXIX) / 850 (BdV) / 900 (BdVIII) / AWS
(BdIV) / 1800 (BdIX) / 1900 (BdII) /
Supported networks and frequency bands
2100MHz (BdI)
4G (LTE) Twelve band, 700 (Bd12 <MFBI
Bd17>, Bd28) 800 (Bd18, Bd19, Bd20) 850
(Bd5) / 900 (Bd8) / AWS (Bd4) / 1800 (Bd3) /
1900 (Bd2) / 2100 (Bd1) / 2600MHz (Bd7)
Antenna interface 2x SMA female (Main and Diversity)
SIM card settings

SIM card must be adjusted as follows:
SMS service enabled
Packet data (Internet access) enabled (when required for the selected mode of operation)
PIN code security disabled
How to start using CM2-4G-GPS module

You will need a controller, CM2-4G-GPS module, antenna and SIM card with SMS and packet data service.
Note: Make sure that your SIM supports the packet data network type you want to use. – i.e. if you want to use
the module in LTE (4G) network you have to confirm with the operator that the particular SIM card supports 4G
network.
Example: APN Name = "internet", UserName = [blank], Password = [blank].
Make sure SIM card does not require PIN code. Use any mobile phone to switch the SIM PIN security off.
Place the SIM card into slot on CM2-4G-GPS card
Connect the antenna to Cellular module antenna connector.

If you want to use the built-in GPS receiver connect also an active GPS antenna to the GPS antenna
connector.
Switch off the controller.
Insert CM2-4G-GPS module into controller
Power up the controller.
Activate CM2-4G-GPS module by switching the setpoint Internet Connection (page 295) to enabled
Enter correct Access Point Name (this information is provided by Mobile Operator). Setpoint can be set on
controller's front panel or by InteliConfig.
Switch the controller off and on.
Wait for approx 2 – 4 minutes for first connection of the system to AirGate. AirGate will generate
automatically the AirGate ID value. Then navigate to measurement screens where you will find signal
strength bar and AirGate ID identifier.
Image 8.88 Main screen of CM2-4G-GPS module
Image 8.89 Screen of AirGate
Modem Status
Code Description
OK Module successfully initialized and connected to the cellular network
E01 Unsuccessful restore to the factory settings
SIM not inserted or locked by PIN.
E SIM Use another device (e.g. mobile phone) to disable the option for SIM to be
locked by PIN
E04 It is not possible to set manually chosen network mode 2G/3G/4G/Automatic
It is not possible to register into cellular network. Possible reasons:
E registration No signal (no coverage, broken or unconnected antenna)
Manually chosen network mode 2G/3G/4G is not available
E context It is not possible to set PDP (Packet Data Protocol) context for defined APN

(Access Point Name). Possible reasons:
Setpoint Access Point Name is not correctly set (format)
Wrong PDP context number
It is not possible to connect to cellular network (ATD*99***context) Possible
E connect reasons:
Setpoint Access Point Name is not correctly set (wrong text)
E09 It is not possible to get signal strength
E10 It is not possible to get operator name
E11 Loss of registration into cellular network was detected
E12 Data error
E13 Data error
E14 Modem was restarted
It is not possible to send SMS. Possible reasons:
E SMS send Wrong number
SIM doesn’t support SMS
E18 Modem hardware configuration error
E conn lost Loss of connection with cellular network
Restart-config Modem was restarted due to the change of controller setpoint
Restart-app Modem was restarted due to the performed cellular connection check
AirGate Status
Code Description
Resolving Resolving
Susp AGkeyEmpty AirGate is not set in the controller
Firmware upgrade

Extension modules
EM-BIO8-EFCP 538
EM-BIO8-EFCP
EM-BIO8-EFCP is optional plug-in card. Through this card controller can accommodate one AC current (CT)
measuring input (1A or 5A input) and up to 8 binary inputs or outputs. In InteliConfig PC configuration tool it is
possible to easily choose if particular I/O will be binary input or output.
Image 8.90 EM-BIO8-EFCP interface
Note: This protection is active ONLY when Engine is running.
IMPORTANT: Earth fault current measurement is supported by controller only in slot A.

Image 8.91 Overview of EM-BIO8-EFCP
Image 8.92 EM-BIO8-EFCP wiring
Note: Current inputs are supported only in MRS 16 and AMF 25 and AMF9 controllers.
EM-BIO8-EFCP technical data
Power supply
Power supply range 8-36 VDC
40 mA / 8 VDC
27 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
22 mA / 24 VDC
19 mA / 36 VDC

Binary inputs
Number Up to 8, non-isolated
Close/Open 0-2 VDC close contact
indication >6 VDC open contact
Binary outputs
Number Up to 8 , non-isolated
Max. current 0,5A
Switching to positive supply terminal
Current measuring input

Number of inputs 2
Nominal input current 1A/5A
Load (CT output impedance) < 0,1
Max measured current from
10 A
CT
Current measurement
2% from Nominal current
tolerance
Max peak current from CT 150 A / 1 s
Max continuous current 10 A
Earth fault current measurement

The Earth Fault protection is done by the extension module EM-BIO8-EFCP.
When the measured current exceeds the set value, which indicates that part of the current is dispersed to earth,
and when the set Earth Fault Delay (page 332) time elapses, the Earth Fault Current Protection (page
331), Sd Earth Fault Current (page 526) alarm. Earth Fault protection is not active when Gen-set does not run
and when the Earth Fault Current Protection (page 331) is disabled.
IMPORTANT: Earth fault current measurement is not intended to protect human health, but the
device!
Image 8.93 Earth fault current protection

Firmware upgrade
8.3.2 CAN modules

The available extension CAN modules are:
Inteli AIN8 – extension CAN module with 8 analog inputs
Inteli IO8/8 – extension CAN module with 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
this CAN module can be switched to Inteli IO16/0 – extension CAN module with 16 binary inputs and 2
analog outputs
Supported combinations of modules

Inteli Inteli Inteli Inteli
Slot Inteli AIN8 IGL-RA15 IGS-PTM
AIN8TC IO8/8 IO16/0 AIO9/1
IMPORTANT: In slot 3, 4 and 5 CAN modules Inteli IO8/8 and Inteli IO16/0 are supported without
analog outputs. Analog outputs of these CAN modules are supported only in slot 1 and 2.
It is possible to add up to 80 binary inputs or up to 68 binary outputs or up to 32 analog inputs on CAN modules.
Extension modules
Inteli AIN8 542
Inteli IO8/8 547
IGS-PTM 554
Inteli AIN8TC 560
Inteli AIO9/1 564

IGL-RA15 569
Inteli AIN8
Inteli AIN8 module is extension module equipped with analog inputs. Inteli AIN8 module is connected to
controller by CAN1 bus.
Image 8.94 Inteli AIN8
Image 8.95 Inteli AIN8 dimensions
Note: All dimensions are in mm.

Terminals
Analog input 8 analog Inputs

CAN CAN1 line
Power Power supply
CAN LED Tx, Rx Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position "ON" – switch both switches)
Note: Impulse input is not supported.
Analog inputs
8 channels
can be configured as:
resistor three wire input
current input
voltage input
All inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
IMPORTANT: Impulse input is not supported in controller.
Supported sensors
Sensors
User curves NI100 [°F] (fix) 0-5 V
PT100 [°C] (fix) NI1000 [°F] (fix) 0-10 V
PT1000 [°C] (fix) 4-20 mA passive

Sensors
NI100 [°C] (fix) 0-2400 Ω 4-20 mA active
NI1000 [°C] (fix) 0-10 kΩ 0-20 mA passive
PT100 [°F] (fix) ±1 V ±20 mA active
PT1000 [°F] (fix) 0-2.4 V
CAN address
DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs.
Note: In case of setting the CAN address to zero, the appropriate group of signals is deactivated.
Firmware upgrade process:
1. Disconnect all terminals from the unit.
2. Separate the top cover of module
3. Put the TEST jumper on a pins
4. Connect the unit with PC via RS232-null modem cable and AT-Link conv
5. Connect power supply of the module (status LED lights continuously)

6. Launch FlashPgr.exe PC software (version 4.2 or higher)
7. In FlashPrg program choose card Inteli AIN8 and load FW for the module
8. Set the proper COM port (connected with the unit) and press Start button

9. Wait till process is done (If the process doesn't start – after 60 second the "Timeout" will be evaluated. In
this case please check:
You have proper connection with the unit
COM port selection is correct
Module has power supply, (no CAN bus connection, status LED lights continuously)
10. After successful programming disconnect AT-Link conv , remove TEST jumper and disconnect power
supply
11. Connect power supply again (status LED should blinking)
12. Module FW is upgraded
LED indication
LED status Description
Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address).
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8 and controller
works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address
module doesn't communicate with the controller).
Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of sensors.
Terminator
Resistance sensor - 3 wires
Note: Ranges: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, 0-2400 Ω, 0-10 kΩ

Resistance sensor – 2 wires
Note: Ranges: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, 0-2400 Ω, 0-10 kΩ
Current sensor - active
Note: Ranges: ±20 mA, 4 – 20 mA
Current sensor - passive
Note: Ranges: 0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA

Voltage sensor
Note: Ranges: ±1 V, 0 – 2,5 V, 0 – 5 V, 0 – 10 V
Technical data
General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Interface to controller CAN1
Protection IP20
Storage temperature -40 °C to +80 °C
Operating temperature -30 °C to +70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3" × 4.3" × 1.8")
Weight 221.5 grams
Analog inputs
Number of channels 8
Range 0-10 V
Voltage
Accuracy: ±0.25 % of actual value + ±25 mV
Range: ±20 mA
Current
Accuracy: ±0.25 % of actual value + ±50 µA
Range: 0- 10 kΩ
Resistive
Accuracy: ±0.5 % of actual value + ±2 Ω
Inteli IO8/8
Inteli IO8/8 module is an extension module equipped with binary inputs, binary outputs and analog outputs.
Inteli IO8/8 is the name of the module, but it is possible to configure the module (by internal switch) to two
configurations:
Inteli IO8/8 – 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
Inteli IO16/0 – 16 binary inputs, 0 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
The detection of communication speed is indicated by fast flashing of status LED. Once the speed is detected
the module remains set for the speed even when the communication is lost. Renewal of communication speed
detection is done by reset of the module.

Image 8.96 Inteli IO8/8
Image 8.97 Inteli IO8/8 dimensions
Note: All dimensions are in mm.

Terminals
Binary inputs 8 binary inputs

Binary outputs 8 binary outputs (8 binary inputs)
Analog outputs 2 analog outputs
CAN CAN1 line
Power Power supply
Binary inputs LEDs 8 LEDs for binary input indication
Binary outputs LEDs 8 LEDs for binary output indication
CAN LED Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position "ON" – switch both switches)
Inputs and outputs

Binary inputs
8 channels
pull up
pull down
All 8 inputs are configured to one type together.
All inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
Binary outputs
8 channels
High side switch
Low side switch

Always all 8 inputs are configured to one type (HSS/LSS) together. All 8 outputs can be modified to inputs by
switch on the PCB ( Inteli IO8/8 to Inteli IO16/0).
Analog outputs
2 channels
voltage 0-10V
current 0-20mA
PWM (level 5 V, with adjustable frequency from 200 Hz to 2400 Hz, with step 1 Hz)
All inputs/outputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
Output state check

Output state check function evaluates in real time the state of binary outputs and adjusted (required) state. In
case of failure (different state of required state and real state) history record and alarm are issued (type of the
alarm is set by "Protection upon module failure" – (No protection / Warning / Shutdown)).
This function is designed for short-circuit or other failure, which causes change of set state of binary output.
CAN address
In Inteli IO8/8 mode CAN address for binary inputs is determined by DIP switch A, CAN address for binary
output and analog outputs is determined by DIP switch B.
In Inteli IO16/0 mode CAN address for binary inputs is determined by DIP switch A, first group of 8 input has
address A, second group of 8 inputs has address A+1. CAN address of analog outputs is set by DIP switch B.
Note: In case of setting the CAN address to zero, the appropriate group of signals is deactivated.
Firmware upgrade process:
1. Disconnect all terminals from the unit.
2. Separate the top cover of module
3. Put the TEST jumper on a pins

4. Connect the unit with PC via RS232-null modem cable and AT-Link conv
5. Connect power supply of the module (status LED lights continuously)

6. Launch FlashPgr.exe PC software (version 4.2 or higher)
7. In FlashPrg program choose card Inteli IO8/8 and load FW for the module
8. Set the proper COM port (connected with the unit) and press Start button
9. Wait till process is done (If the process doesn't start – after 60 second the "Timeout" will be evaluated. In
this case please check:
You have proper connection with the unit
COM port selection is correct
Module has power supply, (no CAN bus connection, status LED lights continuously)
10. After successful programming disconnect AT-Link conv , remove TEST jumper and disconnect power
supply
11. Connect power supply again (status LED should blinking)
12. Module FW is upgraded
LED indication
Binary input
Each binary input has LED which indicates input signal. LED is shining when input signal is set, and LED is
dark while input signal has other state.
Binary output
Each binary output has LED which indicates output signal. Binary output LED is shining when binary output is
set. When this LED is shining, then module is configured as 8 binary inputs and 8 binary outputs. When this
LED is dark, then the module is configured as 16 binary inputs.
LED at power connector – status LED

Dark FW in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address).
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli IO8/8 and controller
works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address
module doesn’t communicate with the controller).
Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of inputs and outputs.
Binary inputs – pull up
There are two options of wiring. On upper picture you can see case when binary input is connected between
BIN2 and COM (COM is connected internally to the GND (-) – dashed line).
On lower picture is case of wiring between BIN2 and GND (-). Both ways are correct.
Binary inputs – pull down
There are two options of wiring. On upper picture you can see case when binary input is connected between
BIN2 and COM (COM is connected internally to the Ucc (+) – dashed line).
On lower picture is case of wiring between BIN2 and Ucc (+). Both ways are correct.

Binary outputs – high side
When high side setting of outputs is chosen – binary output must be connected to the minus potential directly
Terminal VHS (voltage High side) has to be connected to positive potential directly. Maximal current of each
binary output is 500 mA. Size of fuse depends on load.
Binary outputs – low side
When low side setting of outputs is chosen – binary output must be connected to the plus potential of power
supply directly. Minus potential is connected internally – dashed line.
Analog outputs
Note: Limit of analog ground (AGND) is 100mA.
IMPORTANT: Terminator for analog output has special analog ground (AGND), which must not be
connected to the GND.
Technical data
General data
Protection IP20

Dimensions (W × H × D) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3” × 4.3” × 1.8”)
Weight 240 grams
Analog outputs
Range 0-10 V
Voltage Accuracy: ±20 mV + ±0.5 % of actual value
Imax 5 mA
Range: 0-20 mA
Current Accuracy: ±100 µA + ±0.5 % of actual value
Rmax 500 Ω
Level 5 V
PWM Frequency – adjustable 200÷2400 Hz
Imax 20 mA
Binary inputs
Number of channels 8 for Inteli IO8/8, 16 for Inteli IO16/0
Input resistance 4400 Ω
Input range 0 to 36 V DC
Switching voltage level for open contact
0 to 2 V DC
indication
Max voltage level for close contact indication 6 to 36 V DC
Binary outputs
Number of channels 8 for Inteli IO8/8, 0 for Inteli IO16/0
Max current 500 mA
Max switching voltage 36 V DC
IGS-PTM
IGS-PTM module is extension module equipped with binary inputs, binary outputs, analog inputs and analog
output. IGS-PTM module is connected to controller by CAN1 bus.

Image 8.98 IGS-PTM
Image 8.99 IGS-PTM dimensions

Terminals
Binary inputs 8 binary inputs

Analog inputs 4 analog inputs
Analog outputs 1 analog output
Binary outputs 8 binary outputs
CAN CAN1 line
RS232-TTL Interface for programming
Power Power supply
Analog inputs
Analog inputs can be configured for:
Resistance measurement
Current measurement
Voltage measurement
The type of analog inputs is configured via jumpers RUI located on lower PCB.
RUI Analog input configuration

1-2 Resistance measuring
2-3 Current measuring
no jumper Voltage measuring
Supported sensors
Sensors
PT100 [°C] (fix) User curves
NI100 [°C] (fix) 0-100 mV
PT100 [°F] (fix) 0-2400 Ω
NI100 [°F] (fix) ±20 mA

CAN address
Controller type selection
The type of controller to be used with IGS-PTM must be selected via jumper labeled IGS accessible at the lower
PCB.
IGS jumper Controller type

OPEN IL-NT, IC-NT
CLOSE IG-NT, IS-NT, InteliLite
Address configuration
If InteliLite controller type is selected (by IGS jumper), address of IGS-PTM could be modified via jumpers
labeled ADR1 and ADR2.
BOUT
ADR1 ADR2 ADR offset BIN module AIN module
module
Open Open 0 (default) 1 1 1
Close Open 1 2 2 2
Open Close 2 3 3 3
Close Close 3 4 4 4
Programing firmware
Firmware upgrade is via AT-link (TTL). For programming is necessary to close jumper BOOT. RESET jumper is
used to reset the device. Close jumper to reset the device. For programming is used FlashProg PC tool.
LED indication
Binary input
Each binary input has LED which indicates input signal. LED is shining when input signal is set, and LED is
dark while input signal has other state.
Binary output
Each binary output has LED which indicates output signal. Binary output LED is shining when binary output is
set.
LED at power connector – status LED
Dark No required power connected.
Quick flashing Program check failure.
One flash and pause Compensation fail.
Three flashes and
Compensation successful.
pause
Flashes There is no communication between IGS-PTM and the controller.
Power supply is in the range and communication between IGS-PTM and controller
Lights
properly works.

Wiring
Binary inputs
Binary outputs
Resistance sensor
Note: Range: 0-2400 Ω
IMPORTANT: Physical analog input range is 0-250 Ω. In sensor configuration in PC tool it is

necessary to chose 0-2400 Ω sensor HW type to ensure proper function of analog input.
Voltage sensor
Note: Range 0-100 mV

Current sensor – passive
Note: Range: ±0-20 mA
IMPORTANT: Physical analog input range is 0-20 mA. In sensor configuration in PC tool it is

necessary to chose ±20 mA active sensor HW type to ensure proper function of analog input.
Analog outputs
Note: Range: 0 to 20 mA ±0.33 mA
Technical data
General data
Current consumption 100 mA at 24V ÷ 500 mA
Protection IP20
Dimensions (WxHxD) 95 × 96 × 43 mm (3.7" × 3.8" × 1.7")
Analog inputs
Range 0-100 mV
Voltage
Accuracy: 1.5 % ±1 mV out of measured value
Range: 0-20 mA
Current
Accuracy: 2.5 % ±0.5 Ω out of measured value
Range: 0-250 Ω
Resistive
Accuracy: 1 % ±2 Ω out of measured value

Analog outputs
Range: 0 to 20 mA ± 0.33 mA
Current
Resolution 10 bit
Binary inputs
Input resistance 4700 Ω
Input range 0 to 36 V DC
Switching voltage level for open contact
0 to 2 V DC
indication
Max voltage level for close contact indication 8 to 36 V DC
Binary outputs
Max current 500 mA
Max switching voltage 36 V DC
Range 0-100 mV
Voltage
Accuracy: 1.5 % ±.1 mV out of measured value
Range: 0-20 mA
Current
Accuracy: 2.5 % ± 0.5 Ω out of measured value
Range: 0-250 Ω
Resistive
Accuracy: 1 % ±2 Ω out of measured value
Inteli AIN8TC
Inteli AIN8TC module is extension module equipped with 8 analog inputs dedicated for thermocouple sensors
only.

Image 8.100 Inteli AIN8TC
Image 8.101 Inteli AIN8TC dimensions

Terminals
ANALOG INPUT 8 analog Inputs

CAN CAN1 line
POWER Power supply
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position "ON")
TEST jumper Upgrade of SW
AT-LINK Connector for AT-LINK
Analog inputs
8 channels
can be configured as thermocouple sensors only
Supported sensors
Sensors
Thermocpl J [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl J [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°C] (fix)

Thermocpl (nc) K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) K [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°F] (fix)
Note: "nc" means not cold junction compensation (by external sensor). In this case is used internal temperature
sensor on the PCB
Address and DIP switch setting

DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs.
Firmware is upgraded via AT-link (TTL). For programming it is necessary to close jumper TEST.
For programming FlashProg PC tool version 4.2 or higher must be used.
LED indication

Dark FW in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address)
Fast flashing Detection of CAN communication speed
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8TC and
controller works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN
address module doesn't communicate with the controller)
Wiring
Analog inputs
Terminator

Technical data
Dimension (W × H × D) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3” × 4.3” × 1.8”)

Weight 237.5 grams
Analog inputs (not electric separated) 8, no galvanic separated

Measuring ±100 mV
Accuracy ± 0.1 % of actual value + ± 100 µV (± 3 °C)
Internal sensor for measuring cold junction - Accuracy ±1 °C in temperature range -20 °C ÷ +70 °C
CANbus is galvanic separated from the
measurement and power supply.
All analog inputs are galvanic separated from
Galvanic separation
power supply.
Analog inputs are not galvanic separated
between channels
Protection IP20
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Heat radiation 2W
Thermocouples galvanically separated and galvanically non-separated are supported.
Inteli AIO9/1
Inteli AIO9/1 module is extension module equipped with analog inputs and outputs – designed for DC
measurement.

Image 8.102 Inteli AIO9/1
Image 8.103 Inteli AIO9/1 dimensions

Terminals
ANALOG INPUT 9 channels

ANALOG OUTPUTS 1 channel
CAN CAN1 line
POWER Power supply
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position "ON")
TEST jumper Upgrade of SW
AT-LINK Connector for AT-LINK (Upgrade of SW)
Analog inputs
4 channels AIN1 – AIN4 can be configured as:
Sensor ±65V (it is determinated for measurement of battery voltage)
4 channels AIN5 – AIN8 can be configured as:
Thermocouples – type J,K or L (in °C or °F)
Sensor ±75mV DC – (for connecting current shunts)
1 channel AIN9 can be configured as:
RTD (Pt1000, Ni1000)
Common resistance 0-2400Ω

Analog outputs
1 channel AOUT1. Type of output:
0-10V DC
0-20mA
PWM (5 V, freq 2.4 Hz ÷2.4 kHz)
Analog output has 4-pins connector – GND and one pin for each type of output.
All analog inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
Supported sensors
Sensors
User curves
PT1000 [°C] (fix)
NI1000 [°C] (fix)
PT1000 [°F] (fix)
NI1000 [°F] (fix)
0-2400 Ω (fix linear)
±65 V DC (fix linear)
±75 mV (fix linear)
Thermocpl J [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) K [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°F] (fix)
Address and DIP switch setting

DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs and outputs.
Programming Firmware
Firmware upgrade is via AT-link (TTL). For programming it is necessary to close jumper TEST and switch OFF
and switch ON the power supply.
For programming use FlashProg PC tool version 4.4 or higher.
LED indication

Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address)

Fast flashing Detection of CAN communication speed
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8TC and
controller works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN
address module doesn’t communicate with the controller)
Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of sensors.
Measuring resistance – AIN9

2 – wire measurement
Ranges: Pt1000, Ni1000, 0 – 2400 Ω.

Analog input 9 is determined for measuring resistance only.
Technical data
Dimension (W × H × D) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3” × 4.3” × 1.8”)

Weight 248 grams
CAN1 – galvanic separated from power supply
Interface to controller
and measurement,

Analog inputs (not electric separated) 9 channels
0-65 V ± 0.25 % of actual value + ± 120 mV
Measurement is not galvanic separated from power
Range
supply, but IN- is not interconnected with GND –
AIN1-AIN4 – Voltage inputs
there is floating measurement.
Accuracy of
± 0,1 % of actual value + ± 100 µV (± 3 °C)
measurement
Range ± 75 mV (nominal) (measurement up to ±80 mV)
AIN5-AIN8 – Voltage inputs Accuracy of ± 0.1 % of actual value + ± 75 µV
measurement Galvanic separated from power supply
Range 0- 2400 Ω
± 0.5 % of actual value + ± 4 Ω Pt1000, Ni1000 ±
AIN9 resistance input Accuracy of
2,5 °C
measurement
It is not galvanic separated from power supply.
Analog output
I 0-20mA /500Rmax. ± 1 % of actual value + ± 200 uA
U 0-10V ± 0.5 % of actual value + ± 50 mV
PWM – 5 V, 200 Hz-2.4kHz 15 mA max.
Galvanic separated from power supply
Galvanic separation CAN bus is galvanic separated from the measurement and power supply
Protection IP20
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 80 °C
The product is fully supported in fw IGS-NT 3.1.1 or higher.

Information about support this module in IGS-NT fw branches and ID-DCU – please read New Feature Lists.
IGL-RA15
Remote annunciator (IGL-RA15) is designed as an extension signaling unit.
The unit is equipped with a fully configurable tri-color (red, orange, green) LED for intuitive operation
together with high functionality.

Image 8.104 IGL-RA15
Image 8.105 IGL-RA15 dimensions
Terminals
Horn Horn
CAN CAN1 line
Power Power supply
CAN address
Address Jumper A Jumper B

1 OPEN OPEN
5+6 CLOSED OPEN
Customer defined CLOSED CLOSED
SW changing of CAN1 address is enabled only when both jumpers are closed. Any one of these addresses (1+2
or 3+4 or 5+6 or 7+8) can be set by following steps:
Switch to programming mode (Hold the Horn reset and Lamp test when unit is powering on). Status led is
yellow

Press Lamp test sixteen times
Set the address up by pressing Horn reset.
The number of red luminous LEDs means the CAN1 addresses (two for addresses 1+2, four for
addresses 3+4, six for addresses 5+6 and eight for addresses 7+8)
Press Lamp test
LED indication
Each LED color is adjusted independently of controller output settings. If controller output 1 is set as "Common
Shutdown" it doesn’t mean red LED1 color for iGL-RA15. The LEDs color can be adjusted by following steps:
yellow
Press Horn reset to change the LED1 color (green, yellow, red)
Press Lamp test to switch to the next LED color adjusting
Continue to adjust all LEDs color
After LED15 color adjusting press three times Lamp test
Note: If there is no operator action during address setting, color adjusting or timeout setting, the unit returns to
normal operation without changes saving.
Status LED
The signals LEDs are handled like binary outputs. It means all what can be configured to binary outputs can be
also configured to the LEDs of IGL-RA15.
Lights Configured logical output is active on the controller
Dark green LED Configured logical output is not active on the controller
Configured logical output is not active on the controller and horn reset was
Dark yellow or red LED
pressed.
Configured logical output is not active on the controller and horn reset was still
Yellow or red LED blinks
not pressed.
Power LED
Blinking green The unit is OK and the communication to the master controller is OK.
Blinking red The unit is OK, but the communication to the master controller is not running.
Blinking yellow EEPROM check not passed OK after power on
Yellow Horn timeout or controller address adjustment
Horn setting
The horn output is activated if any of red or yellow LED is on. Output is on until pressing Horn reset or horn
timeout counts down. The timeout can by set by following steps:
yellow
Press Lamp test fifteen times

Set the horn timeout by pressing Horn reset.
The number of green luminous LEDs means timeout in 10 s (any for disabling horn output, 1 for 10s
timeout, 2 for 10s timeout, 15 for disabling horn timeout).
Press Lamp test two times
Note: If there is no operator action during address setting, color adjusting or timeout setting, the unit returns to
normal operation without changes saving.
The horn is activated if:

Some of red or yellow LED lights up or
At the end of the extended lamp test. See chapter Lamp and horn test (page 572)
The horn can be silenced:
By pressing horn reset button or
It silences automatically after adjusted time
Lamp and horn test

Pressing and holding lamp test button for less than 2 s execute the basic lamp test. All LEDs light up with the
configured color. If the button is hold longer than 2 s, an extended test is started. Every LED is tested step-by-
step in green color and then in red color. The horn is activated at the end of the test. After that the unit returns to
normal operation. The horn can be silenced with horn reset.
Wiring
* terminator resistor only when iGL-RA 15 is the last unit on the CAN1 bus.
Note: The shielding of the CAN bus cable has to be grounded at one point only!
Note: See the section Technical data (page 181) for recommended CAN bus cable type.

Technical data
General data
Current consumption 0.35-0.1A (+1Amax horn output) depends on supply voltage
Protection IP65
Humidity 85%
Dimensions (WxHxD) 180 × 120 × 55 mm
Weight 950 g
Horn output
Maximum current 1.0 A
Maximum switching voltage 36 V DC
CAN bus interface

Galvanic separated
Maximal CAN bus length 200 m
Speed 250 kBd
Nominal impedance 120 Ω
Cable type twisted pair (shielded)
Following dynamic cable parameters are important especially for maximal 200 meters CAN bus length
Nominal Velocity of Propagation min. 75 % (max. 4.4 ns/m)
2
Wire crosscut min.0.25 mm
Maximal attenuation (at 1 MHz) 2 dB / 100 m
Recommended Industrial Automation & Process Control Cables
3082A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3086A DeviceBus for Honeywell SDS
BELDEN (www.belden.com) 3087A DeviceBus for Honeywell SDS
3105A Paired EIA Industrial RS485 cable
Unitronic BUS DeviceNet Trunk Cable
Unitronic BUS DeviceNet Drop Cable
LAPP CABLE (www.lappcable.com)
Unitronic BUS CAN
Unitronic-FD BUS P CAN UL/CSA
6 back to Appendix

Il4 Amf9

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Il4 Amf9

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Il4 Amf9

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

InteliLite 4

Copyright © 2021 ComAp a.s.

1.4 General warnings 7 3.2 MRS – Manual Remote Start 19

1.4.1 Remote control and programing 7

2 System overview 10 4.4.2 Grounding 24

2.1 General description 10 4.4.3 Power supply 24

2.1.1 The key features of InteliLite 4 10 4.4.4 Measurement wiring 25

2.2 True RMS measurement 10 4.4.5 Magnetic pick-up 44

2.3 Configurability and monitoring 10 4.4.6 Binary inputs 45

2.3.1 Supported configuration and monitoring 4.4.7 Binary Outputs 46

InteliLite 4 AMF 9 1.0.0 Global Guide 2

5.4.6 Connection troubleshooting 88 6.1 PC 160

5.4.7 Function description 89 6.1.1 Direct communication 160

5.4.8 Firmware compatibility 89 6.1.2 Remote communication 161

5.5 Functions 90 6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 166

5.5.1 Operating Modes 90 6.2.1 SNMP 167

5.5.2 Start-stop sequence 92 6.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP 168

5.5.3 Engine start 94

InteliLite 4 AMF 9 1.0.0 Global Guide 3

InteliLite 4 AMF 9 1.0.0 Global Guide 4

6 back to Table of contents

1.1 Clarification of Notation

1.2 About this Global Guide

1.3 Legal notice

InteliLite 4 AMF 9 1.0.0 Global Guide 5

1.3.1 General security recommendations and set of measures

InteliLite 4 AMF 9 1.0.0 Global Guide 6

1.3.2 Used open source software

1.4 General warnings

1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility

1.4.3 Dangerous voltage

1.4.4 Adjust the setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 9 1.0.0 Global Guide 7

1.5 Functions and protections

Description ANSI code Description ANSI code

1.6 Certifications and standards

1.7 Document history

InteliLite 4 AMF 9 1.0.0 Global Guide 8

InteliLite 4 AMF 9 1.0.0 Global Guide 9

6 back to Table of contents

2.1 General description

2.1.1 The key features of InteliLite 4

2.2 True RMS measurement

2.3 Configurability and monitoring

2.3.1 Supported configuration and monitoring tools

InteliLite 4 AMF 9 1.0.0 Global Guide 10

2.3.2 Configuration parts

Image 2.1 Principle of binary inputs and outputs configuration

InteliLite 4 AMF 9 1.0.0 Global Guide 11

This tool provides the following functions:

This tool provides the following functions:

WebSupervisor available at: www.websupervisor.net

This tool provides the following functions:

InteliLite 4 AMF 9 1.0.0 Global Guide 12

0/100 Mbit interface over RJ45 socket

InteliLite 4 AMF 9 1.0.0 Global Guide 13

2.6 CAN modules

InteliLite 4 AMF 9 1.0.0 Global Guide 14

2.6.3 Inteli AIN8TC